Acura MDX Owners Manual 2008 PDF

Main Menu
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2008 Acura MDX was a wise investment. As you read this manual, you will
It will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your vehicle, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owners manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the

instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealers staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
i
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
ii
2008 MDX

Main Menu
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important Safety Labels on the vehicle.
responsibility. Safety Messages preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
To help you make informed These signal words mean:
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
other information on labels and in HURT if you dont follow instructions.
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
hurt you or others. HURT if you dont follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or You CAN be HURT if you dont follow

possible to warn you about all the instructions.
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must Safety Headings such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
use your own good judgement. Safety Precautions.
Safety Section such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
iii
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Important Handling Information
Your MDX has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read Driving Guidelines on page 338 of this manual and the
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 377 . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of
control or an accident.
iv
2008 MDX
2008 MDX Online Reference Owner's Manual
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety .............................................................................................................................. iii
Important Handling Information .................................................................................................................... iv
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) .................................................................................................... 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) .................................................... 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column) ..... 61
Features (climate control,audio,rear entertainment,steering wheel,security,cruise control,and other convenience items) ......... 169
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break- in, and cargo loading) ..................................................................... 321
Driving (engine and transmission operation) ................................................................................................ 337
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)........................................... 381
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses) ............................... 423
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ....................................... 449
Warranty and Customer Relations (U. S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ... 465
Authorized Manuals (U. S. only) (how to order) ......................................................................................... 469
Index ............................................................................................................................... ........................................ I
Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)
00X31-STX-6102 1

Main Menu
Overview of Contents
Contents Before Driving Technical Information

A convenient reference to the What gasoline to use, how to break- ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
sections in this manual. in your new vehicle, and how to load and technical information.
luggage and other cargo.
Your Vehicle at a Glance Warranty and Client Relations
A quick reference to the main Driving (U.S. and Canada only)
controls in your vehicle. The proper way to start the engine, A summary of the warranties
shift the transmission, and park; plus covering your new vehicle, and how
Driver and Passenger Safety what you need to know if youre to contact us for any reason. Refer to
Important information about the planning to tow a trailer. your warranty manual for detailed
proper use and care of your vehicles information.
seat belts, an overview of the Maintenance
supplemental restraint system, and The maintenance minder shows you Authorized Manuals
valuable information on how to when you need to take your vehicle (U.S. only)
protect children with child restraints. to the dealer for maintenance service. How to order manuals and other
There is also a list of things to check technical literature.
Instruments and Controls and instructions on how to check
Explains the purpose of each them. Index
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the Taking Care of the Unexpected Service Information Summary
dashboard and steering column. This section covers several problems A summary of the information you
motorists sometimes experience, need when you pull up to the fuel
Features and details how to handle them. pump.
How to operate the climate control
system, the audio system, rear
entertainment system, and other
convenience features.
2
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
DRIVERS FRONT INSTRUMENT PANEL HomeLink BUTTONS MOONROOF SWITCH MIRROR CONTROL

AIRBAG(P.9, 27) INDICATORS (P.63) (P.276) (P.152) AUTO BUTTON
GAUGES (P.72) (P.154)
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM PASSENGERS
(P.157) FRONT AIRBAG
(P.9, 27)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.130) CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM (P.170)
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.153) AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.180)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES AUTOMATIC
(P.149) TRANSMISSION
(P.341)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE BUTTON
(P.323)
REAR CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
POWER TAILGATE (P.175)
BUTTON (P.132)
HOOD RELEASE PARKING BRAKE AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS HEADPHONE CONNECTORS

HANDLE (P.325) PEDAL (P.153) (P.267) (P.268)
: If equipped CONTINUED
3
2008 MDX

Main Menu
HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/ STEERING WHEEL WINDSHIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL

HEADLIGHT WASHER FRONT FOG LIGHTS AUDIO CONTROLS WIPERS/WASHERS BRIGHTNESS
SWITCH2 (P.118) (P.233) (P.116) (P.123)
(P.117)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
VEHICLE STABILITY OFF INDICATOR
ASSIST SYSTEM (P.34)
OFF SWITCH
(P.360) HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
MIRROR CONTROLS (P.122)
(P.155)
REAR WINDOW
DRIVING POSITION DEFOGGER
MEMORY SYSTEM (P.122)
(P.157)
ACCESSORY POWER
POWER DOOR LOCK SOCKETS
MASTER SWITCH (P.166)
(P.130)
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.153) SEAT HEATER
HORN1 SWITCHES
POWER WINDOW (P.148)
SWITCHES
(P.149) ACTIVE DAMPER
SYSTEM SWITCH2
FUEL FILL DOOR POWER TAILGATE HOOD RELEASE STEERING WHEEL CRUISE CONTROL (P.361)
RELEASE BUTTON BUTTON2 HANDLE ADJUSTMENTS BUTTONS
(P.323) (P.132) (P.325) (P.124) (P.270)
1: To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
2: If equipped
4
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important Additional Information About All Children Should Sit in a
information about how to protect Your Seat Belts ........................ 20 Back Seat .................................. 38
yourself and your passengers. It Seat Belt System Components ... 20 The Passengers Front Airbag
shows you how to use seat belts. It Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 21 Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 38

explains how your airbags work. And Automatic Seat Belt If You Must Drive with Several
it tells you how to properly restrain Tensioners ................................ 22 Children .................................... 40
infants and children in your vehicle. Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 23 If a Child Requires Close
Additional Information About Attention ................................... 40
Your Airbags ............................ 24 Additional Safety Precautions .... 41
Airbag System Components ....... 24 Protecting infants and
How Your Front Airbags Small Children.......................... 42
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6 Work.......................................... 27 Protecting Infants ........................ 42
Your Vehicles Safety Features........ 7 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 30 Protecting Small Children .......... 43
Seat Belts ........................................ 8 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 45
Airbags ............................................ 9 Work.......................................... 32 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 46
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 33 With LATCH ................................ 47
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11 How The Side Airbag Off With a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt .. 50
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 12 Indicator Works ....................... 33 With a Tether ............................... 51
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 13 How the Passenger Airbag Protecting Larger Children ............ 54
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 14 Off Indicator Works ................ 34 Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 54
5. Fasten and Position the Seat Airbag Service .............................. 35 Using a Booster Seat ................... 55
Belts ...................................... 15 Additional Safety Precautions .... 35 When Can a Child Sit in Front ... 56
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Protecting Children General Additional Safety Precautions .... 57
Position ................................. 17 Guidelines ................................. 37 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 58
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18 All Children Must Be Safety Labels .................................... 59
Additional Safety Precautions .... 19 Restrained ................................ 37
5
2008 MDX

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Important Safety Precautions
Youll find many safety Restrain All Children every additional drink. So dont drink
recommendations throughout this Children age 12 and under should and drive, and dont let your friends
section, and throughout this manual. ride properly restrained in a back drink and drive, either.
The recommendations on this page seat, not the front seat. Infants and
are the ones we consider to be the small children should be restrained Control Your Speed
most important. in a child seat. Larger children Excessive speed is a major factor in
should use a booster seat and a lap/ crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
Always Wear Your Seat Belt shoulder belt until they can use the the higher the speed, the greater the
A seat belt is your best protection in belt properly without a booster seat risk, but serious injuries can also
all types of collisions. Airbags are (see pages 37 57 ). occur at lower speeds. Never drive
designed to supplement seat belts, faster than is safe for current
not replace them. So even though Be Aware of Airbag Hazards conditions, regardless of the
your vehicle is equipped with airbags, While airbags can save lives, they maximum speed posted.
make sure you and your passengers can cause serious or fatal injuries to
always wear your seat belts, and occupants who sit too close to them, Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
wear them properly (see page 15 ). or are not properly restrained. Condition
Infants, young children, and short Having a tire blowout or a
adults are at the greatest risk. Be mechanical failure can be extremely
sure to follow all instructions and hazardous. To reduce the possibility
warnings in this manual. of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
Don tDrink and Drive and perform all regularly scheduled
Alcohol and driving dont mix. Even maintenance (see page 415 ).
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
6
2008 MDX


Your Vehicle sSafety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(1) (4) (9) features that work together to
(3) protect you and your passengers
during a crash.

Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
(7) strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
(6) (8) (2) However, you and your passengers

(10) cant take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
(5) (11) (1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
a proper position and always wear
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(4) Head Restraints features can contribute to injuries if
(2) (5) Collapsible Steering Column they are not used properly.
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags The following pages explain how you
(9) Side Curtain Airbags can take an active role in protecting
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners yourself and your passengers.
(11) Door Locks
7
2008 MDX


Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Your vehicle is equipped with seat against the inside of the vehicle
belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly and against other occupants.
increases the chance of serious
Your seat belt system also includes injury or death in a crash, even Keep you from being thrown out
an indicator on the instrument panel though your vehicle has airbags. of the vehicle.
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts. Be sure you and your Help keep you in a good position
passengers always wear seat should the airbags ever deploy. A
Why Wear Seat Belts belts and wear them properly. good position reduces the risk of
Seat belts are the single most injury from an inflating airbag and
effective safety device for adults and allows you to get the best
larger children. (Infants and smaller When properly worn, seat belts: advantage from the airbag.
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.) Keep you connected to the vehicle Of course, seat belts cannot
so you can take advantage of the completely protect you in every
Not wearing a seat belt properly vehicles built-in safety features. crash. But in most cases, seat belts
increases the chance of serious can reduce your risk of serious
injury or death in a crash, even Help protect you in almost every injury.
though your vehicle has airbags. type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and What you should do: Always wear
In addition, most states and all rollovers. your seat belt, and make sure you
Canadian provinces require you to wear it properly.
wear seat belts.
8
2008 MDX


Airbags

Your vehicle has a supplemental Your vehicle also has side airbags to In addition, your vehicle has side
restraint system (SRS) with front help protect the upper torso of the curtain airbags to help protect the
airbags to help protect the heads and driver or a front seat passenger heads of the driver, front passenger,
chests of the driver and a front seat during a moderate to severe side and passengers in the outer rear
passenger during a moderate to impact (see page 30 for more seating positions during a moderate
severe frontal collision (see page information on how your side airbags to severe side impact or rollover
27 for more information on how work). (see page 32 for more information
your front airbags work). on how your side curtain airbags
work).
CONTINUED
9
2008 MDX


The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you
upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety.
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while
They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A Remember, however, that no safety
the seat belts. front passenger should move their system can prevent all injuries or
seat as far back from the dashboard deaths that can occur in a severe
Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible. crash, even when seat belts are
impacts, or minor frontal or side properly worn and the airbags deploy.
collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.

To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
10
2008 MDX


Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Your vehicle has a door and tailgate

The following pages provide monitor on the multi-information
instructions on how to properly display to indicate when a specific
protect the driver, adult door or the tailgate is not tightly

passengers, and teenage children closed. You will see the appropriate
who are large enough and mature indicator and the message for each
enough to drive or ride in the front. condition.
See pages 37 41 for important

guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
When the tailgate is not tightly
1. Close and Lock the Doors closed, the TAILGATE OPEN
After everyone has entered the message will come on.
vehicle, be sure the doors and the
tailgate are closed and locked.
When one or more doors are not

tightly closed, the DOOR OPEN
message will come on.
CONTINUED
11
2008 MDX


Locking the doors reduces the 2.Adjust the Front Seats

chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent

an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
Your vehicle has the auto door

When both tailgate and one or more locking/unlocking feature. For more
doors are not tightly closed, the information, see page 130 . Adjust the drivers seat as far to the
DOOR & TAILGATE OPEN rear as possible while allowing you to
message will come on. maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
12
2008 MDX


If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious

wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to See page 140 for how to adjust the
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the front seats.
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page 124 ). Adjust the drivers seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
If you cannot get far enough away leaving ample space between your
from the steering wheel and still chest and the airbag cover in the
reach the controls, we recommend center of the steering wheel.
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help. Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
CONTINUED
13
2008 MDX


4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head

can result in serious injury or restraints reduces their
death in a crash. effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well Make sure head restraints are
back in the seat. in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Reclining a seat-back so that the

shoulder part of the belt no longer Properly adjusted head restraints
rests against the occupants chest will help protect occupants from
reduces the protective capability of Adjust the drivers head restraint so whiplash and other crash injuries.
the belt. It also increases the chance the center of the back of your head
of sliding under the belt in a crash rests against the center of the See page 141 for how to adjust the
and being seriously injured. The restraint. head restraints and how the drivers
farther a seat-back is reclined, the and front passengers active head
greater the risk of injury. Have passengers adjust their head restraints work.
restraints properly as well. Taller
See page 140 for how to adjust the persons should adjust their restraint
seat-backs. as high as possible.
14
2008 MDX


5.Fasten and Position the Seat If necessary, pull up on the belt again
Belts to remove any slack, then check that
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, the belt rests across the center of
then tug on the belt to make sure the your chest and over your shoulder.

belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a This spreads the forces of a crash
twisted belt can cause serious over the strongest bones in your
injuries in a crash. upper body.
The second row center seat, and

both third row seats, have a
detachable shoulder belt that can be Improperly positioning the seat
unlatched and retracted, to allow the belts can cause serious injury
seats to be folded down. See page Position the lap part of the belt as or death in a crash.
146 for how to unlatch and relatch low as possible across your hips,
the seat belts. then pull up on the shoulder part of Make sure all seat belts are
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. properly positioned before
This lets your strong pelvic bones driving.
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
CONTINUED
15
2008 MDX


If the seat belt touches or crosses The front seats have adjustable seat Never place the shoulder portion of a
your neck, or if it crosses your arm belt anchors. To adjust the height of lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
instead of your shoulder, you need to an anchor, squeeze the release behind your back. This could cause
adjust the seat belt anchor height. button and slide the anchor up or very serious injuries in a crash.
down as needed (it has four
positions). If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
No one should sit in a seat with an

inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
RELEASE soon as possible.
BUTTON
See page 20 for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
16
2008 MDX


6.Maintain a Proper Sitting In addition, an occupant who is out of

Position position in the front seat can be
After all occupants have adjusted seriously or fatally injured in a crash Sitting improperly or out of
their seats and head restraints, and by striking interior parts of the position can result in serious

put on their seat belts, it is very vehicle or being struck by an injury or death in a crash.
important that they continue to sit inflating front airbag.
upright, well back in their seats, with Always sit upright, well back in
their feet on the floor, until the the seat, with your feet on the
vehicle is parked and the engine is floor.
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the

chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
17
2008 MDX


Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit This will reduce the risk of injuries
upright and adjust the seat as far to both you and your unborn child
back as possible while allowing full that can be caused by a crash or an
control of the vehicle. When riding inflating front airbag.
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible. Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if its okay for you to
drive.
If you are pregnant, the best way to

protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
18
2008 MDX


Additional Safety Precautions Two people should never use the Keep your hands and arms away
Never let passengers ride in the same seat belt. If they do, they from the airbag covers. If your
cargo area or on top of a folded- could be very seriously injured in a hands or arms are close to an
down back seat. If they do, they crash. airbag cover, they could be injured

could be very seriously injured in a if the airbag inflates.
crash. Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve Do not attach or place objects on
Passengers should not stand up or occupant comfort or reposition the the front airbag covers. Objects on
change seats while the vehicle is shoulder part of a seat belt can the covers marked SRS AIRBAG
moving. A passenger who is not reduce the protective capability of could interfere with the proper
wearing a seat belt during a crash the belt and increase the chance of operation of the airbags or be
or emergency stop can be thrown serious injury in a crash. propelled inside the vehicle and
against the inside of the vehicle, hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
against other occupants, or out of Do not place hard or sharp objects
the vehicle. between yourself and a front Do not attach hard objects on or
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp near a door. If a side airbag or a
objects on your lap, or driving with side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
a pipe or other sharp object in holder or other hard object
your mouth, can result in injuries attached on or near the door could
if your front airbag inflates. be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
19
2008 MDX


Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components The seat belt system If either the driver or a front
Your seat belt system includes lap/ includes an indicator on the passenger does not fasten their seat
shoulder belts in all seven seating instrument panel and a beeper to belt while driving, the beeper will
positions. The front seat belts are remind you and your passengers to sound and the indicator will flash
also equipped with automatic seat fasten your seat belts. again at regular intervals.
belt tensioners.
This system monitors the front seat You will also see a FASTEN SEAT
This system uses the same sensors belts. If you turn the ignition switch BELT or FASTEN PASSENGER
as the front airbags to monitor to the ON (II) position before your SEAT BELT message on the multi-
whether the front seat belts are seat belt is fastened, the beeper will information display (see page 81 ).
latched or unlatched, and how much sound and the indicator will flash. If
weight is on the front passengers your seat belt is not fastened before When no one is sitting in the front
seat (see pages 29 and 30 ). the beeper stops, the indicator will passengers seat, or a child or small
stop flashing but remain on. adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
If a front passenger does not fasten should not sound.
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
20
2008 MDX


If the indicator comes on or the Lap/Shoulder Belt All seat belts have an emergency
beeper sounds when the drivers seat The lap/shoulder belt goes over locking retractor. In normal driving,
belt is latched and there is no front your shoulder, across your chest, the retractor lets you move freely in
seat passenger and no items on the and across your hips. your seat while it keeps some

front seat, something may be tension on the belt. During a collision
interfering with the monitoring To fasten the belt, insert the latch or sudden stop, the retractor
system. Look for and remove: plate into the buckle, then tug on the automatically locks the belt to help
belt to make sure the buckle is restrain your body.
Any items under the front latched (see page 15 for how to
passengers seat. properly position the belt). The seat belts in all positions except
the drivers have a lockable retractor
Any object(s) hanging on the seat To unlock the belt, press the red that must be activated to secure a
or in the seat-back pocket. PRESS button on the buckle. Guide child seat (see page 50 ).
the belt across your body so that it
Any object(s) touching the rear of retracts completely. After exiting the If the shoulder part of the belt is
the seat-back. vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the pulled all the way out, the lockable
way and will not get closed in the retractor will activate. The belt will
If no obstructions are found, have door. retract, but it will not allow the
your vehicle checked by a dealer. passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,

unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
CONTINUED
21
2008 MDX


Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners are designed to

activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy, or if a sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over (see page
32 ).
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag

deploys during a side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle
will also deploy.
DETACHABLE ANCHOR
The tensioners can also be activated
The lap/shoulder belts in the center during a collision in which the front
seat of the second row and both of For added protection, the front seat airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
the third row seats are equipped with belts are equipped with automatic airbags would not be needed, but the
a detachable anchor that has two seat belt tensioners. When activated, additional restraint could be helpful.
parts: a small latch plate and a the tensioners immediately tighten
buckle. the belts to help hold the driver and When the tensioners are activated,
a front passenger in position. the seat belts will remain tight until
The detachable seat belt should they are unbuckled.
normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable seat belt, see page 144 .
22
2008 MDX


Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

For safety, you should check the it must be replaced by the dealer. A
condition of your seat belts regularly. belt that has been worn during a Not checking or maintaining
crash may not provide the same level seat belts can result in serious

Pull each belt out fully, and look for of protection in a subsequent crash. injury or death if the seat belts
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check do not work properly when
that the latches work smoothly and The dealer should also inspect the needed.
the belts retract easily. If a belt does anchors for damage and replace
not retract easily, cleaning the belt them if needed. If the automatic seat Check your seat belts regularly
may correct the problem (see page belt tensioners activate during a and have any problem
409 ). Any belt that is not in good crash, they must be replaced. corrected as soon as possible.
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Acura provides a limited warranty on

seat belts. See your Acura Warranty
Information booklet for details.
23
2008 MDX


Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(6) (1) (11) (8)
(5)
(2)
(4)
(3)
(1) Drivers Front Airbag

(2) Passengers Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit (5)
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Drivers Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passengers Weight Sensors
(8) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(9) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(10) Front Passengers Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit (9) (7)
(11) SRS Indicator (10) (4)
24
2008 MDX


Your Airbag System (SRS) includes:

(16) (13) Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint
(17)
System) front airbags. The drivers

(12) airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passengers airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG (see page 27 ).
Two side airbags, one for the

driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked SIDE
AIRBAG (see page 30 ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for

(14) each side of the vehicle. The
(15) airbags are stored in the roof
above the side windows. The front
(12) Front Impact Sensors
(13) Side Curtain Airbags and rear pillars are marked SIDE
(14) Side Impact Sensors (First) CURTAIN AIRBAG (see page
(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second) 32 ).
(16) Roll Rate Sensor
(17) Safing Sensor
CONTINUED
25
2008 MDX


Automatic front seat belt Weight sensors that monitor the An indicator on the instrument
tensioners (see page 22 ). weight on the front passengers panel that alerts you to a possible
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs problem with your airbags,
Sensors that can detect a (29 kg) or less (the weight of an sensors, or seat belt tensioners
moderate to severe front impact, infant or small child), the (see page 33 ).
side impact, or if your vehicle is passengers front airbag will be
about to rollover. turned off (see page 29 ). An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
Sensors that can detect whether a A rollover sensor that can detect if passengers side airbag has been
child is in the passengers side your vehicle is about to roll over turned off (see page 33 ).
airbag path and signal the control and signal the control unit to
unit to turn the airbag off (see deploy both side curtain airbags An indicator on the dashboard that
page 31 ). and front seat belt tensioners (see alerts you that the passengers
page 32 ). front airbag has been turned off
Sensors that can detect whether (see page 34 ).
the drivers seat belt and the front A sophisticated electronic system
passengers seat belt are latched that continually monitors and Emergency backup power in case
or unlatched (see page 20 ). records information about the your vehicles electrical system is
sensors, the control unit, the disconnected in a crash.
A drivers seat position sensor that airbag activators, the seat belt
monitors the distance of the seat tensioners, and driver and front
from the front airbag. If the seat is passenger seat belt use when the
too far forward, the airbag will ignition switch is in the ON (II)
inflate with less force (see page position.
29 ).
26
2008 MDX


How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a

collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide After inflating, the front airbags
severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the immediately deflate, so they wont
detect the vehicles rapid supplemental protection offered by interfere with the drivers visibility,
deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the drivers airbag can deploy if
enough, the control unit will instantly there is no passenger in the front
inflate the drivers and front seat, or if the advanced airbag
passengers airbags, at the time and system has turned the passengers
with the force needed. airbag off (see page 34 ).
CONTINUED
27
2008 MDX


The total time for inflation and Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual-
fast that most occupants are not airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this
aware that the airbags deployed until inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment
they see them lying in their laps. sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether
depending on crash severity. sensors detect the occupant is
After a crash, you may see what wearing a seat belt or not.
looks like smoke. This is actually In a more severe crash, both stages
powder from the airbags surface. will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupants belt is not latched,
Although the powder is not harmful, the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly
people with respiratory problems lower threshold, because the
may experience some temporary In a less severe crash, one stage will occupant would need extra
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of ignite first, then the second stage protection.
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do will ignite a split second later. This
so. provides longer airbag inflation time If the occupants belt is latched, the
with a little less force. airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
28
2008 MDX


Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-

caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work

properly:
DRIVERS PASSENGERS
SEAT SEAT
Occupants must sit upright and POSITION WEIGHT
wear their seat belts properly. SENSOR SENSOR
Do not spill any liquids on or The drivers advanced front airbag The passengers advanced front
under the seats, cover the sensors, system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
or put any objects or metal items sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. Although Acura does
under the front seats. too far forward, the airbag will not encourage carrying an infant or
inflate with less force, regardless of small child in front, if the sensors
Second-row passengers should not the severity of the impact. detect the weight of an infant or
put their feet under the front seats. small child (up to about 65 lbs or 29
If there is a problem with the sensor, kg), the system will automatically
Failure to follow these instructions the SRS indicator will come on, and turn the passengers front airbag off.
could damage the sensors or prevent the airbag will inflate in the normal
them from working properly. manner regardless of the drivers
seating position.
CONTINUED
29
2008 MDX


Be aware that objects placed on the Moving the front seat forcibly How Your Side Airbags Work
passengers seat can also cause the back against cargo on the seat or
airbag to be turned off. floor behind it.
When the airbag is turned off, a Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger airbag off indicator in passenger seat, or placing heavy
the center of the dashboard comes items in the seat-back pocket.
on (see page 34 ).
Moving the front passengers seat
If the weight sensors detect there is or seat-back forcibly back against
no passenger in the front seat, the the folded right-side second-row
airbag will be off. However, the seat.
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on. Also, make sure the floor mat behind
the front passengers seat is hooked If you ever have a moderate to
To ensure that the passengers to the floor mat anchor (see page severe side impact, sensors will
advanced front airbag system will 410 ). If it is not, the mat may detect rapid acceleration and signal
work properly, do not do anything interfere with the proper operation the control unit to instantly inflate
that would increase or decrease the of the sensors and operation of the either the drivers or the passengers
weight on the front passenger sseat. seat. side airbag and activate the seat belt
This includes: tensioner on the affected side.
A second-row passenger pushing

or pulling on the back of the front
passengers seat.
30
2008 MDX


Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System If the side airbag off indicator comes
side impact. If the impact is on the Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff on (see page 33 ), have the
passengers side, the passengers system designed primarily to protect passenger sit upright. Once the
side airbag will deploy even if there a child riding in the front passengers passenger is out of the airbags

is no passenger. seat. deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
To get the best protection from the Although Acura does not encourage indicator will go out.
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, if the
should wear their seat belts and sit position sensors detect a child has There will be some delay between
upright and well back in their seats. leaned into the side airbags the moment the passenger moves
deployment path, the airbag will shut into or out of the airbag deployment
off. path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a A front seat passenger should not
larger adult slouches and leans use a cushion or other object as a
sideways into the airbags backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
deployment path. system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front

passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
31
2008 MDX


How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passengers In a Rollover
Work side, the passengers side curtain If the rollover sensor detects your
airbag will inflate even if there are no vehicle is about to roll over, it signals
occupants on that side of the vehicle. the control unit, which immediately
deploys both side curtain airbags and
activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
The airbag on the passengers side

will deploy, and the seat belt
tensioner will activate, even if there
are no passengers on that side of the
vehicle.
To get the best protection from the

In a Side Impact side curtain airbags, occupants
In a moderate to severe side impact, should wear their seat belts and sit
sensors will detect rapid acceleration upright and well back in their seats.
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the drivers or the
passengers side of the vehicle.
32
2008 MDX


How the SRS Indicator Works You will also see a CHECK How the Side Airbag Off
The SRS indicator alerts AIRBAG SYSTEM message on the Indicator Works
you to a potential problem multi-information display (see page U.S. Canada
with your airbags or seat belt 81 ). This indicator

tensioners. alerts you that the
If you see any of these indications, passengers side airbag has been
When you turn the ignition switch to the airbags and seat belt tensioners automatically shut off. It does not
the ON (II) position, this indicator may not work properly when you mean there is a problem with your
comes on briefly then goes off. This need them. side airbags.
tells you the system is working
properly. When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
If the indicator comes on at any Ignoring the SRS indicator can should come on briefly and then go
other time, or does not come on at all, result in serious injury or death out (see page 66 ). If it does not
you should have the system checked if the airbag systems or come on, stays on, or comes on while
by your dealer. For example: tensioners do not work properly. driving without a passenger in the
front seat, you will also see a
If the SRS indicator does not come Have your vehicle checked by a PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF
on after you turn the ignition dealer as soon as possible if message on the multi-information
switch to the ON (II) position. the SRS indicator alerts you to display. Have the system checked
a possible problem. (see page 81 ).
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or

flashes on and off while you drive.
33
2008 MDX


How the Passenger Airbag Off Be aware that objects placed on the If the indicator comes on with no
Indicator Works front seat can cause the indicator to front seat passenger and no objects
come on. on the seat, or with an adult riding
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR there, something may be interfering
U.S. Canada If no weight is detected on the front with the weight sensors. Look for
seat, the airbag will be automatically and remove:
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on. Any items under the front
passengers seat.
The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if Any object(s) hanging on the seat
the total weight on the seat is near or in the seat-back pocket.
the airbag cutoff threshold.
Any object(s), such as a folded-
If an adult or teenage passenger is down back seat, that are touching
This indicator alerts you that the riding in front, move the seat as far the rear of the seat-back.
passengers front airbag has been to the rear as possible, and have the
shut off because weight sensors passenger sit upright and wear the If no obstructions are found, have
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less seat belt properly. your vehicle checked by a dealer as
(the weight of an infant or small soon as possible.
child) on the front passengers seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
34
2008 MDX


Airbag Service If your vehicle has a moderate to Additional Safety Precautions

Your airbag systems are virtually severe impact. Even if your Do not attempt to deactivate your
maintenance free, and there are no airbags do not inflate, your dealer airbags. Together, airbags and
parts you can safely service. should inspect the drivers seat seat belts provide the best

However, you must have your position sensor, the front protection.
vehicle serviced if: passengers weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all Do not tamper with airbag
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag seat belts worn during a crash to components or wiring for any
that has deployed must be make sure they are operating reason. Tampering could cause
replaced along with the control properly. the airbags to deploy, possibly
unit and other related parts. Any causing very serious injury.
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced. Do not expose the front passenger s
seat-back to liquid. If water or
Do not try to remove or replace another liquid soaks into a seat-
any airbag by yourself. This must back, it can prevent the side airbag
be done by an authorized dealer or cutoff system from working
a knowledgeable body shop. properly.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a

problem. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
CONTINUED
35
2008 MDX


Do not remove or modify a front Do not cover or replace front seat-

seat without consulting your back covers without consulting
dealer. This could make the your dealer. Improperly replacing
drivers seat position sensor or the or covering front seat-back covers
front passengers weight sensors can prevent your side airbags from
ineffective. If it is necessary to inflating during a side impact.
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Acura
Client Services at 800-382-2238.
36
2008 MDX


Protecting Children General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be

properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a
accidents are the number one cause crash.
of the death of children ages 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state and larger child should be properly
Canadian province requires that restrained with a seat belt and
infants and children be properly use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a
them. However, despite their best vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat a booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the them properly (see pages 54 57 ).
If you have children, or ever need to vehicle (see pages 42 53 ).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
37
2008 MDX


All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger s Front Airbag Small Children
Seat Can Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger s front airbag can
safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
back seat. the passengers front airbag is quite too far forward, or the childs head is
large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
The National Highway Traffic Safety force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the
Administration and Transport child with enough force to kill or
Canada recommend that all children Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
aged 12 and under be properly advanced front airbag system that
restrained in a back seat. Some automatically turns the passengers Larger Children
states have laws restricting where front airbag off (see page 34 ), Children who have outgrown child
children may ride. please follow these guidelines: seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger s
Children who ride in the back are Infants front airbag. Whenever possible,
less likely to be injured by striking Never put a rear-facing child seat in larger children should sit in the back
interior vehicle parts during a the front seat of a vehicle equipped seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
collision or hard braking. Also, with a passenger s front airbag. If be properly restrained with a seat
children cannot be injured by an the airbag inflates, it can hit the back belt. (See page 54 for important
inflating front airbag when they ride of the child seat with enough force information about protecting larger
in the back. to kill or very seriously injure an children.)
infant.
38
2008 MDX


To remind you of the passengers U.S. Models DASHBOARD

front airbag hazards, and that SUN VISORS
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has

warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS
39
2008 MDX


If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close If a child requires close physical
Children Attention attention or frequent visual contact,
Your vehicle has two rows of back Many parents say they prefer to put we strongly recommend that another
seats where children can be properly an infant or a small child in the front adult ride with the child in a back
restrained. If you ever have to carry passenger seat so they can watch the seat. The back seat is far safer for a
a group of children, and a child must child, or because the child requires child than the front.
ride in front: attention.
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 54 ). attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk.
rear as possible (see page 12 ).
Have the child sit upright and well

back in the seat (see page 17 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly

positioned and secured (see page
15 ).
40
2008 MDX


Additional Safety Precautions Make sure any unused seat belt For example, infants and small
Never hold an infant or child on that a child can reach is buckled, children left in a vehicle on a hot
your lap. If you are not wearing a the lockable retractor is activated, day can die from heatstroke. A
seat belt in a crash, you could be and the belt is fully retracted and child left alone with the key in the

thrown forward and crush the locked. If a child wraps a loose ignition switch can accidentally set
child against the dashboard or a seat belt around their neck, they the vehicle in motion, possibly
seat-back. If you are wearing a can be seriously or fatally injured. injuring themselves or others.
seat belt, the child can be torn (See pages 50 and 51 for how to
from your arms and be seriously activate and deactivate the Lock all doors and the tailgate
hurt or killed. lockable retractor.) when your vehicle is not in use.
Children who play in vehicles can
Never put a seat belt over yourself Never let two children use the accidentally get trapped inside.
and a child. During a crash, the same seat belt. If they do, they Teach your children not to play in
belt could press deep into the child could be very seriously injured in a or around vehicles.
and cause serious or fatal injuries. crash.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
Use the childproof door locks to Do not leave children alone in a transmitters out of the reach of
prevent children from opening the vehicle. Leaving children without children. Even very young
rear doors. This can prevent adult supervision is illegal in most children learn how to unlock
children from accidentally falling states and Canadian provinces, vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
out (see page 131 ). and can be very hazardous. switch, and open the tailgate,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
41
2008 MDX


Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed
or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in seat.
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be If the passengers front airbag
very seriously injured during a inflates, it can hit the back of the
frontal collision. child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed in the

second row, a rear-facing child seat
Child Seat Type may prevent the driver or a front
An infant must be properly passenger from moving their seat as
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining far back as recommended, or from
child seat until the child reaches the locking their seat-back in the desired
seat makers weight or height limit position.
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old. It can also interfere with proper
operation of the passengers
Only a rear-facing child seat provides advanced front airbag system.
proper support for a babys head,
neck, and back.
42
2008 MDX


In any of these situations, we Protecting Small Children We also recommend that a small
strongly recommend that you install child use the child seat until the child
the child seat directly behind the reaches the weight or height limit
front passengers seat, move the seat for the seat.

as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Placing a rear-facing child seat

in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Child Seat Type
Always place a rear-facing child A child who is at least one year old,
seat in the back seat, not the and who fits within the child seat
front. makers weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we

recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
CONTINUED
43
2008 MDX


Child Seat Placement Even with advanced front airbags

We strongly recommend placing a that automatically turn the
forward-facing child seat in a back passengers front airbag off (see Placing a forward-facing child
seat, not the front. page 34 ), a back seat is the safest seat in the front seat can result
place for a small child. in serious injury or death if the
Placing a forward-facing child seat in front airbag inflates.
the front seat of a vehicle equipped If it is necessary to put a forward-
with a passenger s airbag can be facing child seat in the front, move If you must place a forward-
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too the vehicle seat as far to the rear as facing child seat in front, move
far forward, or the childs head is possible, be sure the child seat is the vehicle seat as far back as
thrown forward during a collision, an firmly secured to the vehicle and the possible, and properly restrain
inflating airbag can strike the child child is properly strapped in the seat. the child.
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
44
2008 MDX


Selecting a Child Seat
When buying a child seat, you need In seating positions and vehicles not Whatever type of seat you choose, to
to choose either a conventional child equipped with LATCH, a LATCH- provide proper protection, a child
seat, or one designed for use with compatible child seat can be installed seat should meet three
the lower anchors and tethers for using a seat belt. requirements:

children (LATCH) system.
1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
Conventional child seats must be Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
whereas LATCH-compatible seats 213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the second-row 2. The child seat should be of the
seats. proper type and size to fit the child.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
Since LATCH-compatible child seats facing for small children.
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation, 3. The child seat should fit the
we recommend selecting this style. vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Before purchasing a conventional

child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
45
2008 MDX


Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat A child seat secured with a seat belt The following pages provide
and a good place to install the seat, should be installed as firmly as guidelines on how to properly install
there are three main steps in possible. However, it does not need a child seat. A forward-facing child
installing the seat: to be rock solid. Some side-to-side seat is used in all examples, but the
movement can be expected and instructions are the same for a rear-
1. Properly secure the child seat to should not reduce the child seats facing child seat.
the vehicle. All child seats must be effectiveness.
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with If the child seat is not secure, try
the LATCH (lower anchors and installing it in a different seating
tethers for children) system. A position, or use a different style of
child whose seat is not properly child seat that can be firmly secured.
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash. 3. Secure the child in the child seat.
Make sure the child is properly
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly strapped in the child seat
secured. After installing a child according to the child seat makers
seat, push and pull the seat instructions. A child who is not
forward and from side-to-side to properly secured in a child seat
verify that it is secure. can be seriously injured in a crash.
46
2008 MDX


Installing a Child Seat with MARKS Using the Outer LATCH

LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers

for children) at each of the second
row seats.
The lower anchors are located

between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH. LOWER ANCHORS
The location of each lower anchor is When you install a child seat in rear
indicated by a small button above the seating position, use the lower To install a LATCH-compatible child
anchor point. anchors as shown in the illustration. seat in either outer second row seat:
You can install up to three child
seats at a time with LATCH. 1. Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
Do not attach two child seat anchors.
connectors to a single lower anchor
at a time. 2. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors. CONTINUED
47
2008 MDX


RIGID TYPE FLEXIBLE TYPE TETHER STRAP
3. Place the child seat on the vehicle Other LATCH-compatible seats 5. Lift the head restraint (see page
seat, then attach the seat to the have a flexible-type connector as 141 ), then route the tether strap
lower anchors according to the shown above. through the legs of the head
child seat makers instructions. restraint and over the seat-back,
4. Whatever type you have, follow making sure the strap is not
Some LATCH-compatible seats the child seat makers instructions twisted.
have a rigid-type connector as for adjusting or tightening the fit.
shown above.
48
2008 MDX


Using the Center LATCH 2. Follow step 1 through 4 as

described previously to secure the
child seat.

3. Lower the head restraint first.
Route the tether strap over the
head restraint and seat-back, then
attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
4. Push and pull the child seat

forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
6. Attach the tether strap hook to the To install a LATCH-compatible child
tether anchor, then tighten the seat in the center seating position on
strap as instructed by the child the second row seat, use the center
seat maker. lower anchors as shown above.
7. Push and pull the child seat 1. Pull up the cover below the
forward and from side-to-side to armrest and find one of the
verify that it is secure. anchors. The other anchor is
located underneath the flap at the
bottom of the outer seats inner
bolster.
49
2008 MDX


Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in

all seating positions except the
drivers have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in 1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
the center seating position of second seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
row seat, make sure the detachable through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops,
seat belt is securely latched (see to the seat makers instructions, then let the belt feed back into the
page146 ). then insert the latch plate into the retractor.
buckle.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
50
2008 MDX


Installing a Child Seat with a

Tether
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in

the second or third row.
Since a tether can provide additional

security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to
the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to
up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving
lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or To deactivate the lockable retractor
push on the back of the seat while and remove a child seat, unlatch the
pulling up on the belt. buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract. CONTINUED
51
2008 MDX


Second Row Installation
TETHER STRAP
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT Outer Seating Position
Each second row seat has a tether 1. After properly securing the child For the center seat, lower the head
anchorage point behind the seat- seat (see page 50 ), lift the head restraint, then route the tether strap
back. restraint, then route the tether over the head restraint and seat-back.
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
52
2008 MDX


Third Row Installation

2. Attach the tether strap hook to the Each third row seat has a tether 3. Route the tether strap over the
anchor, making sure the tether anchorage point on the tailgate sill. head restraint, then attach the
strap is not twisted. tether strap hook to the anchor,
1. Select the anchor point you want making sure the strap is not
3. Tighten the strap according to the to use. Then open the anchor twisted.
seat makers instructions. cover with a small flat-tip
screwdriver. 4. Tighten the strap according to the
seat makers instructions.
2. Secure the child seat in the
desired position (see page 50 ).
53
2008 MDX


Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder or death if the passengers front
belt. airbag inflates.
The following pages give If a child must ride in front,

instructions on how to check proper move the vehicle seat as far
seat belt fit, what kind of booster back as possible, use a booster
seat to use if one is needed, and seat if needed, have the child
important precautions for a child sit up properly and wear the
who must sit in front. seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back

against the seat?
2. Do the childs knees bend

comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
54
2008 MDX


3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat Some states and Canadian provinces
between the childs neck and arm? also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be

possible, touching the childs sure to check current laws in the
thighs? states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip? Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
If you answer yes to all these make sure the booster seat meets
questions, the child is ready to wear federal safety standards (see page
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If 45 ) and that you follow the booster
you answer no to any question, the seat makers instructions.
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
CONTINUED
55
2008 MDX


If a child who uses a booster seat When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And
must ride in front, move the vehicle Front while age may be one indicator of
seat as far back as possible and be The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front,
sure the child is wearing the seat Administration and Transport there are other important factors you
belt properly. Canada recommend that all children should consider.
age 12 and under be properly
A child may continue using a booster restrained in a back seat. Physical Size
seat until the tops of their ears are Physically, a child must be large
even with the top of the vehicles or If the passengers front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
boosters seat-back. A child of this inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see pages 15 and 54 ). If
height should be tall enough to use frontal collision, the airbag can cause the seat belt does not fit properly,
the lap/shoulder belt without a serious injuries to a child who is with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat. unrestrained, improperly restrained, booster seat, the child should not sit
sitting too close to the airbag, or out in front.
of position.
Maturity
A side airbag also poses risks. If any To safely ride in front, a child must
part of a larger childs body is in the be able to follow the rules, including
path of a deploying side airbag, the sitting properly, and wearing the seat
child could receive possibly serious belt properly throughout a ride.
injuries.
56
2008 MDX


If you decide that a child can safely Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a
ride up front, be sure to: Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a childs comfort or
Carefully read the owners manual, in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a

and make sure you understand all crash. seat belt can make the belt less
seat belt instructions and all safety effective and increase the chance
information. Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash.
part of a seat belt behind the back
Move the vehicle seat to the rear- or under the arm. This could
most position. cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
Have the child sit up straight, back chance that the child will slide
against the seat, and feet on or under the belt in a crash and be
near the floor. injured.
Check that the childs seat belt is Two children should never use the
properly and securely positioned. same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
Supervise the child. Even mature crash.
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
57
2008 MDX


Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicles exhaust contains With the tailgate open, airflow can
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon pull exhaust gas into your vehicles
monoxide should not enter the Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
vehicle in normal driving if you Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
maintain your vehicle properly and unconsciousness and even kill tailgate open, open all the windows,
follow the information on this page. you. and set the climate control system as
shown below.
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to If you must sit in your parked vehicle
carbon monoxide. with the engine running, even in an
The vehicle is raised for an oil unconfined area, adjust the climate
change. control system as follows:
You notice a change in the sound High levels of carbon monoxide can
of the exhaust. collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 1. Select the fresh air mode.
The vehicle was in an accident such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode.
that may have damaged the engine with the garage door closed. 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
underside. Even with the door open, run the 4. Set the temperature control to a
engine only long enough to move the comfortable setting.
vehicle out of the garage.
58
2008 MDX


Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations DASHBOARD

shown. They warn you of potential U.S. models only
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels

carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard

to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
HOOD
RADIATOR CAP
BATTERY LABEL CONTINUED
59
2008 MDX


Safety Labels
SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

U.S. models
U.S. models Canadian models
Canadian models
U.S. models
60
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Control Locations ............................ 62 Seat Heaters ................................... 148
the controls and displays that Instrument Panel ............................. 63 Power Windows ............................. 149
contribute to the daily operation of Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 64 Moonroof ........................................ 152
your vehicle. All the essential Gauges .............................................. 72 Parking Brake ................................ 153
controls are within easy reach. Multi-Information Display .............. 73 Mirrors ............................................ 154
Controls Near the Steering Driving Position Memory

Wheel .......................................... 115 System......................................... 157
Windshield Wipers and Interior Lights ................................ 159
Washers .................................. 116 Interior Convenience Items .......... 162
Rear Window Wiper and Beverage Holders ...................... 163
Washer .................................... 117 Console Compartment .............. 164
Turn Signal and Headlights.......... 118 Storage Compartment ............... 164
Hazard Warning Button ................ 122 Glove Box ................................... 164
Rear Window Defogger ................ 122 Sunglasses Holder ..................... 165
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 123 Cargo Hooks .............................. 165
Steering Wheel Adjustments ....... 124 Sun Visor .................................... 166
Keys and Locks.............................. 126 Vanity Mirror ............................. 166
Immobilizer System....................... 128 Accessory Power Sockets......... 166
Ignition Switch ............................... 129 AC Power Outlet ........................ 167
Door Locks ..................................... 130
Childproof Door Locks ............. 131
Tailgate ........................................... 131
Power Tailgate ........................... 132
Remote Transmitter ...................... 135
Seats ................................................ 140
Detachable Anchor.................... 146
61
2008 MDX


Control Locations
DRIVING POSITION INSTRUMENT PANEL HomeLink BUTTONS MOONROOF SWITCH

MEMORY SYSTEM INDICATORS (P.63) (P.276) (P.152)
(P.157) GAUGES (P.72)
MIRROR CONTROL
POWER DOOR LOCK AUTO BUTTON
(P.130)
PARKING BRAKE CLIMATE CONTROL

RELEASE HANDLE SYSTEM (P.170)
(P.153)
AUDIO SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW (P.180)
SWITCHES
(P.149)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FUEL FILL DOOR (P.341)
RELEASE BUTTON
(P.323)
REAR CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
POWER TAILGATE (P.175)
BUTTON (P.132)
HOOD RELEASE PARKING BRAKE AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS HEADPHONE CONNECTORS

HANDLE (P.325) PEDAL (P.153) (P.267) (P.268)
: If equipped
62
2008 MDX


Instrument Panel
MESSAGE INDICATOR MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY (P.73)

(P.69) SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR (P.64)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
(P.70) (P.70)
ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.71) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.66)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P.66)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.66)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
(P.437) LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P.68)
SH-AWD INDICATOR
(P.69) LOW FUEL
INDICATOR (P.71)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.70) CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR (P.70)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.70)
(P.65)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.71)
A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
(P.68) PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.65)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.67)
(P.65)
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P.70) VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P.67)
: If equipped
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
63
2008 MDX


Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many Seat Belt Reminder If either of you do not fasten your
indicators to give you important Indicator seat belt while driving, the beeper
information about your vehicle. This indicator comes on when you will sound and the indicator will flash
turn the ignition switch to the ON again at regular intervals, and you
(II) position. It reminds you and your will also see a FASTEN SEAT
passengers to fasten your seat belts. BELT or FASTEN PASSENGER
A beeper also sounds if you have not SEAT BELT message on the multi-
fastened your seat belt. information display (see page 81 ).
If you turn the ignition switch to the For more information, see page 20 .
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belts, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belts before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If your front passenger does not

fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
64
2008 MDX


Low Oil Pressure U.S. CanadaParking Brake 2. If it stays on after you have fully
Indicator and Brake released the parking brake while
The engine can be severely System the engine is running, or if it
damaged if this indicator flashes Indicator comes on while driving, it can
or stays on when the engine is This indicator has two functions: indicate a problem in the brake
running, or if a CHECK ENGINE system. You will also see a LOW

OIL LEVEL message is on the 1. It comes on when you turn the BRAKE FLUID or CHECK
multi-information display. For ignition switch to the ON (II) BRAKE SYSTEM message on
more information, see page 436 . position. It is a reminder to check the multi-information display (see
the parking brake. Driving with pages 81 ). For more information,
Charging System the parking brake not fully see page 438 .
Indicator released can damage the rear
If this indicator comes on when brakes, axles, and tires.
the engine is running, the battery
is not being charged, and you will If you drive without releasing the
also see a CHECK CHARGING parking brake, a beeper will sound,
SYSTEM message on the multi- and you will also see a RELEASE
information display. For more PARKING BRAKE message on
information, see page 436 . the multi-information display (see
page 81 ).
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
You will also see a CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM message on
the multi-information display. For
more information, see page 437 .
65
2008 MDX


Supplemental Restraint U.S. Canada Anti-lock Brake System

System Indicator Side Airbag Off (ABS) Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when Indicator This indicator normally comes on
you turn the ignition switch to the This indicator comes on when you for a few seconds when you turn
ON (II) position. If it comes on at turn the ignition switch to the ON the ignition switch to the ON (II)
any other time, it indicates a (II) position. If it comes on at any position. If this indicator comes on
potential problem with your front other time, it indicates that the at any other time, there is a
airbags. This indicator will also alert passengers side airbag has problem in the ABS. If this
you to a potential problem with your automatically shut off. You will also happens, take the vehicle to your
side airbags, passengers side airbag see a PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG dealer to have it checked. With
automatic cutoff system, side curtain OFF message on the multi- this indicator on, your vehicle still
airbags, or automatic seat belt information display (see page 81 ). has normal braking ability but no
tensioners. You will also see a For more information, see page 33 . anti-lock function. You will also
CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM see a CHECK ABS SYSTEM
message on the multi-information message on the multi-information
display (see page 81 ). For more display (see page 81 ). For more
information, see page 33 . information, see page 357 .
66
2008 MDX


Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Activation Indicator information display (see page 81 ).
(VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on for Turn Signal and
a few seconds when you turn the a few seconds when you turn the Hazard Warning
ignition switch to the ON (II) ignition switch to the ON (II) Indicators
position. position. For more information, see The left or right turn signal indicator

page 359 . blinks when you signal a lane change
If it comes on and stays on at any This indicator has four functions. or turn. If an indicator does not blink
other time, or it does not come on or blinks rapidly, it usually means
when you turn the ignition switch to 1. It comes on as a reminder that you one of the turn signal bulbs is
the ON (II) position, there is a have turned off the vehicle burned out (see page 404 ). Replace
problem with the VSA system. You stability assist (VSA) system. the bulb as soon as possible, since
will also see a CHECK VSA other drivers cannot see that you are
SYSTEM message on the multi- 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see signaling.
information display (see page 81 ). page 359 ).
Take your vehicle to a dealer to have When you press the hazard warning
it checked. Without VSA, your 3. It flashes when trailer stability button, both turn signal indicators
vehicle still has normal driving ability, assist is activating (see page 375 ). and all turn signals on the outside of
but will not have VSA traction and the vehicle flash.
stability enhancement. For more 4. It comes on along with the VSA
information, see page 359 . system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
This indicator may also come on if You will also see a CHECK VSA
there is a problem with the trailer SYSTEM message and a
stability assist function (see page CHECK TRAILER STABILITY
375 ). ASSIST message on the multi-
67
2008 MDX


Low Tire Pressure/ If this happens, pull to the side of A/T Temperature
TPMS Indicator the road when it is safe, check Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for which tire has lost pressure on the This indicator monitors the
a few seconds when you turn the multi-information display, and temperature of the automatic
ignition switch to the ON (II) determine the cause. If it is transmission fluid. It should come on
position. because of a flat tire, have the flat for a few seconds when you turn the
This indicator has two functions: tire repaired as soon as possible. If ignition switch to the ON (II)
two or more tires are position. If it comes on while driving,
1. If it comes on while driving, it underinflated, call a professional it means the transmission fluid
indicates that one or more of your towing service. For more temperature is too high. Pull to the
vehicles tires are significantly low information, see page 446 . side of the road when it is safe, shift
on pressure. to Park, and let the engine idle until
2. If this indicator begins to flash, the indicator goes out.
You will also see a CHECK TIRE there is a problem with the tire
PRESSURE message on the multi- pressure monitoring system You will also see an A/T TEMP
information display (see page 82 ). (TPMS). You will also see a HIGH message on the multi-
CHECK TPMS SYSTEM information display (see page 82 ).
Check the tire pressure monitor on message on the multi-information
the multi-information display and display. The indicator continues to
determine the cause (see page 352 ). flash for a while (approximately 1
minute), then stays on. If this Continuing to drive with the A/T
happens, have your dealer check temperature indicator on may cause
the system as soon as possible. serious damage to the transmission.
For more information, see page
354 .
68
2008 MDX


Message Indicator Super Handling-All If the indicator blinks while driving,

Wheel Drive (SH-AWD ) it indicates the differential
This indicator comes on when there Indicator temperature is too high.
is a system message on the multi- This indicator normally comes on for You will also see a SH-AWD DIFF
information display. Press the INFO a few seconds when you turn the TEMP. HIGH message on the
button on the steering wheel (see ignition switch to the ON (II) multi-information display (see page

page 73 ) to see the message (see position. If this indicator comes on at 82 ).
page 81 ). any other time, there is a problem in
the SH-AWD system. You will also Pull to the side of the road when it is
Most of the time, this indicator see a CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM safe, shift to Park, and let the engine
comes on along with other indicators message on the multi-information idle until the indicator goes out.
in the instrument panel such as the display (see page 82 ). Take your
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc. For more information, see page 348 .
Continuing to drive with the SH-AWD
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.
69
2008 MDX


Immobilizer System Lights On Indicator High Beam Indicator

Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when This indicator reminds you that the This indicator comes on with the
you turn the ignition switch to the exterior lights are on. It comes on high beam headlights. For more
ON (II) position. It will then go off if when the light switch is in either the information, see page 118 .
you have inserted a properly-coded or position. This indicator
ignition key. If it is not a properly- will also come on when the light Cruise Main Indicator
coded key, the indicator will blink, switch is in AUTO and the lights
and the engines fuel system will be turn on automatically. If you turn the This indicator comes on when you
disabled (see page128). ignition switch to the ACCESSORY turn on the cruise control system by
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without pressing the CRUISE button (see
turning off the light switch, this page 270 ).
indicator will remain on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open Cruise Control Indicator
the drivers door.
This indicator comes on when you
Fog Light Indicator set the cruise control. See page
270 for information on operating the
This indicator comes on when you cruise control.
turn on the fog lights. For more
information, see page 120 .
70
2008 MDX


Active Damper System Low Fuel Indicator Security System Indicator

Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If this indicator comes on at

any other time, there is a problem in
the system. While this indicator is on,
the comfort button will not work, and
the system will remain in the sport
mode. You will also see a CHECK
ADS SYSTEM message on the
multi-information display. Have the LOW FUEL INDICATOR SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
vehicle checked by your dealer as
soon as possible. For more This indicator comes on as a This indicator comes on when the
information, see page 361 . reminder that you must refuel soon. security system is set. See page
269 for more information on the
When the indicator comes on, there security system.
is about 1.8 US gal (7.0 ) of fuel
remaining in the tank before the
needle reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the needle reaches E. You will
also see a LOW FUEL message on
the multi-information display (see
page 82 ).
71
2008 MDX


Gauges
Fuel Gauge
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER This shows how much fuel you
FUEL GAUGE have. It may show slightly more
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
or less than the actual amount.
Avoid driving with an extremely low

f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
U.S. model is shown.
Temperature Gauge instructions and precautions on

This shows the temperature of the checking the engines cooling
engines coolant. During normal system, see page 434 .
operation, the pointer should rise to
about the middle of the gauge. In
severe driving conditions, the pointer
may rise to the upper zone. If it
reaches the red (hot) mark, pull
safely to the side of the road. For
72
2008 MDX


Multi-Information Display
The multi-information display in the INFO (/) With the ignition switch in the ON
instrument panel displays various BUTTON (II) position, the multi-information
information and messages when the display changes as shown in the next
ignition switch is in the ON (II) page each time you press the INFO
position. Some of the messages help (/) button or SEL/RESET
you operate your vehicle more button.

comfortably.
Others help to keep you aware of the When you turn the ignition switch to
periodic maintenance your vehicle the ON (II) position, what you last
needs for continued trouble-free SEL/
selected is displayed.
driving. RESET
BUTTON In the multi-information display, the
When you open the drivers door, a system message is also displayed
Welcome message is shown on the To change the display, press the (see page 80 ) and you can
multi-information display. When you INFO (/) button on the steering customize your vehicle control
turn the ignition switch from the ON wheel repeatedly until the main settings (see page 83 ).
(II) position to the ACCESSORY (I) menu appears (see page 74 ).
position, a Goodbye message is
shown on the display.
CONTINUED
73
2008 MDX


Main Menu
INFO button
Go to Customize Menu (See page 83)
SEL/RESET button
Go to HandsFreeLink Menu (See page 280)
(See page 75)
Trip Computer (See page 78)
(See page 75)
(See page 75)
Tire Pressure for each tire (See page 77)
74
2008 MDX


Odometer Trip Meter
TRIP METER

ODOMETER
When the main menu is blank,
SH-AWD or TIRE PRESSURE, The odometer shows the total This meter shows the number of
pressing the SEL/RESET button distance your vehicle has been miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
changes the display to trip meter/ driven. It measures miles in U.S. driven since you last reset it. There
odometer outside temperature/ models and kilometers in Canadian are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
odometer and engine oil life/ models. It is illegal under U.S. B. Each trip meter works
odometer. federal law and Canadian provincial independently, so you can keep track
regulations to disconnect, reset, or of two different distances.
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or To reset a trip meter, display it, and
kilometers indicated. then press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
0.0. CONTINUED
75
2008 MDX


When you reset Trip A, average fuel Outside Temperature The temperature sensor is in the
economy A is reset at the same time. front bumper. The temperature
When you reset Trip B, average fuel OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE reading can be affected by heat
economy B is reset. U.S. reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
In the customizing mode, you can set surrounding traffic. This can cause
Trip A and average fuel economy A an incorrect temperature reading
to reset at the same time when you when your vehicle speed is under
refuel your vehicle (see page 92 ). 19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
CANADA
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
This shows the outside Fahrenheit In certain weather conditions,

temperature in U.S. models, and temperature readings near freezing
Centigrade temperature in Canadian (32F, 0C) could mean that ice is
models. forming on the road surface.
You can adjust the outside
temperature display (see page 91 ).
76
2008 MDX


Engine Oil Life SH-AWD Torque Distribution Tire Pressure Monitor

Monitor
ENGINE OIL LIFE

U.S.
Canada
This shows the remaining life of the When the tire pressure monitor is
engine oil. It shows 100% after the This monitor shows how much shown on the multi-information
engine oil is replaced and the display torque is being delivered to each display, press the SEL/RESET
is reset. The engine oil life is wheel. For more information, see button. The display changes as
calculated based on engine operating page 348 . shown.
conditions and accumulated engine You can see the pressure of each tire
revolutions. For more information, in this monitor. If one or more tires
see page 383 . are low, inflate them to the correct
pressure. For more information, see
page 351 .
77
2008 MDX


HandsFreeLinkTM To use the system, your cell phone Trip Computer

and the HFL system must be linked.
Not all cell phones are compatible
with this system. Refer to page
280 for instructions on how to link
your cell phone to the HFL and how
to receive or make phone calls, or
visit the handsfreelink.com website.
You can receive or make phone calls When the main menu displays TRIP
from your cell phone through your COMPUTER, pressing the SEL/
vehicles Bluetooth RESET button changes the display
HandsFreeLink (HFL) system to AVERAGE FUEL A/RANGE to
without touching your cell phone. AVERAGE FUEL B/RANGE and
to AVERAGE SPEED/ELAPSED
TIME.
78
2008 MDX


AVERAGE FUEL A/B RANGE ELAPSED TIME

This shows your vehicles average This shows the estimated distance This shows the time passed traveled
fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models) you can travel on the fuel remaining since you last reset it. When you turn
or liter/100 km (Canadian models) in the fuel tank. This distance is the ignition switch to the ON (II)
since you last reset the Trip A or estimated from the fuel economy position, ELAPSED TIME is reset.
Trip B. you received over the last several

miles(U.S.) or kilometers (Canada), If you want to reset the ELAPSED
You can customize the Trip A and so it will vary with changes in speed, TIME manually, go to the trip
AVERAGE FUEL A reset condition traffic, etc. computers ELAPSED TIME display,
in the multi-information display (see and press and hold the SEL/RESET
page 92 ). AVERAGE SPEED button until the number resets.
This shows the average speed you
are traveling in miles per hour (mph) You can customize the ELAPSED
for U.S. models or kilometers per TIME reset condition on the multi-
hour (km/h) for Canadian models. information display (see page 94 ).
To reset the AVERAGE SPEED you

have traveled, press and hold the
SEL/RESET button until the
number resets.
79
2008 MDX


System Messages The system message(s) triggers the To cancel the message(s) before 5
appropriate indicator(s) on the seconds elapsed, press the INFO
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR instrument panel, including the (/) button on the steering wheel.
system message indicator, to come
on. The system message indicator Even if you press the INFO (/)
does not go off until the problem(s) button, some messages stay on or
is corrected. come on again at regular intervals
until the problem is corrected.
You will also hear a beep when the
system message comes on for the You can see the message(s) again by
first time. pressing the INFO (/) button
repeatedly if the system message
Most of the messages are displayed indicator remains lit on the
for about 5 seconds, and then the instrument panel.
If there is a problem with your normal display returns. If there are
vehicle, for example, the engine oil several system messages to be Here is a list of all messages:
level is low or a door is not fully shown, the display switches these
closed, the multi-information display messages every 5 seconds.
will show you the problem. It does
this by interrupting the current
display with one or more messages.
80
2008 MDX


U.S.
See page See page
11 436
See page
Canada 153
See page See page

20 437
U.S.
See page See page
20 436
See page
Canada 438
See page See page
33 358
U.S. U.S.
See page
359
See page See page
Canada 33 Canada 438
See page
376
CONTINUED
81
2008 MDX


See page See page See page

353 349 340
See page See page

354 349
See page
121
See page See page
354 341
See page See page See page

68 362 384
U.S.
See page See page
398 324
See page
Canada 134
See page
71
82
2008 MDX


Customize Settings If you turn the ignition switch to the

ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position, or move the shift lever out
of Park, the display will change to
the normal screen.

You can customize some vehicle
control settings for DRIVER 1 and
DRIVER 2 separately. If DRIVER
1 or DRIVER 2 is not displayed,
customizing is not possible.
To have the drivers ID detected,

make sure your remote transmitter
When the main menu displays is linked to the system (see Keyless If you want the settings as they were
Keyless Memory SettingsTM, you Memory SettingsTM on page 139). when the vehicle left the factory,
can customize some vehicle control select DEFAULT ALL, as described
settings. on page 86 .
To enter the customizing mode, If you want to change any vehicle
press the SEL/RESET button. control settings, select CHG
To change the settings, the ignition SETTING, then press the SEL/
switch must be in the ON (II) RESET button.
position, and the vehicle must be
stopped with the transmission in Refer to the table on the following
Park. pages about the settings you want to
customize. CONTINUED
83
2008 MDX


Group Setup Menu Item Description Setting Option Page

METER SETUP LANGUAGE SELECTION Changes the language used in the display. ENGLISH
(P.89) FRENCH 90
SPANISH
ADJUST OUTSIDE Changes the outside temperature reading above or 5F 0F 5F
TEMP. DISPLAY below its current reading. (U.S.) 91
3C 0C 3C
(Canada)
TRIP A & AVG. FUEL Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy ON 92
RESET with REFUEL to reset when you refuel. OFF
ADJUST Changes the indicator alarm volumes into three HIGH
ALARM VOLUME levels. MID 93
LOW
ELAPSED TIME RESET Resets the elapsed time of your current trip. MANUAL ONLY
IGN OFF TRIP B 94
TRIP A
AUTO INTERIOR Changes the interior light sensitivity to your liking. MAX LOW
ILLUMINATION HIGH MIN 95
MID OFF
POSITION SETUP MEMORY POSITION LINK Changes the drivers seat, the steering wheel, and ON 98
(P.97) the outside mirror positions to a stored setting. OFF
AUTO TILT & TELESCOPE Moves the steering wheel fully in and up when the ON 99
STEERING WHEEL key is removed. OFF
: Default setting
84
2008 MDX


Group Setup Menu Item Description Setting Option Page

LIGHTING SETUP INTERIOR LIGHT Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights 60 sec 15 sec 101
(P.100) DIMMING TIME stay on after you close the doors and the tailgate. 30 sec
HEADLIGHT Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lights 60 sec
AUTO OFF TIMER stay on after you close the drivers door. 30 sec 0 sec 102
15 sec

AUTO LIGHT Changes the timing of when the headlights come MAX LOW
SENSITIVITY on. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTO HIGH MIN 103
position. MID
DOOR/WINDOW AUTO DOOR LOCK Changes the setting of when to automatically lock SHIFT FROM P
SETUP the doors. WITH VEH SPD 106
(P.105) OFF
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK Changes the setting of when to automatically SHIFT TO P DRIVER DOOR/
unlock the drivers/all the doors. IGN OFF ALL DOORS 107
OFF
KEY AND REMOTE Changes which doors unlock with the remote DRIVER DOOR 109
UNLOCK MODE transmitter in a first push. ALL DOORS
KEYLESS LOCK The exterior lights flash each time you press the ON
ACKNOWLEDGMENT LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also OFF 110
sound when you press the LOCK button twice.
SECURITY RELOCK Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the 90 sec
TIMER doors to relock and the security system to set after 60 sec 111
you unlock but do not open the door. 30 sec
WIPER SETUP WIPER ACTION Changes the wiper operation between two settings INTERMITTENT 113
(P.113) when the wiper switch is in the INT position. WITH VEH SPD
DEFAULT ALL Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default. SET 86
(P.86) CANCEL
: Default setting
85
2008 MDX


DEFAULT ALL
If you want to set the default settings, To set the default settings, press the When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will
press the INFO (/) button to INFO (/) button to select SET see the above display for several
select DEFAULT ALL, then press then press the SEL/RESET button. seconds, then the screen returns to
the SEL/RESET button. CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.
If you want to cancel DEFAULT
ALL, select CANCEL, then press the If the setting is not successfully
SEL/RESET button. The screen completed, FAILED is shown for
goes back to the previous display. several seconds, and then the screen
goes back to the normal message
mode. Repeat the same procedure to
select DEFAULT ALL.
86
2008 MDX


Customize Settings Each time you press the INFO (/

You can customize some of the ) button, the screen changes as
vehicle control settings to your shown on the next page. Press the
preference. Here are the settings INFO (/) button, until you see
you can customize: the setup you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button

METER SETUP to enter your selection.
POSITION SETUP
LIGHTING SETUP
DOOR/WINDOW SETUP
WIPER SETUP
When you want to change the

vehicle control settings, press the
INFO (/) button to select CHG
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
CONTINUED
87
2008 MDX


METER SETUP
see page 89
POSITION SETUP
see page 97
Select EXIT
LIGHTING SETUP
see page 100
Select
Select CANCEL DEFAULT ALL DOOR/WINDOW SETUP
see page 105
WIPER SETUP
see page 113
SEL/RESET BUTTON
INFO (/) BUTTON
88
2008 MDX


Meter Setup
Here are the six custom settings for
the meter setup:
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.

DISPLAY
TRIP A & AVG. FUEL RESET
with REFUEL
ADJUST ALARM VOLUME
ELAPSED TIME RESET
AUTO INTERIOR
ILLUMINATION
While METER SETUP is shown,

press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (/

) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the SEL/RESET
INFO (/) button until you see BUTTON
INFO (/)
the setting you want to customize, BUTTON
to enter your selection.
CONTINUED
89
2008 MDX


Language Selection
There are three language selections Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
you can make: English, French, and the selections. completed, the display changes as
Spanish. To choose the language you shown above, and then goes back to
want, follow these instructions: Select the desired language by the customize item screen.
pressing the INFO (/) button,
You can choose this customize item then enter your selection by pressing If the SETTING INCOMPLETE
from METER SETUP by pressing the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to
the INFO (/) button repeatedly. LANGUAGE SELECTION and
repeat the procedure again.
90
2008 MDX


Adjust Outside Temp. Display

U.S. models U.S. models

Canadian models Canadian models
If you sometimes find that the Adjust the outside temperature value When your selection is successfully
temperature reading is a few by pressing the INFO (/) button completed, the display changes as
degrees above or below the actual repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET shown above, and then goes back to
temperature, you can adjust it by button to set the desired value. the customize item screen.
following these instructions:
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE
You can choose this customize item message appears, go back to
from METER SETUP by pressing ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
the INFO (/) button repeatedly. DISPLAY and repeat the procedure
again.
CONTINUED
91
2008 MDX


Trip A & Avg. Fuel Reset With Refuel
To cause Trip A and AVG. FUEL to Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
reset every time you refuel your the selections. completed, the display changes as
vehicle, follow these instructions: shown above, and then goes back to
Select ON or OFF by pressing the the customize item screen.
You can choose this customize item INFO (/) button, then enter
from METER SETUP by pressing your selection by pressing the SEL/ If the SETTING INCOMPLETE
the INFO (/) button repeatedly. RESET button. message appears, go back to TRIP
A & AVG. FUEL RESET with
REFUEL and repeat the procedure
again.
92
2008 MDX


Adjust Alarm Volume

Select the warning alarm volume Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
from three levels. the selections. completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
You can choose this customize item Select the desired level by pressing the customize item screen.
from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO (/) button, then enter
the INFO (/) button repeatedly. your selection by pressing the SEL/ If the SETTING INCOMPLETE
RESET button. message appears, go back to
ADJUST ALARM VOLUME and
CONTINUED
93
2008 MDX


Elapsed Time Reset

There are four elapsed time reset
choices you can make:
MANUAL ONLY You can reset

the elapsed time, when Trip
Computers Elapsed Time is
displayed (see page 79 ).
IGN OFF The elapsed time is

reset when you turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position.
TRIP A The elapsed time is reset You can choose this customize item Press the SEL/RESET button to see
when the Trip A is reset. from METER SETUP by pressing the selections.
the INFO (/) button repeatedly.
TRIP B The elapsed time is reset Select the desired setting by
when the Trip B is reset. pressing the INFO (/) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
94
2008 MDX


Auto Interior Illumination

While the headlight switch is turned
on, the interior lights gradually dim,
as the outside light level gets low.
You can customize at which outside
light level the lights start to dim.

There are MAX, HIGH, MID, LOW
and MIN levels and OFF for the auto
interior illumination settings.
If you want the illuminations to start

dimming as early as possible, select
When your selection is successfully MAX. For illuminations to start You can choose this customize item
completed, the display changes as dimming as late as possible, select from METER SETUP by pressing
shown above, and then goes back to MIN. Choose HIGH, MID, or LOW the INFO (/) button repeatedly.
the customize item screen. for levels in between.
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE To disable the auto interior

message appears, go back to illumination function, select OFF.
ELAPSED TIME RESET and
CONTINUED
95
2008 MDX


Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully

the selections. completed, the display changes as
Select the desired setting by the customize item screen.
then enter your selection by pressing If the SETTING INCOMPLETE
the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to AUTO
INTERIOR ILLUMINATION and
96
2008 MDX


Position Setup
Here are the two custom settings for
the position setup:
MEMORY POSITION LINK

AUTO TILT & TELESCOPE

STEERING WHEEL
While POSITION SETUP is shown,

press the SEL/RESET button to

shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (/) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
to enter your selection.
SEL/RESET
BUTTON
INFO ( or )
BUTTON
CONTINUED
97
2008 MDX


Memory Position Link
If MEMORY POSITION LINK is Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
set to ON, the drivers seat, the the selections. completed, the display changes as
steering wheel, and outside mirror shown above, and then goes back to
positions move to the position stored Select ON or OFF by pressing the the customize item screen.
in the memory when you open the INFO (/) button, then enter
drivers door, using the remote your selection by pressing the SEL/ If the SETTING INCOMPLETE
transmitter. RESET button. message appears, go back to
MEMORY POSITION LINK and
You can choose this customize item repeat the procedure again.
from POSITION SETUP by
pressing the INFO (/) button
repeatedly.
98
2008 MDX


Auto Tilt & Telescope Steering Wheel

When AUTO TILT & TELESCOPE Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
STEERING WHEEL is set to ON, the selections. completed, the display changes as
the steering wheel automatically shown above, and then goes back to
moves fully in and up when you turn Select ON or OFF by pressing the the customize item screen.
the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) INFO (/) button, then enter
position and remove the key. your selection by pressing the SEL/ If the SETTING INCOMPLETE
RESET button. message appears, go back to AUTO
You can choose this customize item TILT & TELESCOPE STEERING
from POSITION SETUP by WHEEL and repeat the procedure
pressing the INFO (/) button again.
repeatedly.
CONTINUED
99
2008 MDX


Lighting Setup
Here are the three custom settings
for the lighting setup:
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
While LIGHTING SETUP is

shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.

to enter your selection. SEL/RESET
BUTTON
INFO ( or )
BUTTON
100
2008 MDX


Interior Light Dimming Time

The interior lights fade out when you Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
close all doors and tailgate. To the selections. completed, the display changes as
change how long the lights stay on shown above, and then goes back to
before they fade out, follow these Select the desired setting by the customize item screen.
instructions: pressing the INFO (/) button,
You can choose this customize item the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to
from LIGHTING SETUP by INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
pressing the INFO (/) button TIME and repeat the procedure
repeatedly. again.
CONTINUED
101
2008 MDX


Headlight Auto Off Timer

The headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights, and license
plate lights go off after the selected
time when you remove the key from
the ignition switch and close the
drivers door. To change how long
the lights stay on before they go off,
follow these instructions:
You can choose this customize item Press the SEL/RESET button to see
from LIGHTING SETUP by the selections.
repeatedly. Select the desired setting by
102
2008 MDX


Auto Light Sensitivity

The headlights automatically come
on when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position and the ambient
light reaches a changeable level. You
can select the auto light sensitivity

from the following five levels:
MAX
The headlights come on when it is
bright.
HIGH
When your selection is successfully somewhat bright. You can choose this customize item
completed, the display changes as from LIGHTING SETUP by
shown above, and then goes back to MID pressing the INFO (/) button
the customize item screen. The headlights come on when it is as repeatedly.
bright as sunset or sunrise.
message appears, go back to LOW
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER The headlights come on when it is
and repeat the procedure again. somewhat dark.
MIN
dark. CONTINUED
103
2008 MDX



the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to AUTO
LIGHT SENSITIVITY and repeat
the procedure again.
104
2008 MDX


Door/Window Setup
Here are the five custom settings for
the door/window setup:
AUTO DOOR LOCK

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK
MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
While DOOR/WINDOW SETUP

is shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.

the setting you want to customize, SEL/RESET
BUTTON
INFO ( or )
to enter your selection. BUTTON
CONTINUED
105
2008 MDX


Auto Door Lock

There are three settings you can
choose from:
SHIFT FROM P
The doors lock whenever you move
the shift lever out of Park.
WITH VEH SPD

The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches about 10 mph (about
15 km/h).
OFF You can choose this customize item Press the SEL/RESET button to see
The auto door lock is deactivated all from DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by the selections.
the time. pressing the INFO (/) button
repeatedly. Select the desired setting by
106
2008 MDX


Auto Door Unlock

There are three settings you can
choose from:
SHIFT TO P The drivers door or

all the doors, depending on the door

lock mode setting ( see page 106 ),
unlock when you move the shift
lever to Park.
IGN OFF The drivers door or all

the doors, depending on the door
lock mode setting ( see page 106 ),
When your selection is successfully unlock when you turn the ignition You can choose this customize item
completed, the display changes as switch to the LOCK (0) position. from DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by
shown above, and then goes back to pressing the INFO (/) button
the customize item screen. OFF The auto door unlock is repeatedly.
deactivated all the time. This is the
If the SETTING INCOMPLETE factory default setting.
message appears, go back to AUTO
DOOR LOCK and repeat the
procedure again.
CONTINUED
107
2008 MDX


Press the SEL/RESET button to see If you choose SHIFT TO P or IGN When your selection is successfully
the selections. OFF, you will see the above display. completed, the display changes as
Select the desired setting by Press the INFO (/) button to the customize item screen.
pressing the INFO (/) button, switch the door lock mode setting
then enter your selection by pressing between the drivers door and all If the SETTING INCOMPLETE
the SEL/RESET button. doors. Then, press the SEL/RESET message appears, go back to AUTO
button to enter your selection. DOOR UNLOCK and repeat the
procedure again.
108
2008 MDX


Key and Remote Unlock Mode

To select whether the drivers door Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
unlocks or all the doors unlock when the selections. completed, the display changes as
you unlock the doors with the shown above, and then goes back to
remote transmitter, follow these Select the desired setting by the customize item screen.
instructions. pressing the INFO (/) button,
You can choose this customize item the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to KEY
from DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE
pressing the INFO (/) button and repeat the procedure again.
repeatedly.
CONTINUED
109
2008 MDX


Keyless Lock Acknowledgment

When you push the LOCK button on
the remote transmitter, some
exterior lights flash, and a beeper
sounds when you push the LOCK
button again within 5 seconds to
verify that the doors and the tailgate
are locked and the security system
has set (see page 269 ). You can
customize the exterior lights not to
flash and the beeper not to sound.
You can choose this customize item Press the SEL/RESET button to see
from DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by the selections.
repeatedly. Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (/) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
110
2008 MDX


Security Relock Timer

If you unlock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter,
but do not open any of the doors or
the tailgate within 30 seconds, the
doors and the tailgate automatically

relock and the security system sets.
You can change this relock time

from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.
When your selection is successfully You can choose this customize item
completed, the display changes as from DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by
shown above, and then goes back to pressing the INFO (/) button
the customize item screen. repeatedly.

message appears, go back to
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT and repeat
the procedure again.
CONTINUED
111
2008 MDX



the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER and
112
2008 MDX


Wiper Setup Wiper Action

You can select from these two
settings when the wiper switch is in
the INT (intermittent) position:
INTERMITTENT The

intermittent operation varies
according to the selection you make
on the wiper levers intermittent
control ring.
SEL/RESET
BUTTON
INFO (/) WITH VEH SPD The intermittent
BUTTON operation varies according to vehicle
speed.
Here is one custom setting for the Each time you press the INFO (/
wiper setup: ) button, the screen changes as
WIPER ACTION INFO (/) button until you see
While WIPER SETUP is shown, then press the SEL/RESET button
press the SEL/RESET button to to enter your selection.
CONTINUED
113
2008 MDX


You can choose this customize item Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
from WIPER SETUP by pressing the selections. completed, the display changes as
the INFO (/) button repeatedly. shown above, and then goes back to
the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to
WIPER ACTION and repeat the
procedure again.
114
2008 MDX


Controls Near the Steering Wheel
HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/ STEERING WHEEL WINDSHIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL

HEADLIGHT WASHER FRONT FOG LIGHTS AUDIO CONTROLS WIPERS/WASHERS BRIGHTNESS
SWITCH1 (P.118) (P.233) (P.116) (P.123)
(P.117)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
VEHICLE STABILITY OFF INDICATOR

ASSIST SYSTEM (P.34)
OFF SWITCH
(P.360) HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
MIRROR CONTROLS (P.122)
(P.155)
REAR WINDOW
DRIVING POSITION DEFOGGER
MEMORY SYSTEM (P.122)
(P.157)
ACCESSORY POWER
POWER DOOR LOCK SOCKETS
(P.130)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.149) SEAT HEATER
HORN2 SWITCHES
FUEL FILL DOOR (P.148)
RELEASE BUTTON
(P.323) ACTIVE DAMPER
SYSTEM SWITCH1
POWER TAILGATE HOOD RELEASE STEERING WHEEL CRUISE CONTROL (P.361)
BUTTON1 (P.132) HANDLE (P.325) ADJUSTMENTS (P.124) BUTTONS (P.270)
1: If equipped
2: To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
115
2008 MDX


Windshield Wipers and Washers
Push the right lever up or down to LO The wipers run at low speed.
select a position.
HI The wipers run at high speed.
MIST The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever. Windshield Washer Pull the
wiper control lever toward you,
OFF The wipers are not activated. and hold it. The washers spray
until you release the lever. The
INT The length of the wipe wipers run at low speed, then
interval is varied automatically complete one more sweep after
according to vehicle speed. you release the lever.
If you turn it to the shortest delay,

1. MIST the wipers change to low speed
2. OFF operation when the vehicle speed
3. INT Intermittent exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
4. LO Low speed
5. HI High speed To change the WIPER ACTION
6. Windshield washers setting, see page 113 .
116
2008 MDX


Windshield Wipers and Washers
Headlight Washers The headlight washers use the same Rear Window Wiper and Washer
(On Canadian models) fluid reservoir as the windshield
washers.

1. Rotate the switch clockwise to
The headlight washers can be turn the rear window wiper ON.
operated at any time by pressing the
headlight washer button located next 2. Hold past ON to turn the rear
to the steering wheel column. The window wiper on and to spray the
headlights must be turned on to use rear window washer.
this button. In addition, the headlight
washer operates without pressing
the button, at the first time you turn
on the windshield washers after you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. CONTINUED
117
2008 MDX


Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights
3. When you turn the wiper switch to Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal Push down on the
the OFF position, the wiper will lever to signal a left turn and up to
return to its parked position. signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever,
4. Rotate the switch and hold it. The lever will return to
counterclockwise to spray the center when you release it or
window washer. complete a turn.
When you shift the transmission Headlights On Turning the

to the reverse position with the switch to the position turns
front windshield wipers activated, on the parking lights, taillights,
the rear window wiper operates instrument panel lights, side-marker
automatically. lights, and rear license plate lights.
When the wiper control lever 1. Turn signal Turning the switch to the
position is INT, the rear wiper 2. Off position turns on the headlights. If
operates intermittently. When it is 3. Parking and indicator lights you leave the lights on with the key
LO or HI, the rear wiper operates 4. AUTO removed from the ignition switch,
continuously. 5. Headlights on you will hear a reminder chime when
6. High beams you open the drivers door.
The rear window washer uses the 7. Flash high beams
same fluid reservoir as the wind- 8. Fog lights off
shield washer. 9. Fog lights on
118
2008 MDX


Headlights
When the light switch is in either of AUTO The automatic lighting Even with the automatic lighting
these positions, the lights on feature turns on the headlights and feature turned on, we recommend
indicator comes on as a reminder. all other exterior lights, when it that you turn on the lights manually
senses low ambient light. when driving at night or in a dense
This indicator stays on if you leave fog, or when you enter dark areas
the lights on and turn the ignition To turn on automatic lighting, turn such as long tunnels or parking

switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the light switch to AUTO at any time. facilities.
LOCK (0) position. The lights will come on automatically
when the outside light level becomes To change the AUTO LIGHT
High Beams To switch from low low (at dusk, for example). The SENSITIVITY setting, see page
beams to high beams, push the left lights on indicator comes on as a 103 .
lever forward until you hear a click. reminder. The lights and indicator
The blue high beam indicator will will turn off automatically when the Do not leave the light switch in
come on (see page 70 ). Pull it back system senses high ambient light. AUTO if you will not be driving the
to return to low beams. To flash the vehicle for an extended period (a
high beams, pull the lever back The lights will remain on when you week or more). You should also turn
lightly, then release it. The high turn off the ignition switch. They will off the lights if you plan to leave the
beams stay on as long as you hold turn off automatically when you engine idling or off for a long time.
the lever back. remove the key and open the drivers
door. To turn them on again, either
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position or turn the light switch
to the position.
119
2008 MDX


Headlights
LIGHT SENSOR Fog Lights Daytime Running Lights

Turn the fog lights on and off by With the headlight switch off, the
turning the switch next to the daytime running lights come on
headlight switch. when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position and release the
You can use the fog lights only when parking brake. They remain on until
the headlights are on low beam. you turn the ignition switch off, even
With the light switch in the AUTO if you set the parking brake.
position, you can also use the fog
lights when the headlights turn on When the headlights are on, the
automatically. They will go off when daytime running lights are off.
the headlights turn off.
The automatic lighting feature is

controlled by a sensor located on top
of the dashboard. Do not cover this
sensor or spill liquids on it.
120
2008 MDX


Headlights
If you see a CHECK DRL Automatic Lighting Off Feature If you turn the ignition switch to the
SYSTEM message on the multi- This feature turns off the headlights, LOCK (0) position with the
information display, there is a all other exterior lights, and the headlight switch on, but do not open
problem with the daytime running instrument panel lights within 15 the door and get out, the lights turn
light system. Take your vehicle to a seconds after you remove the key off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if
dealer to have it checked. and close the drivers door. the switch is in the AUTO

position).
When the multi-information display To change the HEADLIGHT AUTO
shows a DRL OFF message, the OFF TIMER setting, see page 102 . The lights turn on again when you
daytime running lights are off. unlock or open the drivers door.
Follow the procedure in the left The automatic lighting off feature If you unlock the door, but do not
column to turn them on. activates if you leave the headlight open it within 15 seconds, the lights
switch in the or go off. With the drivers door open,
position or if the lights are turned on you will hear a lights-on reminder
by setting the switch in the AUTO chime.
position, and you remove the key,
then open and close the drivers door.
121
2008 MDX


Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger wires on the inside of

the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
Pushing this button also turns the

mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page 156 .
Push the button between the center The rear window defogger will clear
vents to turn on the hazard warning fog, frost, and thin ice from the
lights (four-way flashers). This window. Push the defogger button to
causes all four outside turn signals turn it on and off. The indicator in
and both indicators in the instrument the button lights to show the
panel to flash. Use the hazard defogger is on. If you do not turn it
warning lights if you need to park in off, the defogger will shut itself off
a dangerous area near heavy traffic, after about 15 minutes. It also shuts
or if your vehicle is disabled. off when you turn off the ignition.
You have to turn it on again when
you restart the vehicle.
122
2008 MDX


Instrument Panel Brightness
To reduce glare at night, the

instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to
or . To cancel the glare
reduction function, set the
brightness to the highest level, then

press the button. You will hear a
beep when it is canceled.
You can customize when the glare

reduction function starts. To change
AUTO INTERIOR
ILLUMINATION, see page 95 for
Adjust the brightness of the The level of brightness is shown on more information.
instrument panel by pressing the the multi-information display while
or button. Press the button to you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds
increase the brightness and the after you finish adjusting.
button to decrease it. You can adjust
the brightness with the headlight
switch on or off.
123
2008 MDX


Steering Wheel Adjustments
Make any steering wheel adjustment Release the switch when the
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
before you start driving. steering wheel reaches the desired
position. Make sure the steering
wheel points towards your chest, not
toward your face, and that you can
Adjusting the steering wheel see the instrument panel gauges and
position while driving may indicators.
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only

when the vehicle is stopped.
Move the steering wheel in, out, up,
or down by pushing and holding the
adjustment switch in that direction.
124
2008 MDX


Steering Wheel Adjustments
When you remove the key from the If your vehicles battery is
ignition switch, the steering wheel disconnected or goes dead, or the
automatically moves fully in and up. fuse for the power tilt and telescopic
steering wheel is removed, the
To change the AUTO TILT & power tilt and telescopic steering
TELESCOPE STEERING WHEEL wheel system needs to be reset

setting, see page 99 . when you reconnect the battery or
install the fuse.
The steering wheel then returns to
its original position when you insert Insert the key into the ignition
the key back in the ignition switch. switch, and remove it. The steering
wheel automatically moves fully in
Steering wheel movement is also and up to let you know the system is
controlled by the driving position reset.
memory system (see page 157 ).
125
2008 MDX


Keys and Locks
These keys contain electronic

KEY MASTER KEY VALET KEY KEY MASTER KEY VALET KEY
NUMBER WITH REMOTE (Light Gray) NUMBER WITH REMOTE (Light Gray) circuits that are activated by the
TAG TRANSMITTER TAG TRANSMITTER immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct

sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy

MDX, Technology, and Sport U.S. Entertainment Packages and
Packages models shown. Canadian Elite Package models shown. objects on them.
The master key fits all the locks on You should have received a key Keep the keys away from liquids.
your vehicle. The valet key works number tag with your keys. You will If they get wet, dry them
only in the ignition and the drivers need this key number if you ever immediately with a soft cloth.
door lock. You can keep the glove have to get a lost key replaced. Use
box locked when you leave your only Acura-approved key blanks. The valet key does not contain a
vehicle and the valet key at a parking battery. Do not try to take it apart.
facility.
126
2008 MDX


Keys and Locks
Retractable Master Key Always use the fully-extended key The key may come in contact with
when you insert it to the ignition your finger while being retracted or
RELEASE BUTTON switch. If the key does not fully extended. Make sure your fingers do
Push extend, the immobilizer system may not touch the pivot of the key when
not operate properly and prevents retracting or extending the key.
from starting the engine.

U.S. Entertainment Packages and
Canadian Elite Package models shown.
The master key can be retracted into

the remote transmitter. To use the
key, push the release button to
release the key from the transmitter.
The key should be fully extended.
To retract the key, push the release
button and at the same time push the
key into the remote transmitter until
it is securely latched.
127
2008 MDX


Immobilizer System
The Immobilizer System protects If the system repeatedly does not As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an recognize the coding of your key, This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly-coded key (or other contact your dealer. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engines fuel following two conditions: (1) This device
system is disabled. Do not attempt to alter this system may not cause harmful interference, and
or add other devices to it. Electrical (2) this device must accept any
When you turn the ignition switch to problems could result that may make interference received, including
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer your vehicle undrivable. interference that may cause undesired
system indicator should come on operation.
briefly, then go off. If the indicator If you have lost your key and you
starts to blink, it means the system cannot start the engine, contact your Changes or modifications not expressly
does not recognize the coding of the dealer. approved by the party responsible for
key. Turn the ignition switch to the compliance could void the users
LOCK (0) position, remove the key, authority to operate the equipment.
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again. Always take the ignition key with you This device complies with Industry
whenever you leave the vehicle alone. Canada Standard RSS-210.
The system may not recognize your Operation is subject to the following two
keys coding if another immobilizer conditions: (1) this device may not cause
key or other metal object (i.e. key interference, and (2) this device must
fob) is near the ignition switch when accept any interference that may cause
you insert the key. undesired operation of the device.
128
2008 MDX


Ignition Switch
If the front wheels are turned, the You will hear a reminder beeper if
anti-theft lock may make it difficult you leave the key in the ignition
to turn the key. Firmly turn the switch in the LOCK (0) or the
steering wheel to the left or right as ACCESSORY (I) position and open
you turn the key. the drivers door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.

ACCESSORY (I) You can
operate the audio system and the The shift lever must be in Park
accessory power sockets in this before you can remove the key from
position. the ignition switch.
ON (II) This is the normal key

position when driving. Several of the
The ignition switch has four indicators on the instrument panel
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY come on as a test when you turn the
(I), ON (II), and START (III). ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
LOCK (0) You can insert or position.
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key to the LOCK (0) START (III) Use this position
position, the shift lever must be in only to start the engine. The switch
Park, and you must push the key in returns to the ON (II) position when
slightly. you let go of the key.
129
2008 MDX


Door Locks
UNLOCK LOCK To change the KEY AND REMOTE

UNLOCK MODE setting, see page
109 .
When the vehicle speed reaches

about 10 mph (about 15 km/h) or
more, all the doors lock
automatically.
To change the AUTO DOOR

LOCK setting, see page 106 .
LOCK UNLOCK
When you shift to P after driving, the
To lock all doors and the tailgate, The lock tab on any passengers door drivers door unlocks.
press the bottom of the master door locks and unlocks that door.
lock switch on either front door, pull To change the AUTO DOOR
the lock tab above the drivers door All doors and the tailgate can be UNLOCK setting, see page 107 .
handle, or use the key on the outside locked from the outside by using the
lock on the drivers door. key in the drivers door lock. To
unlock only the drivers door, insert
Pressing the top of either master the key, turn the key, and release it.
door lock switch will unlock all doors The remaining doors and the tailgate
and the tailgate. unlock when you turn the key a
second time within a few seconds.
130
2008 MDX


Door Locks, Tailgate
Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks Tailgate

With any door and the tailgate open
and the key in the ignition, both
master door lock switches are
disabled. They are not disabled if all
the doors and the tailgate are closed.

If you try to lock an open drivers
door by pulling the lock tab rearward
the lock tab on the drivers door pops
out.
LOCK
The childproof door locks are To open the tailgate, push up inside
designed to prevent children seated the handle, then lift up. To close the
in the rear from accidentally opening tailgate, use the inner handle to pull
the rear doors. Each rear door has a it down, then press down on the back
lock lever near the edge. With the edge.
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
down), the door cannot be opened Keep the tailgate closed at all times
from the inside regardless of the while driving to avoid damaging the
position of the lock tab. To open the tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
door, push the lock tab forward and from getting into the interior. See
use the outside door handle. Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
58 .
131
2008 MDX


Tailgate
Power Tailgate Press and hold the tailgate button on

the remote transmitter or the switch
for about 1 second to open or close
the tailgate. Each time you press the
button on the remote transmitter or
the switch, you will hear a beep, and
some front and rear lights will flash.
If you push the same button or

switch again while the tailgate is
opening or closing, you will hear
three beeps, and the tailgate will stop
POWER TAILGATE SWITCH moving, reverse direction, and stop TAILGATE SWITCH
at the fully opened or closed position.
U.S. Entertainment Packages and The tailgate can also be closed by
Canadian Elite Package models pressing the button on the tailgate. If
The tailgate can be opened and you press the button again while the
closed with the remote transmitter tailgate is closing, you will hear three
(see page 135 ) or the switch in the beeps, and the tailgate will stop
drivers door pocket when both front moving, reverse direction, and stop
doors are unlocked. at the fully opened position.
132
2008 MDX


Tailgate
Auto-Reverse Also check that passengers, When the tailgate or the roof is
The power tailgate has an auto- especially children, do not have their covered with snow or ice.
reverse feature. If it meets hands on the edge of the tailgate or
resistance while opening or closing, on the tailgate sill. The auto reverse Do not install any accessories on the
it will beep three times and reverse feature stops working when the tailgate. It may cause the tailgate not
direction. However, the tailgate may tailgate is about to latch so the motor to function properly. If there is snow

not reverse immediately. Always can pull the tailgate shut. or ice on the tailgate, make sure to
make sure passengers and objects remove it before you operate the
are clear of the tailgate before If your vehicles battery is tailgate.
opening or closing it. disconnected, goes dead, or the fuse
is removed while the tailgate is fully If you push the tailgate release
open, the power tailgate needs to be button inside the handle while the
reset. After connecting the battery tailgate is opening or closing, it will
Closing a power tailgate while or installing the fuse, close the stop moving. You need to open or
anyone is in the path of the tailgate fully by hand. close it the rest of the way manually.
tailgate can cause serious
injury. The power tailgate may not open or The tailgate has sensors on both
close under the these conditions: sides. Be careful not to damage them.
Make sure everyone is clear If the sensors are damaged, the
before closing the power The vehicle is parked on a steep power tailgate does not function
tailgate. hill. properly.
When the vehicle is swayed in a

strong wind.
CONTINUED
133
2008 MDX


Tailgate
If you try to drive off with the Unlocking the Tailgate

tailgate not closed completely, a
beeper sounds and a DOOR &
TAILGATE OPEN message is
shown on the multi-information
display.
Keep the tailgate closed at all times

while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
58 .
If there is a problem in the power U.S. Entertainment Packages and Push the release lever to the right as
tailgate system, you will see a Canadian Elite Package models shown.
CHECK POWER TAILGATE If the power door lock system cannot
message on the multi-information unlock the tailgate, unlock it If you need to unlock the tailgate
display. Have the system checked by manually. manually, it means there is a
your dealer. problem with the tailgate. Have the
Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver to vehicle checked by your dealer.
With this message shown on the remove the cover on the back of the
multi-information display, you can tailgate.
still open or close the tailgate
manually.
134
2008 MDX


Tailgate, Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter
MDX, Technology, and U.S. Sport U.S. Entertainment Packages and
Packages models Canadian Elite Package models
UNLOCK LOCK
BUTTON BUTTON UNLOCK LOCK
BUTTON

BUTTON
TAILGATE
BUTTON
PANIC PANIC
BUTTON BUTTON
MDX, Technology, and U.S. Sport
Packages models LOCK Press this button once to To change the KEYLESS LOCK
If you cannot open the tailgate, lock all doors and the tailgate. Some ACKNOWLEDGEMENT setting,
remove the cover on the back of the exterior lights will flash. When you see page 110 .
tailgate (see page 134 ). Push the push LOCK twice within 5 seconds,
release lever to the right as shown, you will hear a beep to verify that the
then pull the outer handle to open doors and tailgate are locked and the
the tailgate. security system has set. This button
does not work if any door or tailgate
is not fully closed.
CONTINUED
135
2008 MDX


Remote Transmitter
UNLOCK Press this button once When you press the UNLOCK direction and stops in the fully
to unlock the drivers door. Push it button, the front and rear individual opened or fully closed position.
twice to unlock the other doors. map lights and the cargo area light,
Some exterior lights will flash twice depending on their switch positions, PANIC Press and hold this
when you push the button. If you do will come on (see page 160 ). If you button for about 1 second to attract
not open any door or the tailgate do not open any door or the tailgate, attention; the horn will sound, and
within 30 seconds, they will the lights stay on for about 30 the exterior lights will flash for about
automatically relock. seconds, then go out. If you relock 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
the doors and the tailgate with the press any other button on the remote
To change the KEY AND REMOTE remote transmitter before 30 transmitter, or turn the ignition
UNLOCK MODE setting, see page seconds have elapsed, the lights will switch to the ON (II) position. Panic
109 . go off immediately. mode does not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
To change the SECURITY U.S. Entertainment Packages and
RELOCK TIMER setting, see page Canadian Elite Package models
111 . TAILGATE Press and hold the
TAILGATE button to open or close
the power tailgate. When the tailgate
begins to move, you will hear a beep,
and some front and rear lights will
flash.
If you push the same button again

while the tailgate is opening or
closing, three beeps sound, the
tailgate stops moving, reverses
136
2008 MDX


Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Transmitter

Avoid dropping or throwing the Battery
transmitter. If it takes several pushes on the
Protect the transmitter from button to lock or unlock the doors
extreme temperature. and the tailgate, replace the battery
Do not immerse the transmitter in as soon as possible.

any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the Battery type: CR1616
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
SCREW KEYPAD
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of

the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
2. Separate the keypad from the

transmitter by pushing any button
from outside.
CONTINUED
137
2008 MDX


Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery and note As required by the FCC:

the polarity. Make sure the This device complies with Part 15 of the
polarity of the new battery is the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
same ( side facing up), then following two conditions: (1) This device
insert it in the keypad. may not cause harmful interference, and
BATTERY (2) this device must accept any
An improperly disposed of battery interference received, including
can hurt the environment. interference that may cause undesired
Always confirm local regulations operation.
for battery disposal.
Changes or modifications not expressly
5. Snap the two halves of the keypad, approved by the party responsible for
then install the parts in reverse compliance could void the users
3. Place a cloth on the edge of the order. authority to operate the equipment.
keypad, and remove the upper half
by carefully prying on the edge This device complies with Industry
with a small flat-tip screwdriver. Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
138
2008 MDX


Remote Transmitter
Keyless Memory SettingsTM Here are the settings activated with The steering wheel will move to the
the remote; stored position when you insert the
key into the ignition switch.
Customized settings
(see page 83 ). You will also see the WELCOME
DRIVER 1 or WELCOME

Driving position memory DRIVER 2 message on the multi-
(see page 157 ). information display, depending on
which linked remote transmitter is
Audio system settings used.
(see page 200 ).
To turn off this feature, press and
Climate control settings hold the LOCK and UNLOCK
(see page 171 ). buttons at the same time. The LED
When you unlock the drivers door in the remote will blink twice. Then
with your remote, each remote When you unlock and open the release the buttons. Doing this
activates the keyless memory drivers door with the remote cancels the keyless memory settings
settings related to that remote. The transmitter, the drivers seat (except for that remote and restores the
drivers ID (MEMORY 1 or the power lumbar feature) and default settings.
MEMORY 2) is shown on the back outside mirrors start to move to the
of each remote. positions stored in memory. The To turn the keyless memory settings
indicator in the related memory back on, repeat this procedure. The
button to the remote comes on. LED will blink once to indicate the
feature has been turned on.
139
2008 MDX


Seats
Front Seat Power Adjustments Moves the whole seat up

See pages 12 14 for important safety and forward, or down
information and warnings about how to and backward. The front
properly position the seats and seat- of the seat also tilts up or
backs. down at the same time.
The controls for the power

adjustable front seats are on the Adjusts the seat-back
outside edge of each seat bottom. angle forward or
You can adjust the seats with the backward.
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
Moves the seat forward Increases or decreases
The passenger seat has the same and backward. the lumbar support.
adjustments as the drivers seat but (Drivers seat only)
without any lumbar adjustment.
Moves the front of the

seat up or down.
Raises or lowers the seat.
140
2008 MDX


Seats
Head Restraints FRONT CUSHION

See page 14 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints. SEAT-
BACK
Your vehicle is equipped with head

restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
LEGS RELEASE BUTTON
They are most effective when you Adjusting the Head Restraint
adjust them so the center of the back The head restraints adjust for height.
of the occupants head rests against You need both hands to adjust the
the center of the restraint. restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
CONTINUED
141
2008 MDX


Seats
SECOND CENTER AND THIRD ROW When reinstalling a head restraint,

CUSHION put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height Failure to reinstall the head
while pressing the release button. restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it. Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
LEGS RELEASE BUTTON
Removing the Head Restraint

To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.
142
2008 MDX


Seats
Active Head Restraints This reduces the distance between For a head restraint system to work
the restraint and the occupants head. properly:
It also helps protect the occupants
against whiplash and injuries to the Do not hang any items on the head
neck and upper spine. restraints, or from the restraint
legs.

After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its normal Do not place any object between
position. an occupant and the seat-back.
If the restraints do not return to their Install each restraint in its proper
normal position, or in the event of a location.
severe collision, have the vehicle
inspected by an Acura dealer. Only use genuine Acura
The drivers and front passengers replacement head restraints.
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
CONTINUED
143
2008 MDX


Seats
Adjusting the Second Row Seats Folding the Second Row Seats Make sure that the folded seat-back
The left and right halves can be does not press against the front
folded separately. passengers seat, as this could cause
the weight sensors to work
1. To unlatch the detachable anchor improperly.
before folding the seat-back, insert
the latch plate into the slot on the
side of the anchor buckle (see
page 146 ) and allow the seat belt
to retract. Store the detachable
anchor and seat belt latch plates in
the retractor housing.
HANDLE
2. Lower the head restraints to their
To change the seat-back angle of the lowest positions.
seats in the second row, pull up on
the handle on the outside of the seat- 3. Pull up the handle on the outside
back, and push the seat-back. of the seat-back.
Overall, the seat-back has six 4. Fold the seat-back forward.

different positions.
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to the upright position. Make
sure the seat is locked securely
before driving.
144
2008 MDX


Seats
Third Row Access Folding the Third Row Seat

1. Use the latch plate to release the
seat belt from the detachable
anchor (see page 146 ).
2. Lower the head restraints to their

lowest positions.
NOTE: To fold the third row seat,

the second row seat-back must be
folded down or in the full up right
position. THIRD SEAT HANDLE
RELEASE LEVER
3. Unlock the seat-back by pulling
To get into the third row seats, pull the handle. Push the seat-back
up the lever on the side of the forward.
passengers side second row seat-
back. The seat-back will tilt forward, Make sure the outer shoulder belts
and then can be slid forward. are positioned on each hook on the
side panel whenever the third seat is
After you return the seat-back to the folded.
upright position, push the whole seat
backwards until it latches. Make
sure the seat is fully latched before
sitting in it.
CONTINUED
145
2008 MDX


Seats
Reverse this procedure to return the Detachable Anchor When the seats are returned to the
seat to the upright position. Make upright position, these detachable
sure the seat is locked securely anchors should be latched back
before driving. Reconnect the seat properly.
belts to the detachable anchors.
Make sure all items in the cargo area

are secured. Loose items can fly Using a seat belt with the
forward and cause injury if you have detachable anchor unlatched
to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo increases the chance of serious
on page 332 ). injury or death in a crash.
LATCH PLATE Before using the seat belt,

make sure the detachable
The seat belts in the second row anchor is correctly latched.
center seat and the third row seats
are equipped with detachable
anchors.
To unlatch the detachable anchor,

insert the latch plate into the slot on
the side of the anchor buckle. Store
the detachable anchor and seat belt
latch plates in the retractor housing.
146
2008 MDX


Seats
SECOND ROW CENTER SEAT THIRD ROW SEATS SMALL LATCH PLATE
LATCH PLATE

TRIANGLE
MARKS
HOOK
SMALL LATCH PLATE ANCHOR BUCKLE
Pull out the small latch plate and the Pull out the outer shoulder belts Line up the triangle marks on the
latch plate from each holding slot in from the hook. Both of the third-row small latch plate and anchor buckle
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt hooks should only be used when the when reattaching the belt and buckle.
to extend it. seat belt is detached.
Tug on the seat belt to verify that
the detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.
147
2008 MDX


Seat Heaters
Passengers
Seat
HI
Drivers LOW
HEATERS Seat Front seat Second row seat
Both front seats are equipped with Push the front of the switch, HI, to U.S. Entertainment Packages and
seat heaters. Because of the sensors rapidly heat up the seat. After the Canadian models
for the side airbag cutoff system, seat reaches a comfortable The outer second row seat cushions
there is no heater in the passengers temperature, select LO by pushing and seat-backs are equipped with
seat-back. The ignition switch must the back of the switch. This will keep seat heaters. Turning the switch on
be in the ON (II) position to use the the seat warm. the driver side warms the outer seat
heaters. behind the drivers seat only. The
passenger side switch warms the
outer seat behind the front
passenger seat.
148
2008 MDX


Seat Heaters, Power Windows
In the HI setting, the heater turns off Power Windows The windows will operate for up to
when the seat gets warm, and turns 10 minutes after you turn off the
back on after the seats temperature DRIVERS WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ignition switch. Opening either front
drops. SWITCH door cancels this function.
In the LO setting, the heater runs

continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes. Closing a power window on
someones hands or fingers can
Follow these precautions when using cause serious injury.
the seat heaters:
Make sure your passengers are
Use the HI setting only to heat the away from the windows before
seats quickly, because it draws closing them.
large amounts of current from the Turn the ignition switch to the ON
battery. (II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open a window, push the AUTO To open either front
If the engine is left idling for an switch down and hold it. Release the window fully, push the window
extended period, do not use the switch when you want the window to switch firmly down to the second
seat heaters even on the LO stop. Pull back on the switch and detent, then release it. The window
setting. It can weaken the battery, hold it to close the window. automatically goes down all the way.
causing hard starting. To stop the window from going all
the way down, pull back on the
window switch briefly.
CONTINUED
149
2008 MDX


Power Windows
To close either front window fully, AUTO REVERSE If either front If your vehicles battery is
pull back the window switch firmly window senses any obstacle while it disconnected or goes dead, or the
to the second detent, then release it. is closing automatically, it will drivers window fuse is removed, the
The window automatically goes all reverse direction and then stop. To AUTO function may be disabled. If
the way up. To stop the window from close the window, remove the the AUTO function is disabled, the
going all the way up, push down on obstacle, then use the window switch power window system will need to be
the window switch briefly. again. reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse.
When you push the MAIN switch in, Auto reverse stops sensing when the
the switch is off, and the passengers window is almost closed. You should 1. Start the engine. Push down and
windows cannot be raised or lowered. always check that all passengers and hold the drivers window switch
To cancel this feature, push on the objects are away from the window until the window is fully open.
switch again to get it to pop out. before closing it.
Keep the MAIN switch pushed in 2. Pull and hold the drivers window
when you have children in the switch to close the window
vehicle so they do not injure completely, then hold the switch
themselves by operating the for about 2 seconds.
windows unintentionally.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
150
2008 MDX


Power Windows
Opening the Windows and Opening/Closing the Windows 3. Turn the key clockwise again, and
Moonroof with the Remote and Moonroof with the Key hold it. All four windows and the
Transmitter moonroof start to open. To stop
You can open all of the windows and the windows and the moonroof,
the moonroof from outside with the release the key.
remote transmitter.

1. Press the UNLOCK button once 4. To open the windows and the
to unlock the drivers door. moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
2. Press the UNLOCK button a of step 2).
second time, and hold it. All the
doors unlock, and all four windows To close:
and moonroof start to open. To 1. Insert the key in the drivers door
stop the windows and moonroof, lock.
release the button.
You can open and close the windows 2. Turn the key counterclockwise,
3. To open the windows and and moonroof with the key in the then release it.
moonroof further, press the drivers door lock.
button again (within 10 seconds of To open: 3. Turn the key counterclockwise
step 1) and hold it. If the windows 1. Insert the key in the drivers door again, and hold it. All four
and the moonroof stop before the lock. windows and the moonroof start to
desired position, repeat steps 1 close. To stop the windows and
and 2. 2. Turn the key clockwise, then the moonroof, release the key.
You cannot close the windows or the release it.
moonroof with the remote
transmitter. CONTINUED
151
2008 MDX


Power Windows, Moonroof
4. To close the windows and the Moonroof To tilt up the moonroof, push on the
moonroof further, turn and hold center of the moonroof switch. To
the key again (within 10 seconds stop the moonroof from tilting up
of step 2). fully, push the switch briefly.
Auto reverse does not work when To close the moonroof fully, firmly
closing the windows and moonroof push the moonroof switch forward,
with the key. then release it. The moonroof
automatically closes all the way. To
NOTE: If the windows and the stop the moonroof from closing,
moonroof stop before the desired push the switch briefly.
position, repeat steps 2 and 3.
MOONROOF SWITCH To open or close the moonroof
partially, pull back or push forward
To open the moonroof fully, pull the moonroof switch lightly and hold
back the moonroof switch firmly. it. The moonroof will stop when you
The moonroof opens all the way. To release the switch.
stop the moonroof from opening
fully, push the switch briefly.
152
2008 MDX


Moonroof, Parking Brake
Auto Reverse You can open and close the Parking Brake
If the moonroof runs into any moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
obstacle while it is closing you turn off the ignition switch. RELEASE HANDLE
automatically, it will reverse Opening either front door cancels
direction, and then stop. To close the this function.
moonroof, remove the obstacle, then

use the moonroof switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the If you try to open the moonroof in
moonroof is almost closed. You below-f reezing temperatures, or when
should always check that all it is covered with snow or ice, you can
passengers and objects are away damage the moonroof panel or its
from the moonroof before closing it. motor. PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
To apply the parking brake, push the

pedal down with your foot. To
Opening or closing the release it, pull the release handle
moonroof on someones hands fully. The parking brake indicator on
or fingers can cause serious the instrument panel should go out
injury. when the parking brake is fully
released (see page 65 ).
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof You will also see a RELEASE
before opening or closing it. PARKING BRAKE message on the
multi-information display (see page
81 ). CONTINUED
153
2008 MDX


Parking Brake, Mirrors
Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
Driving the vehicle with the parking clean and adjusted for best visibility.
brake applied can damage the rear Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound you start driving.
if the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
SENSOR
INDICATOR
AUTO BUTTON
The inside mirror can automatically

darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this feature.
154
2008 MDX


Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors 3. Push the appropriate edge of the

adjustment switch to move the
There is also a sensor on the back of mirror right, left, up, or down.
the mirror. Items hung on the mirror SELECTOR
may block this sensor and af f ect its SWITCH 4. When you finish, move the
perf ormance. selector switch to the center (off)

position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position.
2. Move the selector switch to L

(drivers side) or R (passengers
side).
155
2008 MDX


Mirrors
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror Heated Mirrors

Both outside door mirrors have a
reverse tilt feature. When in reverse, HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
the selected mirror will tilt down
slightly to improve your view as you
parallel park. Shifting out of reverse
will return the mirrors to their
original position.
To tilt the drivers mirror, place

the selector switch in the left
position.
To tilt the passengers mirror,

place the switch in the right The outside mirrors are heated to
position. remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
To turn the feature off, place the position, turn on the heaters by
switch in the center position. pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Outside mirror positions can be Press the button again to turn the
stored in the driving position heaters off. Pressing this button also
memory system (see page 157 ). turns the rear window defogger on
and off.
156
2008 MDX


Driving Position Memory System
Your vehicle has a memory feature Storing a Driving Position in MEMORY BUTTONS
for the steering wheel, drivers seat, Memory
and outside mirror positions. Store a driving position only when
the vehicle is parked.
Seat, except for power lumbar,
steering wheel and outside mirror 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

positions can be stored in separate (II) position. You cannot add a
memories. You select a memorized new driving position to the
position by pushing the appropriate memory unless the ignition switch
button or using the appropriate is in the ON (II) position. You can
remote transmitter (Driver 1 or recall a memorized position with
Driver 2). For more information see the ignition switch in any position. MEMO BUTTON
page 139 .
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable 3. Press and release the MEMO
position (see page 140 ). button on the control panel. You
Adjust the steering wheel to a will hear a beep. Immediately
comfortable position (see page press and hold one of the memory
124). buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two
Adjust the outside mirrors for best beeps. The indicator in the
visibility (see page 155 ). memory button will come on. The
current positions of the drivers
seat, steering wheel, and outside
mirrors are now stored.
CONTINUED
157
2008 MDX


Driving Position Memory System
Doing any of the following after Selecting a Memorized Position To stop the systems automatic
pressing the MEMO button will To select a memorized position, do adjustment, do any of these actions:
cancel the storing procedure. this:
Press any button on the control
Not pressing a memory button 1. Make sure the vehicle is parked. panel: MEMO, 1, or 2.
within 5 seconds. Push any of the adjustment
2. Press the desired memory button switches for the seat.
Readjusting the seat position. (1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then Shift out of Park.
release the button. Adjust the outside mirrors.
Readjusting the outside mirror
position. The system will move the seat, If desired, you can use the
steering wheel, and outside mirrors adjustment switches to change the
Each memory button stores only one to the memorized positions. The positions of the seat, steering wheel
driving position. Storing a new indicator in the selected memory or outside mirrors after they are in
position erases the previous setting button will flash during movement. their memorized position. If you
stored in that buttons memory. If When the adjustments are complete, change the memorized position, the
you want to add a new position while you will hear two beeps, and the indicator in the memory button will
retaining the current one, use the indicator will remain on. go out. To keep this driving position
other memory button. for later use, you must store it in the
To change the MEMORY driving position memory.
POSITION LINK setting, see page
98 .
158
2008 MDX


Interior Lights
Light Control Switch The individual map lights in the After all doors are closed tightly, the
second row and the cargo area lights dim slightly, then fade out in
DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION light in the third row cannot be about 30 seconds.
turned on.
To change the INTERIOR LIGHT
OFF When the switch is in the door activated DIMMING TIME setting, see page

position: 101 .
ON
The individual map lights in the With any door or the tailgate left
front and second rows come on open, the lights stay on about 3
when any door or the tailgate is minutes, then go out.
opened, or when the remote
transmitter is used to unlock the The lights also come on when the
doors (see page 136 ). When the key is removed from the ignition
The light control switch has three doors and the tailgate are closed, switch.
positions: OFF, Door Activated, and each light can be turned on and off
ON. by pushing the lens.
When the switch is in the OFF position: The cargo area light comes on
The individual door lights or the when any door or the tailgate is
tailgate lights will operate when a opened if the light control switch
door or the tailgate is opened. is in the door activated (center)
position. When the doors and the
The individual map lights in the tailgate are closed, the cargo area
front can be turned on and off by light can be turned on with the
pressing the lenses. switch in the light. CONTINUED
159
2008 MDX


Interior Lights
When the light control switch is in the Individual Map Lights

ON position:
FRONT
All the individual map lights come
on and stay on as long as the
switch remains in the ON position.
The cargo (3rd row) area light

comes on if the switch is in the
door activated position.
COURTESY LIGHT
Turn on the front row individual map The courtesy light between the map
lights by pushing the lens. Push the lights comes on when you turn the
lens again to turn it off. With the parking lights on. To adjust its
light control switch in the door brightness, press either of the
activated position, the second row instrument panel brightness control
map lights can be turned on by buttons ( or ).
pushing the lens. Push the lens again
to turn it off.
160
2008 MDX


Interior Lights
Cargo Area Light Tailgate Lights Individual Interior Lights

The lights in the tailgate have an on- The courtesy lights in all four doors
off switch to control if the lights come on when you open any door.
come on when the tailgate is opened. The light around the ignition switch
The tailgate lights do not come on comes on when any door is opened.
ON when any other doors are opened. After you close the door, the ignition

switch light stays on for about 30
seconds regardless of the interior
light dimming time setting (see page
OFF 101 ).
The cargo area light has a three-

position switch. In the OFF position,
the light does not come on. In the
center position, it comes on when
you open the tailgate. In the ON
position, it stays on continuously.
161
2008 MDX


Interior Convenience Items
SUNGLASSES HOLDER COAT HOOK
SUN VISOR VANITY MIRROR STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
GLOVE BOX GROCERY HOOK
CENTER POCKET
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
BEVERAGE HOLDER
ARMREST/BEVERAGE HOLDER ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
162
2008 MDX


Beverage Holders FRONT LID

Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage

holders when you open or close the
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the

upholstery, carpeting, and electrical ARMREST BEVERAGE HOLDER
components in the interior.
The center seat-back in the second is To open the beverage holder, press
Open the front beverage holder by equipped with an armrest that and release the front lid. To close,
sliding the lid. provides the beverage holder. Pivot press the lid again until it latches.
down the seat-back to use them. When you put back the armrest in
the center seat-back, make sure the
lid is closed properly.
163
2008 MDX


Console Compartment Storage Compartment Glove Box

Open the glove box by pulling the
LIDS handle to the left. Close it with a firm
push. Lock or unlock the glove box
with the master key.
BUTTONS
An open glove box can cause

serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
LID belt.
Your vehicle is equipped with a front The storage compartment with a Always keep the glove box
seat armrest pad that is also a sliding lid is at the left-side foot of closed while driving.
console compartment. To open the the front passenger seat.
console compartment fully, push
both buttons at the front of the For the third row, a storage
compartment. compartment is located in the
passenger side armrest. To open the
compartment, push the button and
lift the lid.
164
2008 MDX


Sunglasses Holder Cargo Hooks

HOOK
PUSH
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
To open the sunglasses holder, push Some larger styles of sunglasses The hooks on the floor of the cargo
then release the raised detent. It will may not fit in the holder. area enable you to tie down items
unlatch and swing down. To close it, stored in the back. Make sure all
push it until it latches. Make sure the You may also store small items in stored items are secured before
holder is closed while you are driving. this holder. Make sure they are driving.
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
165
2008 MDX


Sun Visor Vanity Mirror Accessory Power Sockets

Your vehicle has two or three
accessory power sockets, depending
on the model. All models have the
front accessory power socket under
the audio system and rear socket
behind the third row seat on the
drivers side.
Slide
SUN VISOR
To use the sun visor, pull it down. To use the vanity mirror on the back
When using the sun visor for the of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out. The vanity mirror light will not come
In this position, the sun visor can be on if the sun visor is slid outward.
adjusted by moving it on its slider.
Do not use the extended sun visor
over the inside mirror.
Make sure you put the sun visor

back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
166
2008 MDX


Each socket is intended to supply AC Power Outlet

power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
None of the sockets will power an

automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
MDX, Technology, and U.S. Sport

Packages models U.S. Entertainment Packages and
The accessory power socket is Canadian Elite Package models
located at the back of the front There is a 115 volt AC power outlet
console compartment. inside the front console
compartment. To use the AC power
To use an accessory power socket, outlet, open the lids and open the
the ignition switch must be in the outlet cover. Insert the plug into the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. receptacle slightly, turn it 90
clockwise, then push in the plug all
the way.
CONTINUED
167
2008 MDX


Always run the engine when you use NOTE: The AC power outlet is not
the AC power outlet. designed for electric appliances
which require high initial peak
The maximum capacity for this wattage such as cathode-ray tube
power outlet is 115 volt AC at 100 type televisions, refrigerators,
watts or less. If you use an appliance electric pumps, etc. It is also not
which requires more than 100 watts, suitable for devices that process
it automatically stops supplying the precise data such as medical
power. If this happens, turn the equipment or measuring instruments.
ignition switch off and turn it on Any appliances that require an
again. extremely stable power supply such
as microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,
should not be connected to this
outlet.
168
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Features
The climate control system in your Climate Control System ................ 170 HomeLink Universal
vehicle provides a comfortable Rear Climate Controls............... 175 Transceiver................................. 276
driving environment in all weather Audio System ................................. 180 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ........ 280
conditions. Playing the AM/FM Radio AcuraLink ....................................... 308
(Models without navigation Rearview Camera and Monitor .... 320
The standard audio system has system) ................................... 181
many features. This section Playing the XM Satellite Radio .. 185
describes those features and how to Playing Discs .................................. 190
Features
use them. Disc Changer Error Messages .... 199
Audio System (Models with
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio navigation system) .................... 200
system that requires a code number Playing the AM/FM Radio ........... 201
to enable it. AM/FM Radio Reception ............. 205
Playing the XM Satellite Radio .. 210
Playing Discs .................................. 218
Disc Changer Error Messages .... 228
Protecting Your Discs ................... 229
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 232
Remote Audio Controls................. 233
Radio Theft Protection.................. 235
Setting the Clock and Calendar ... 236
Rear Entertainment System ......... 237
Security System ............................. 269
Cruise Control ................................ 270
Compass.......................................... 273
169
2008 MDX


Climate Control System
FRONT CONTROL PANEL OFF BUTTON

DRIVERS SIDE TEMPERATURE FRONT PASSENGERS SIDE TEMPERATURE
AUTO BUTTON AUTO INDICATOR FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
DRIVERS SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
BUTTONS FRONT PASSENGERS
SIDE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
DUAL BUTTON MODE BUTTON

REAR BUTTON AIR CONDITIONING
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
REAR CONTROL PANEL
REAR PASSENGER AUTO SYNC INDICATOR
COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE
REAR PASSENGER FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
AUTO BUTTON MODE BUTTON

OFF BUTTON
170
2008 MDX


Personalization Setting Using Automatic Climate Control The system automatically selects
When you unlock the doors with The automatic climate control the proper mix of conditioned
your remote, the drivers ID (Driver system in your vehicle picks the and/or heated air that will, as
1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the proper combination of air quickly as possible, raise or lower
climate control settings are turned to conditioning, heating, and ventilation the interior temperature to your
the respective mode automatically to maintain the interior temperature preference.
when the ignition is turned to the you select. The system also adjusts
ON (II) position. the fan speed and airflow levels. Temperature Control
Features
The drivers side temperature, the
Voice Control System 1. Press the Auto button on the front passengers side temperature and
On vehicles with navigation system control panel. the rear passenger compartment
The climate control system can also temperature can be set separately.
be operated by voice control. See the 2. Set the desired temperature with Press the button of the
Navi section in your quick start the temperature control buttons. appropriate temperature control to
guide for an overview of this system, You will see AUTO in the systems increase the temperature of airflow.
and the navigation system manual display. Press the button to decrease it.
for complete details. Each set temperature is shown in the
3. You can set the drivers side display. The rear temperature is
temperature, the passengers side shown in the display on the back of
temperature, and the temperature the center console.
of the rear passenger
compartment separately.
CONTINUED
171
2008 MDX


When you set the temperature to its passengers according to each Rear Button
lower limit ( ) or its upper limit adjusted temperature. The system When you press this button, the
( ), the system runs at full also regulates each temperature indicator in the button comes on, and
cooling or heating only. It does not based on the information of the sun the temperature of the rear
regulate the interior temperature. light sensor and the sun position passenger compartment can be
which is updated automatically by adjusted separately with the
When you press a fan control button, the navigations global positioning temperature control buttons on the
the fan is taken out of AUTO mode. system (GPS). For example, if the back of the center console. With the
drivers side of the vehicle getting indicator off, the temperature of the
When the indicator in the dual too much sun, the system will adjust rear passenger compartment is
button is on, the drivers side and to a lower temperature. synchronized to the drivers side set
passengers side temperature can be temperature. You will see the AUTO
controlled independently (see page Dual Button SYNC on the system display of the
177 ). You can set the temperatures for the rear control panel. Changing the
drivers side and the passengers side temperature of the rear passenger
When the indicator in the rear separately when this button is compartment also makes the
button is on, the temperature of the pressed (indicator is on). When the indicator to turn on, and takes the
rear passenger compartment can be indicator in the DUAL button is off, system out of synchronized mode.
controlled independently (see page the temperatures for both sides are This causes the word SYNC in the
177 ). synchronized to the drivers side set display to go out.
temperature. When defrost mode is
On vehicles with navigation system selected, dual mode operation is
In the Auto mode, the vehicles canceled.
interior temperature is
independently regulated for the
driver, front passenger, and rear
172
2008 MDX


To Turn Everything Off Semi-automatic Operation Recirculation Button

If you press the OFF button, the You can manually select various When the indicator in the button is
climate control system shuts off functions of the climate control on, air from the vehicles interior is
completely. system when it is in fully automatic sent throughout the system again.
mode. All other features remain When the indicator is off, air is
Keep the system completely off automatically controlled. Making any brought in from the outside of the
for short periods only. manual selection causes the word vehicle (fresh air mode).
AUTO in the display to go out.
Features
To keep stale air and mustiness The outside air intakes for the
from collecting, you should have Fan Control climate control system are at the
the fan running at all times. Press the button to increase base of the windshield. Keep this
the fan speed and airflow. Press the area clear of leaves and other debris.
button to decrease it.
The system should be left in fresh
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button air mode under almost all conditions.
This button turns the air Keeping the system in recirculation
conditioning on and off. You will see mode, particularly with the A/C off,
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display. can cause the windows to fog up.
When you turn the A/C off, the Switch to recirculation mode when
system cannot regulate the inside driving through dusty or smoky
temperature if you set the conditions, then return to fresh air
temperature control below the mode.
outside temperature.
173
2008 MDX


Rear Window Defogger Button Airflow is divided between For your safety, make sure you have
This button turns the rear window the floor and corner vents and the a clear view through all the windows
defogger off and on (see page 122 ). defroster vents at the base of the before driving.
windshield.
Pushing this button also turns the When the indicator in the button is
power mirror heaters on and off. Windshield Defroster Button on, the front passengers and rear
This button directs the main airflow passenger compartment
Mode Control to the windshield for faster temperatures cannot be set
Use the mode control button to defrosting. It also overrides any separately from the drivers.
select the vents the air flows from. mode selection you may have made.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard vents in all modes. When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
Air flows from the center mode and turns on the A/C. For
and corner vents in the dashboard. faster defrosting, manually set the
fan speed to high. You can also
Airflow is divided between increase airflow to the windshield by
the vents in the dashboard and the closing the corner vents on the
floor vents. dashboard. To close the vents, rotate
the wheel under each corner vent.
Air flows from the floor
vents. When you turn off by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
174
2008 MDX


Rear Climate Controls

REAR CONTROL PANEL REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE
REAR PASSENGER FAN

COMPARTMENT CONTROL
TEMPERATURE BUTTONS
Features
CONTROL
BUTTONS
AUTO BUTTON MODE BUTTON

REAR BUTTON OFF BUTTON
Rear Button the rear temperature control buttons. You can use the rear control panel
When the indicator in this button is A passenger can also adjust the fan when the indicator in the REAR
off, the temperature of the rear speed and airflow. button on the front control panel is
passenger compartment is on. Pressing any control button on
synchronized to the drivers side set the rear control panel turns on the
temperature. If the AUTO mode is rear button indicator on the front
selected on the front control panel, control panel.
you will see the AUTO SYNC on the
rear system display. When the
indicator in this button is on, the
temperature of the rear passenger
compartment can be adjusted with CONTINUED
175
2008 MDX


Temperature Control Fan Control Automatic Operation

Press the temperature control Press the fan control button Pressing the AUTO button puts the
button to increase the temperature to increase the fan speed and airflow. system in automatic operation mode.
of airflow, and the button to Press the button to The rear system automatically
decrease it. The temperature you decrease it. The level of the fan adjusts the fan speed and airflow
adjust is shown in the system display. speed is shown in the display. levels to maintain the selected
temperature of the rear passenger
Mode Control compartment. You will see AUTO in
Each time you press the mode the display.
button, the mode display changes
from to . Pressing the OFF button shuts off
the rear climate control system.
When is selected, air flows
from the upper vents on the back of
the center console.
When is selected, air flows

from the lower vents.
176
2008 MDX


Triple Zone Temperature Control

The temperatures of the drivers side Drivers Side Passengers Side
and the front passengers side can be
controlled independently when the
indicator in the DUAL button is on.
When the indicator in the REAR

button is on, the temperature of the
Features
rear passenger compartment can be
controlled independently.
To adjust each temperature, press

either of the temperature control
buttons (or) on the climate
control panel.
Rear Passenger Compartment
CONTINUED
177
2008 MDX


Push AUTO or . The selected When the indicator in the REAR

temperatures appear in the display. button is off, the temperature of the
When the indicator in the DUAL rear passenger compartment is
button is off, you can adjust both synchronized to the drivers side set
sides to the same temperature by temperature. You will see the AUTO
adjusting the drivers temperature SYNC on the system display of the
control buttons. rear control panel.
To set the drivers side temperature To set the temperature of the rear
to a different value than the passenger compartment to a
passengers side, press the DUAL different value than the drivers side,
button, then press either of the press the REAR button, then press
drivers temperature control button either temperature control buttons
(or). To set the passengers side on the back of the center console.
to a different value than the drivers The word SYNC in the display
side, press either of the front goes out. You can also adjust the
passengers temperature control rear temperature without pressing
button (or). You can adjust the the REAR button first. Pressing
passengers side without pressing either button causes the indicator of
the DUAL button first. the REAR button to turn on.
When you set each temperature to

its lower limit or its upper limit, it will
be displayed as or .
178
2008 MDX


Sunlight and Temperature

Sensors
TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR
Features
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
To regulate the interior temperature

and humidity, the climate control
system has two sensors. A sunlight
sensor is located in the top of the
dashboard and a temperature/
humidity sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or, spill liquid or spray
chemical cleaners on the sensors.
179
2008 MDX


Audio System
An audio system is standard on all With navigation system With rear entertainment system
models. Read the appropriate pages
(as shown below) to use your
vehicles audio system.
For vehicles without navigation

system, see pages 181 through 199 .
For vehicles with navigation system,

see pages 200 through 227 .
Without navigation system
180
2008 MDX


Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Features
AUTO SELECT BUTTON SEEK BUTTONS
FM BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB TUNE KNOB
AM BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
181
2008 MDX


To Play the Radio To Select a Station SCAN The scan function samples
The ignition switch must be in the You can use any of five methods to all stations with strong signals on the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. find radio stations on the selected selected band. To activate it, press
Turn the system on by pushing the band: tune, seek, scan, the preset the SCAN button, then release it.
power/volume knob or the AM or buttons, and auto select. You will see SCAN in the display.
FM button. Adjust the volume by The system will scan for a station
turning the power/volume knob. TUNE Use the TUNE knob to with a strong signal. When it finds
tune the radio to a desired frequency. one, it will stop and play that station
The band and frequency that the Turn the knob right to tune to a for about 10 seconds.
radio was last tuned to are displayed. higher frequency, or left to tune to a
To change bands, press the AM or lower frequency. If you do nothing, the system will
FM button. On the FM band, ST will scan for the next strong station and
be displayed if the station is SEEK The SEEK function play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo searches up and down from the a station that you want to listen to,
reproduction in AM is not available. current frequency to find a station press the SCAN button again.
with a strong signal. To activate it,
On the AM band, AM noise press the or SEEK button, then
reduction turns on automatically. release it.
182
2008 MDX


Preset Each preset button can AUTO SELECT If you are To turn off auto select, press the
store one frequency on AM and two traveling far from home and can no A. SEL (auto select) button. This
frequencies on FM. longer receive your preset stations, restores the presets you originally
you can use the auto select feature to set.
1. Select the desired band, AM or find stations in the local area.
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store The presets may be lost if your
two frequencies with each preset Press the A. SEL button. A. SEL vehicles battery goes dead, is
button. flashes in the display, and the system disconnected, or the radio fuse is
Features
goes into scan mode for several removed.
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan seconds. It stores the frequencies of
function to tune the radio to a six AM and twelve FM stations in For information on AM/FM radio
desired station. the preset buttons. frequencies and reception, see page
205 .
3. Pick a preset button, and hold it You will see a 0 displayed after
until you hear a beep. pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a that preset button.
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM. If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
183
2008 MDX


Adjusting the Sound SVC Adjusts the volume level choose low. If you feel the sound is
Press the TUNE (SOUND) knob based on the vehicle speed. too quiet, choose high.
repeatedly to display the BASS,
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, Each mode is shown in the display as This function is set to MID as the
SUBWOOFER, and SVC (speed- it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to default setting when the vehicle
sensitive volume compensation) adjust the setting to your liking. leaves the factory.
settings. When the level reaches the center,
you will see C in the display. Audio System Lighting
BASS Adjusts the bass. You can use the instrument panel
The system will return to the audio brightness control buttons to adjust
TREBLE Adjusts the treble. display about 5 seconds after you the illumination of the audio system
stop adjusting a mode. (see page123 ). The audio system
FADER Adjusts the front-to-back illuminates when the parking lights
strength of the sound. Speed-sensitive Volume are on, even if the radio is off.
Compensation (SVC)
BALANCE Adjusts the side-to- The SVC mode controls the volume
side strength of the sound. based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
SUBWOOFER Adjusts the becomes. As you slow down, the
strength of sound from the audio volume decreases.
subwoofer speaker.
The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
CENTER Adjusts the strength of SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
sound from the center speaker. HIGH. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
184
2008 MDX


Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models without navigation system)
Features
XM RADIO BUTTON CATEGORY BUTTONS
SCAN BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB TUNE KNOB
DISP/MODE BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CONTINUED
185
2008 MDX


Your vehicle is capable of receiving button. The last channel you nothing wrong with your system.
XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the listened to will show in the display.
United States, except Hawaii and Adjust the volume by turning the TUNE Turn the TUNE knob to
Alaska. power/volume knob. change channel selections. Turn the
On Canadian models, you can also knob right for higher numbered
receive XM Satellite Radio in MODE To switch between channels and left for lower
Canada. channel mode and category mode, numbered channels. In the category
XM is a registered trademark of press and hold the DISP/MODE mode, you can only select channels
XM Satellite Radio, Inc. button until the mode changes. within that category.
XM satellite radio receives signals In the channel mode, you can select CATEGORY ( or ) Press
from two satellites to produce clear, all of the available channels. In the either button to select another
high-quality digital reception. It category mode, such as Jazz, Rock, category.
offers many channels in several Classical, etc., you can select all of
categories. Along with a large the channels within that category.
selection of different types of music,
XM satellite radio allows you to view Each time you press and release the
channel and category selections in DISP/MODE button, the display
the display. changes in the following sequence:
channel name, channel number,
Operating the Satellite Radio category, artist name, and music title.
To listen to XM satellite radio, turn
the ignition switch to the You may experience periods when
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. XM Radio does not transmit the
Push the power/volume knob to turn artists name and song title
on the audio system, and press the information. If this happens, there is
186
2008 MDX


SCAN The SCAN function gives 2. Use the TUNE knob, the The presets may be lost if your
you a sampling of all channels while CATEGORY buttons, or the vehicles battery goes dead, is
in the channel mode. In the category SCAN buttons to tune to a desired disconnected, or the radio fuse is
mode, only the stations within that channel. removed.
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The In category mode, only channels XM Radio Display Messages
system plays each channel in within that category can be selected.
numerical order for a few seconds, In channel mode, all channels can be LOADING XM is loading the
Features
then selects the next channel. When selected. audio or program information.
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the 3. Pick the preset button you want OFF AIR The channel
button again. for that channel. Press and hold currently selected is no longer
the button until you hear a beep. broadcasting.
Preset You can store up to 12
preset channels using the six preset 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the UPDATING The encryption
buttons. Each button stores one first six channels. code is being updated. Wait until the
channel from the XM1 band and one encryption code is fully updated.
channel from the XM2 band. 5. Press the XM button again. The Channels 0 and 1 should still work
other XM band will show. Store normally.
To store a channel: the next six channels using steps 2
1. Press the XM button. Either XM1 and 3.
or XM2 will show in the display.
Once a channel is stored, simply
press and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
CONTINUED
187
2008 MDX


NOSIGNAL The signal is

currently too weak. Move the vehicle Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in
to an area away from tall buildings, mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
these areas.
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
- - - - The selected channel

number does not exist, or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
SATELLITE
ANTENNA There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
GROUND REPEATER
The XM satellites are in orbit over Satellite signals are more likely to be
the equator; therefore, objects south blocked by tall buildings and
of the vehicle may cause satellite mountains the farther north you
reception interruptions. To help travel from the equator. Carrying
compensate for this, ground-based large items on a roof rack can also
repeaters are placed in major block the signal.
metropolitan areas.
188
2008 MDX


Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: your credit card number. To get your
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for knob until 0 appears in the display.
these conditions: compliance could void the users Your I.D. will appear in the display.
authority to operate the equipment.
Driving on the north side of an After youve registered with XM
east/west mountain road. Receiving Satellite Radio Service Radio, keep your audio system in the
Driving on the north side of a If your XM Radio service has expired Satellite Radio mode while you wait
Features
large commercial truck on an or you purchased your vehicle from for activation. This should take about
east/west road. a previous owner, you can listen to a 30 minutes.
Driving in tunnels. sampling of the broadcasts available
Driving on a road beside a vertical on XM Satellite Radio. With the While waiting for activation, make
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south ignition switch in the ACCESSORY sure your vehicle remains in an open
of you. (I) or the ON (II) position, push the area with good reception. Once your
Driving on the lower level of a power/volume knob to turn on the audio system is activated,
multi-tiered road. audio system, and press the CATEGORY or CH will appear in
Driving on a single lane road button. A variety of music the display, and youll be able to
alongside dense trees taller than types and styles will play. listen to XM Radio broadcasts. XM
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. Radio will continue to send an
Large items carried on a roof rack. If you decide to purchase XM activation signal to your vehicle for
satellite radio service, contact XM at least 12 hours from the activation
There may be other geographic Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at request. If the service has not been
situations that could affect XM radio 1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact activated after 36 hours, contact XM
reception. XM Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or at Radio.
1-877-438-9677. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
189
2008 MDX


Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
MP3/WMA INDICATOR TRACK/FILE NUMBER

FOLDER
NUMBER
DISC SLOT SEEK BUTTONS
DISC LOAD BUTTON DISC EJECT BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB TUNE (FOLDER) KNOB
PRESET BUTTONS
RANDOM BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON
190
2008 MDX


To Play a Disc This audio system can also play The specifications of the compatible
To load or play discs, the ignition CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in WMA file are:
switch must be in the ACCESSORY MP3 or WMA formats. When Sampling frequency:
(I) or ON (II) position. playing a disc in MP3, you will see 22.05/32/44.1/48 kHz
MP3 in the display. In WMA Bit rate:
You operate the disc changer with format, WMA will appear in the 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
the same controls used for the radio. display. The disc, folder and track Compatible with variable bit rate and
To select the disc changer, press the numbers are displayed. You can multi-session
Features
DISC button. You will see DISC in select up to 255 folders or tracks. Maximum layers
the display. The disc and track (including ROOT): 8 layers
numbers, and the elapsed time are Video CDs and DVD discs do not
shown in the display. You can also work in this unit.
select the displayed information with
the DISP button (see page 193 ). The The specifications of the compatible
system will continuously play a disc MP3 file are:
until you change modes. Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
(MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. 112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps
The label can curl up and cause the Compatible with variable bit rate and
disc to jam in the unit. multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
CONTINUED
191
2008 MDX


NOTE: Loading Discs You cannot load and play 3-inch

If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is Your vehicles in-dash disc changer (8-cm) discs in this unit.
protected by digital rights holds up to six discs.
management (DRM), the audio unit 4. When the disc load indicator turns
displays CD FORMAT, and then 1. Press the LOAD button until you green and LOAD appears in the
skips to the next file. hear a beep and see LOAD in display again, insert the next disc
the display. To load only one disc, in the slot. Do not try to insert a
press and release the LOAD disc until LOAD appears. You
button. could damage the audio unit.
2. The disc number for an empty 5. Repeat this until all six positions
position begins blinking. are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system begins
3. Insert the disc into the disc slot playing the last disc loaded.
when the green disc load indicator
comes on. Insert it only about You can also load a disc into an
halfway; the drive will pull it in the empty position while a disc is playing
rest of the way. You will see by pressing the appropriate preset
BUSY in the display while the button. The system stops playing the
disc load indicator turns red and current disc and starts the loading
blinks as the disc is loaded. sequence. It then plays the disc just
loaded.
192
2008 MDX


Text Data Display Function If the text data has more than 16 When you insert a disc, and the
Each time you press the DISP button, characters, you will see the first 15 system begins to play.
the display shows you the text data characters and the indicator in
on a disc, if the disc was recorded the display. Press and hold the DISP When playing a CD-DA with text
with text data. button until the next 16 characters data, the album and track name are
are shown. You can see up to about shown in the display. With a disc in
You can see the album, artist, and 31 characters of the text data. MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
track name in the display. If a disc is folder and file name.
Features
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can If you press and hold the DISP
see the folder and file name, and the button again, the display shows the When you turn on the audio system
album, artist, and track tag. first 16 characters again. next time, the system keeps your
selection with the DISP button.
With the folder name, you will see If any letter is not available, it is
the FOLDER indicator in the display. replaced with . (dot) in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with When the disc has no text data, you
the file or track name. will see NO INFO on the display.
When you press and release the You will also see some text data
DISP button while a disc without text under these conditions:
data is playing, you will see NO
INFO on the display. When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
The display shows up to about 16
characters of selected text data (the When you change the audio mode
folder name, file name, etc.). to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA. CONTINUED
193
2008 MDX


To Change or Select Tracks/Files track. REPEAT (Track Repeat) To

Use the seek buttons while a disc is continuously replay a track (file in
playing to select passages and To move rapidly within a track or file, MP3 or WMA mode), press and
change tracks (files in MP3 or WMA press and hold the or seek release the RPT button. You will see
mode). button. RPT in the display. Press and hold
the RPT button to turn it off.
In MP3 or WMA mode, use the In MP3 or WMA mode
TUNE knob to select folders in the FOLDER SELECTION To Pressing either seek button also
disc and use either seek button to select a different folder, turn the turns off the repeat feature.
change files. TUNE knob to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Turn
To select a different disc, use the the knob to the right until it clicks
appropriate preset buttons (1 once to skip to the next folder, and to
through 6). If you select an empty the left to move to the beginning of
position, the system will go into the the current folder. Turn it again to
loading sequence (see page 192 ). skip to the beginning of the previous
folder. Turning the TUNE knob
SEEK/SKIP Each time you more than two clicks skips several
press and release the seek button, folders.
the player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (file in
MP3 or WMA mode). Press and
release the seek button to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
194
2008 MDX


In MP3 or WMA mode Each time you press and release the In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER REPEAT This feature, RPT button, the mode changes from FOLDER RANDOM This
when activated, replays all the files file repeat to folder repeat, to disc feature, when activated, plays the
on the selected folder in the order repeat then to normal playing. files within a current folder in
they are compressed in MP3 or random order, rather than in the
WMA. To activate folder repeat RANDOM (Random within a order they are compressed in MP3
mode, press and release the RPT disc) This feature plays the or WMA. To activate folder random
button repeatedly until you see tracks within a disc (the files in MP3 play, press and release the RDM
Features
F-RPT in the display. The system or WMA mode) in random order. To button repeatedly. You will see
continuously replays the current activate random play, press and F-RDM in the display. The system
folder. Press and hold the RPT release the RDM button. In MP3 or will then select and play files
button to turn it off. Pressing the WMA mode, press the RDM button randomly. This continues until you
RDM button, or selecting a different repeatedly to select RDM (within a deactivate folder random play by
folder with the TUNE knob also disc random play). You will see RDM pressing and holding the RDM
turns off the repeat feature. in the display. Press the RDM button button again, or you select a
for 2 seconds to return to normal different folder with the TUNE knob.
DISC REPEAT This feature play.
continuously replays the current disc. Each time you press and release the
To active disc repeat, press and RDM button, the mode changes
release the RPT button repeatedly from folder random play, to within a
until you see D-RPT in the display. disc random play, then to normal
Press and hold the RPT button again play.
to turn it off.
195
2008 MDX


SCAN The SCAN function In MP3 or WMA mode Pressing either seek button, or
samples all the tracks on the disc in F-SCAN This feature, when selecting a different disc (using the
the order they are recorded on the activated, samples the first file in preset buttons) or folder (using the
disc (all files in the selected folder in each folder on the disc in the order TUNE knob) turns off the SCAN or
MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the they are recorded. To activate the F-SCAN feature.
scan feature, press and release the folder scan feature, press and
SCAN button. You will see SCAN in release the SCAN button repeatedly.
the display. You will get a 10 second You will see F-SCAN in the display.
sampling of each track/file in the The system will then play the first
disc/folder. Press and hold the file in the main folders for about 10
SCAN button to get out of scan seconds. If you do nothing, the
mode and play the last track sampled. system will then play the following
first files for 10 seconds each. When
it plays a file that you want to
continue listening to, press and hold
the SCAN button.
196
2008 MDX


D-SCAN This feature, when When the first track in the last disc, To Stop Playing a Disc
activated, samples the first track in or the first file in the last main folder Press the eject button ( ) to
each disc in order (the first file in in the last disc begins to play, the remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
the main folder on each disc in MP3 disc scan mode will be canceled. but do not remove it from the slot,
or WMA mode). To activate the disc Pressing either seek button or the system will automatically reload
scan feature, press and release the selecting a different folder with the the disc after 10 seconds. To begin
SCAN button repeatedly until TUNE knob also turns off the scan playing, press the DISC button.
D-SCAN shows in the display. The feature.
Features
system will then play the first track/ You can also eject the disc when the
file in the first main folder in the first Each time you press and release the ignition switch is off.
disc for about 10 seconds. If you do SCAN button, the mode changes
nothing, the system will then play from scan, disc scan, then to normal To play the radio when a disc is
the following first tracks/files for 10 playing. playing, press the AM or FM button.
seconds each. When it plays a track/ Press the DISC button again to
file that you want to continue In MP3 or WMA mode switch back to the disc changer.
listening to, press and hold the Each time you press and release the
SCAN button again. SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan, folder scan, disc scan,
then to normal playing.
CONTINUED
197
2008 MDX


If you turn the system off while a To remove a different disc from the
disc is playing, either with the changer, first select it with the
power/volume knob or by turning appropriate preset button. When that
off the ignition switch, the disc will disc begins playing, press the eject
stay in the drive. When you turn the button. Continue pressing the eject
system back on, the disc will begin button to remove all the discs from
playing where it left off. the changer.
Removing Discs from the In-dash You can also eject discs when the
Disc Changer ignition switch is off. The disc that
To remove the disc currently in play, was last selected is ejected first.
press the eject button. When a disc is
removed from a slot, the system Protecting Discs
automatically begins the load For information on how to handle
sequence so you can load another and protect compact discs, see page
disc in that position. If you do not 229 .
remove the disc from the changer
within 10 seconds, the disc will
reload into the slot. Then the system
returns to the previous mode (AM,
FM, or XM).
198
2008 MDX


Disc Changer Error Message (Models without navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the

error messages you may see in the Error Massage Cause Solution
display while playing a disc.
HEAT ERROR High temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
If you see an error message in the normal.
display while playing a disc, press FORMAT Track/File format not Current track will be skipped. The next
the eject button. After ejecting the supported supported track or file plays automatically.
disc, check it for damage or BAD DISC Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
Features
deformation. If there is no damage, PLEASE CHECK Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
insert the disc again. OWNERS Mechanical Error deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
MANUAL PUSH (see page 230). Insert the disc again. If the code
For the additional information on EJECT does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
damaged discs, see page 230 . BAD DISC removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
PLEASE CHECK Servo Error force the disc out of the player.
The audio system will try to play the OWNERS
disc. If there is still a problem, the MANUAL
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
199
2008 MDX


Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Interface Dial The knob turns left and right. Use it Personalization Setting
On models with navigation system to make selections or adjustments to When you unlock the doors with
Most audio system functions can still a list or menu on the screen. your remote and turn the audio
be controlled by standard buttons, system on, the drivers ID (Driver 1
dials, and knobs, but some functions The selector can be pushed left, or Driver 2) is detected, and the
can only be accessed using the right, up, down, and in. Use the radio presets and sound level
interface dial. The interface dial has selector to scroll through lists, to settings (see page 207 ) are turned to
two parts, a knob and a selector. select menus, and to highlight menu the respective memorized mode
items. When you make a selection, automatically.
KNOB ENTER push the center of the selector
(ENTER) to go to that selection. Voice Control System
The audio system can also be
operated by voice control. See the
Navi section in your quick start
guide for an overview of this system,
and the navigation system manual
for complete details.
SELECTOR
200
2008 MDX


Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Without rear entertainment system With rear entertainment system
AUDIO DISPLAY AUDIO DISPLAY

AUTO SELECT
BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS
Features
AUTO
SCAN SELECT
BUTTON SCAN
BUTTON BUTTON
SEEK SEEK
BUTTONS AM/FM
AM/FM BUTTON BUTTONS
BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
POWER/ POWER/ TUNE KNOB

VOLUME PRESET VOLUME
KNOB BUTTONS KNOB
AUDIO
AUDIO BUTTON
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
INTERFACE DIAL
201
2008 MDX


The band and frequency that the

STEREO ICON BAND
radio was last tuned to are shown on
the display. To change bands, press
the AM/FM button. You can also
change bands by pushing the
interface selector up. Each time you
push it up, the band will change to
FM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM bands,
STEREO will be shown on the
navigation screen and ST on the
audio display, if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo TUNE ICON
reproduction on AM is not available.
To Play the AM/FM Radio TUNE Use the TUNE knob to
The ignition switch must be in the To Select a Station tune the radio to a desired frequency.
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) You can use any of five methods to Turn the knob right to tune to a
position. Press the AUDIO button to find radio stations on the selected higher frequency, or left to tune to a
view the audio control display. Turn band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the lower frequency. To tune with the
the system on by pressing the preset buttons, and AUTO SELECT . interface dial, push the selector
power/volume knob or the AM/FM down, and turn the knob to TUNE.
button. Adjust the volume by turning Then press ENTER on the selector,
the power/volume knob. and turn the knob to the desired
frequency. To exit the TUNE mode,
press ENTER on the selector.
202
2008 MDX


SEEK The SEEK function To scan with the interface dial, push
searches up and down from the SCAN ICON the selector down, and then push it
current frequency to find a station to the right. You will see SCAN
with a strong signal. To activate it, flashing on the screen.
press the or SEEK button, then
release it. You can also activate The system will scan for a station
SEEK by pushing the interface with a strong signal. When it finds
selector to the right or left. one, it will stop and play that station
Features
for about 10 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play it
for 10 seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to listen to,
SCAN The SCAN function press the scan button again, or push
samples all stations with strong the interface selector to the right
signals on the selected band. To again.
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it.
CONTINUED
203
2008 MDX


Preset Each preset button or You can also press the A.SEL button.
preset icon can store one frequency AUTO SEL ICON You will see AUTO SEL on the
on AM and two frequencies on FM. screen, and the system goes into
scan mode for several seconds. The
To store a preset memory location: system stores the frequencies of six
1. Select the desired band, AM or AM and twelve FM stations in the
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store preset buttons.
two sets of FM frequencies with
the preset buttons (on-screen You will see 0 displayed if auto
icons). select cannot find a strong station for
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan every preset button.
function to tune the radio to a If you do not like the stations auto
desired station. select has stored, you can store
3. Press the preset button, and hold AUTO SELECT If you are other frequencies on the preset
it until you hear a beep. You can traveling far from home and can no buttons (icons) as previously
also store frequencies with the longer receive your preset stations, described.
interface dial. Select the preset you can use the auto select feature to
icon you want to store the find stations in the local area. To turn off auto select, press
frequency on, then press ENTER ENTER on the interface selector or
on the interface selector, and hold Push the interface selector down to press the A.SEL button again. This
it for more than 2 seconds. scroll down the screen, highlight restores the presets you originally
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a A.SEL, then press ENTER on the set.
total of six stations on AM and interface selector. You will see
twelve stations on FM. AUTO SEL on the screen, and the
system goes into scan mode for
several seconds.
204
2008 MDX


AM/FM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these frequen- as the distance from the stations
cies: transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz A radio stations signal gets weaker
Features
as you get farther away from its
Radio stations on the AM band are transmitter. If you are listening to an
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz AM station, you will notice the sound
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the volume becoming weaker, and the
FM band are assigned frequencies at station drifting in and out. If you are
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). listening to an FM station, you will Driving very near the transmitter of
see the stereo indicator flickering off a station that is broadcasting on a
Stations must use these exact and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of
frequencies. It is fairly common for Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can
stations to round-off the frequency in go off and the sound will fade also affect your radios reception.
their advertising, so your radio could completely as you get out of range of You may temporarily hear both
display a frequency of 100.9 even the stations signal. stations, or hear only the station you
though the announcer may identify are close to.
the station as FM101.
205
2008 MDX


AM/FM Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:

approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the users
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by

band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the stations transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving. Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
206
2008 MDX


Adjusting the Sound

BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and
FADER are each adjustable. You can
also adjust the strength of the sound
coming from the center and
subwoofer speakers. In addition, you
can set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) II
and Speed-sensitive volume
Features
compensation (SVC).
These adjustments can be made by

SOUND ICON
the SOUND button or the interface
dial.
To adjust them, press the AUDIO Select the mode you want to adjust
button, push the interface selector by turning the interface dial.
down, and turn the interface knob to
SOUND. Then press ENTER on the You can also adjust the sound by
selector. pushing the SOUND button
repeatedly. Each mode is shown in
the audio display as it changes. Turn
the TUNE knob to adjust the setting
to your liking.
CONTINUED
207
2008 MDX


BASS/TREBLE To adjust bass FADER/BALANCE These CENTER/SUBWOOFER To

and treble, select BASS or TREBLE, modes adjust the strength of the adjust the strength of the sound
and press ENTER on the interface sound coming from each speaker. from the center or subwoofer
selector. The current setting is Fader adjusts the front-to-back speaker, select it and press ENTER
shown on the display. Turn the strength, while balance adjusts the on the interface selector. Turn the
interface knob to the desired level, side-to-side strength. To adjust fader interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing and balance, select FADER or and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector. BALANCE, then press ENTER on ENTER on the interface selector.
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. To equalize the fader or
balance, turn the interface knob until
the marks on the sound grid come to
the center of the adjustment bar.
208
2008 MDX


Dolby PL (ProLogic) II Dolby To set this feature on or off, select Speed-sensitive Volume
PL (ProLogic) II signal processing Dolby PL II, and press ENTER on Compensation (SVC)
creates multi-channel surround the interface selector. Rotate the The SVC mode controls the volume
sound from 2 channel stereo audio interface dial to ON or OFF, and based on vehicle speed. The faster
sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only press ENTER. you go, the louder the audio volume
activate when listening to DISC (CD- becomes. As you slow down, the
DA, MP3/WMA), XM radio, and Manufactured under license from audio volume decreases.
AUX. When ProLogic II is active, Dolby Laboratories. Dolby,
Features
PL II is shown in the audio display. ProLogic, and the double-D symbol The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
are trademarks of Dolby SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
ProLogic ON/OFF settings are Laboratories. HIGH. The default setting is MID.
independently controlled for DISC, To change the SVC mode, select
XM and AUX sources. SVC, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
selector. If you feel the sound is too
loud, choose low. If you feel the
sound is too quiet, choose high.
209
2008 MDX


Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
AUDIO DISPLAY AUDIO DISPLAY

CATEGORY BUTTONS
PRESET BUTTONS
XM SCAN
BUTTON BUTTON CATEGORY
SCAN BUTTONS
BUTTON
TUNE TUNE KNOB
POWER/ KNOB POWER/
VOLUME VOLUME
KNOB KNOB DISPLAY/
DISPLAY/
MODE XM MODE
PRESET BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
BUTTONS
AUDIO
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL INTERFACE DIAL
210
2008 MDX


Your vehicle is capable of receiving Operating the XM Radio Push the AUDIO button to display
XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the XM information on the screen. You
United States, and Canada, except can operate the XM Satellite Radio
Hawaii and Alaska. XM is a system with the interface dial.
registered trade mark of XM
Satellite Radio, Inc.
XM Satellite Radio receives signals
Features
from two satellites to produce clear,
high-quality digital reception. It
offers many channels in several
categories. Along with a large
selection of different types of music,
XM Satellite Radio also allows you to
view channel and category selections To listen to XM satellite radio, turn
in the audio display. the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Push the power/volume knob to turn
on the audio system, and press the
button. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
Adjust the volume by turning the
power/volume knob.
CONTINUED
211
2008 MDX


MODE To switch between the In the category mode, such as Jazz, TUNE Turn the TUNE knob to
category mode and channel mode, Rock, Classical, etc., you can change channel selections. Turn the
press and hold the DISP/MODE navigate through all of the channels knob right for higher numbered
button until the mode changes. The within that category. In the channel channels and left for lower
CATEGORY or CHANNEL mode is mode, you can select all of the numbered channels. You can also
displayed on the screen. To switch available channels. change channels with the interface
the mode with the interface dial, selector, push down the interface
scroll down, select MODE, and press Each time you press and release the selector to choose TUNE and press
ENTER on the selector. DISP/MODE button, the audio ENTER on the selector. Turn the
display changes in the following interface knob to the same directions.
sequence: channel name, channel In the category mode, you can only
number, category, artist name, and select channels within that category.
music title.
On the screen, you will see the

selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
212
2008 MDX


CATEGORY ( or ) Press SCAN The scan function gives The system plays each channel in
either button to select another you a sampling of all channels while numerical order for a few seconds,
category. You can also change a in the channel mode. In the category then selects the next channel. When
category by pushing the interface mode, only the channels within that you hear a channel you want to
selector left or right. category are scanned. To activate continue listening to, push the
SCAN, press the SCAN button. To interface selector to the right again
scan with the interface dial, scroll or press the SCAN button to cancel.
down, and push interface selector to
Features
the right. You will see SCAN on the
screen and audio display.
CONTINUED
213
2008 MDX


2. Use the tune or scan function to 5. Press the button or scroll

tune to a desired channel. up again. The other XM band will
XM BAND be shown. Store the next six
In category mode, only channels channels using steps 2 and 3.
within that category can be
selected. In channel mode, all Once a channel is stored, press
channels can be selected. and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
3. Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the preset button until you hear a
beep. You can also pick the
number with the interface dial.
Select your desired number and
Preset You can store up to 12 press and hold ENTER on the
preset channels using the six preset interface selector.
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
channel from the XM2 band. first six channels.
To store a channel:
1. Press the button or scroll
up by pushing the interface
selector up. Either XM1 or XM2
will be shown on the display.
214
2008 MDX


XM Radio Display Messages NOSIGNAL The signal is

currently too
LOADING XM is loading the weak. Move the
audio or program vehicle to an area
information. away from tall
buildings, and
OFF AIR The channel with an
currently selected is unobstructed view
Features
no longer of the southern
broadcasting. horizon.
UPDATING The encryption - - - - The selected channel

code is being number does not exist, or
updated. Wait is not part of your
until the subscription, or this
encryption code is channel has no artist or
fully updated. title information at this
Channels 0 and 1 time.
should still work
normally. ANTENNA There is a problem
with the XM
antenna. Please
consult your dealer.
CONTINUED
215
2008 MDX


The XM satellites are in orbit over

Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in
the equator; therefore, objects south
mountains or large obstacles to these areas. of the vehicle may cause satellite
the south. reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
216
2008 MDX


Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: them your radio I.D. number and
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly your credit card number. To get your
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
these conditions: compliance could void the users knob until 0 appears in the display.
authority to operate the equipment. Your I.D. will appear in the display.
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road. Receiving XM Satellite Radio After youve registered with XM
Driving on the north side of a Service Radio, keep your audio system in the
Features
large commercial truck on an If your XM Radio service has expired Satellite Radio mode while you wait
east/west road. or you purchased your vehicle from for activation. This should take about
Driving in tunnels. a previous owner, you can listen to a 30 minutes.
Driving on a road beside a vertical sampling of the broadcasts available
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south on XM Satellite Radio. With the While waiting for activation, make
of you. ignition switch in the ACCESSORY sure your vehicle remains in an open
Driving on the lower level of a (I) or the ON (II) position, push the area with good reception. Once your
multi-tiered road. power/volume knob to turn on the audio system is activated, category
Driving on a single lane road audio system, and press the or CH will appear in the display,
alongside dense trees taller than button. A variety of music and youll be able to listen to XM
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. types and styles will play. Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
continue to send an activation signal
There may be other geographic If you decide to purchase XM to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
situations that could affect satellite satellite radio service, contact XM from the activation request. If the
radio reception. Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at service has not been activated after
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact 36 hours, contact XM Radio.
XM Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or at
1-877-438-9677. You will need to give CONTINUED
217
2008 MDX


Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
AUDIO DISPLAY
REPEAT BUTTON AUDIO DISPLAY
RANDOM BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
SEEK BUTTONS
SCAN SCAN RANDOM

BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
LOAD EJECT LOAD SEEK
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON BUTTONS
POWER/ POWER/ EJECT
VOLUME FOLDER VOLUME BUTTON
KNOB KNOB KNOB
DISC BUTTON DISPLAY/ REPEAT FOLDER
MODE BUTTON KNOB
PRESET BUTTON
BUTTONS DISC BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL INTERFACE DIAL DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON
218
2008 MDX


Your vehicles audio system has an The changer can also play MP3 or
in-dash disc changer with the same WMA format (see page 224 ).
controls used for the radio. To
operate the disc changer, the ignition DVD-A discs not meeting DVD
switch must be in the ACCESSORY verification standards may not be
(I) or the ON (II) position. playable.
The disc changer can play these disc The changer cannot play DVD-V
Features
formats: format.
CD (CD-DA)
CD-R/RW Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed
DVD-A discs are not playable.
DVD-R/RW
MP3/WMA DTS and DTS Digital Surround
are registered trademarks of Digital
The disc packages or jackets should Theater Systems, Inc.
have one of these marks.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.

The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
219
2008 MDX


Loading Discs in the Changer 4. Repeat this until all six positions You can select the position to load a
To load multiple discs in one are loaded. If you are not loading disc. Turn the interface knob or
operation: all six positions, the system will press a preset button to select the
then begin playing the last disc position, then press ENTER on the
1. With the ignition in the loaded. selector. This starts the loading
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) sequence. If you do not select the
position, press and hold the LOAD If you stop loading discs before all position, the system loads the disc to
button until you hear a beep and six positions are filled, the system the first empty position in numerical
see LOAD in the upper display, will wait for 10 seconds, stop the load order.
then release the button. operation, and begin playing the last
disc loaded. If you press the LOAD button while
2. Insert a disc into the slot. Insert it a disc is playing, the system will stop
only about halfway; the drive will To load a single disc: playing that disc and start the
pull it in the rest of the way. You 1. Press and release the LOAD loading sequence. It will then play
will see BUSY in audio display. button. the disc just loaded.
When you insert the first disc, the
changer will start to play the disc. 2. NO DISC is shown on the screen
for an empty position in the
3. When LOAD appears in the changer. When the green load
audio display again, insert the next indicator comes on and you see
disc into the slot. the LOAD in the audio display,
Do not try to insert a disc until insert the disc into the slot. Insert
LOAD appears. You could it only about halfway; the drive will
damage the audio unit. pull it in the rest of the way.
220
2008 MDX


To Play a Disc The player can play CD-TEXT, MP3, If the disc does not carry album,
and WMA formats. track, or artist name, pressing the
DISP button changes the display
When you play CD-TEXT, you will from normal display to NO INFO.
see the track name, artist name, and
album name on the screen. When To Change Tracks
you play MP3/WMA discs, you will Each time you press and release the
see the track name and folder name SEEK () button or push the
Features
on the screen. If the disc was not interface selector to the right, the
recorded with this information, it will player skips forward to the
not be displayed. beginning of the next track. Press
and release the SEEK () button or
CURRENT DISC Each time you press the DISP button, push the interface selector to the left
the audio display changes from to skip backward to the beginning of
Select the changer by pressing the album name, to track name, to artist the current track. Press the SEEK
DISC button. The system will begin name, and then to normal display () button or push the interface
playing the last selected disc in the that shows the track number and the selector to the left again to skip to
disc changer. You will see the current time. When playing a disc in the previous track. To move rapidly
current disc position highlighted. MP3/WMA, the display mode within a track, press and hold the
changes from folder name, to file SEEK () or SEEK () button.
To select a different disc, press the name, to artist tag, to album tag, to
corresponding number on the preset track tag, and then to normal display.
buttons, or turn the interface knob to
highlight the desired disc, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
221
2008 MDX


To Choose a Track To exit the track list display, press Disc Scan
the AUDIO button, or push the When you press the SCAN button
interface selector to the left. repeatedly until you see D-SCAN in
the audio display, or push down the
Track Scan interface selector to the right, the
When you press the SCAN button or first track of the current disc plays
scroll down and push the interface for about 10 seconds. You will see
selector to the left, the next track of SCAN next to DISC on the screen
the current track plays for about 10 and D-SCAN in the audio display. To
seconds. You will see SCAN next to listen to the rest of the disc, press
TRACK on the screen and audio and hold the SCAN button until you
display. To listen to the rest of the hear a beep, or push down the
CURRENT TRACK track, press and hold the SCAN interface selector to the right again
button until you hear a beep or push within 10 seconds.
You can also choose a track directly the interface selector to the left
from a track list. Press ENTER on again within 10 seconds. If you dont, the system advances to
the interface selector, and the track the next disc, plays about 10 seconds
list screen will be shown. If there are If you dont, the system advances to of its first track, and continues
no track names, track numbers are the next track, plays about 10 through the rest of the discs the
displayed. You will see the current seconds of it, and continues through same way. When the system reaches
track is highlighted. Turn the the rest of the tracks the same way. the last disc, DISC SCAN is canceled,
interface knob to select the desired and that disc continues to play.
track, then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
222
2008 MDX


Track Repeat Disc Repeat Random Play

To replay the current track To replay the current disc To play the tracks of the current disc
continuously, press and release the continuously, press the RPT button in random order, press and release
RPT button, or use the interface repeatedly until you see D-RPT in the RDM button, or use the interface
selector to scroll down, select the audio display, or use the selector to scroll down, select
TRACK REPEAT, and press ENTER interface selector to scroll down, TRACK RANDOM, and press
on the interface selector. As a select DISC REPEAT, and press ENTER on the interface selector. As
reminder, you will see REPEAT next ENTER on the interface selector. As a reminder, you will see RANDOM
Features
to TRACK on the screen and RPT in a reminder, you will see REPEAT next to TRACK on the screen and
the audio display. To turn this next to DISC on the screen and RDM in the audio display. To turn
feature off, press and hold the RPT D-RPT in the audio display. To turn this feature off, press and hold the
button until you hear a beep, or this feature off, press and hold the RDM button until you hear a beep,
highlight TRACK REPEAT (if not RPT button until you hear a beep, or or highlight TRACK RANDOM (if
already highlighted), and press highlight DISC REPEAT (if not not already highlighted), and press
ENTER on the interface selector already highlighted), and press ENTER on the interface selector
again. ENTER on the interface selector again.
again.
223
2008 MDX


To Pause a Disc Playing a DVD-A Disc The specifications of the compatible

To pause a disc, press the preset Use the disc controls previously WMA file are:
button which corresponds to the described. Sampling frequency: 22.05/32/44.1/
current disc. To play the disc again, 48 kHz
press the preset button again. Playing an MP3/WMA Disc Bit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192
The changer plays MP3/WMA files kbps
To Stop Playing a Disc in recorded order. Each disc can Compatible with variable bit rate and
To take the system out of disc mode, hold up to 400 playable files within 8 multi-session
press the AM/FM button the folder layers. When playing MP3
button, or the AUX button. discs, a disc can support a maximum To play an MP3/WMA disc, use the
To return to disc mode, press the number of 100 folders, and each disc controls previously described,
DISC button. folder can hold 255 playable files. along with the following information.
If you turn the system off while a The specifications of the compatible
disc is playing, either with the MP3 file are:
power/volume knob or the ignition Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
switch, play will continue at the same (MPEG1)
point when you turn it back on. 16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps
Compatible with variable bit rate and
multi-session
224
2008 MDX


Changing the Folders Changing and Selecting the Folders/

While playing an MP3/WMA disc, Files
you can select a folder within the
disc by turning the TUNE knob.
Each time you rotate the knob, the
folder title and its first files
information appear in the audio
display in recorded order.
Features
If you use the interface selector, you Repeat the procedure to go into a
can see the list of all the files and lower folder. If you highlight a file
folders within a disc. While playing a and press ENTER, the system starts
MP3/WMA disc, press the AUDIO to play your selected file.
button. The currently playing folder
and file information comes on the
screen. Turn the selector knob,
highlight the folder you want to see
the information within, and press
ENTER.
225
2008 MDX


Folder Scan Folder Repeat Folder Random

This feature, when activated, This feature, when activated, replays This feature, when activated, plays in
samples the first file of each folder all files on the selected folder. To the current folder in random order.
for 10 seconds. To scan a folder, activate folder repeat mode, press To activate folder random play, press
press the SCAN button repeatedly and hold the RPT button repeatedly the RDM button twice, or use the
until you see F-SCAN in the audio until you see F-RPT in the audio interface selector to scroll down,
display. You will see SCAN next to display, or use the interface selector select FOLDER RANDOM by
FOLDER and F-SCAN in the audio to scroll down, select FOLDER interface knob, and press ENTER on
display. REPEAT by interface knob, and the interface selector. You will see
press ENTER on the interface RANDOM next to FOLDER on the
To listen to the rest of the folder, selector. You will see REPEAT next screen and F-RDM in the audio
press and hold the SCAN button to FOLDER on the screen and display. To turn this feature off,
until you hear a beep. If you do not, F-RPT in the audio display. To turn press and hold the RDM button until
the system advances to the next this feature off, press and hold the you hear a beep, or highlight
folder, plays 10 seconds of it, and PRT button until you hear a beep, or FOLDER RANDOM (if not already
continues throughout the rest of the highlight FOLDER REPEAT (if not highlighted), and press ENTER on
folder same way. When the system already highlighted), and press the interface selector again.
samples the first file of all folders, ENTER on the interface selector
folder scan is canceled, and the last again.
file played comes back.
226
2008 MDX


Removing Discs from the To remove a different disc from the

Changer changer, first select it by pressing
To remove the disc that is currently the corresponding number on the
playing, press the eject button. You preset button or turning the
will see EJECT in the audio display. interface knob, and pressing ENTER
When you remove the disc from the on the interface selector. When that
slot, the system automatically enters disc begins playing, press the eject
the previous mode AM, FM1, FM2, button.
Features
or XM Satellite Radio. The system
also begins the load sequence so you When you press the eject button
can load another disc. If you do not while listening to the radio, or with
load another disc, the load sequence the audio system turned off, the disc
is canceled, and the system that was last selected is ejected.
continues playing in the previous After that disc is ejected, pressing
mode. the eject button again will eject the
next disc in numerical order. By
If you do not remove the disc from doing this six times, you can remove
the slot, the system will reload the all the discs from the changer.
disc after 10 seconds. To begin
playing the disc, press the disc You can also eject discs when the
button. ignition switch is off:
To eject one disc, press and release
the eject button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button.
227
2008 MDX


Disc Changer Error Messages
The chart on the right explains the

error messages you may see in the Error Message Cause Solution
display while playing a disc.
HEAT ERROR High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
If you see an error message in the normal.
display while playing a disc, press FORMAT Track/File format not Current track will be skipped. The next
the eject button. After ejecting the supported supported track or file plays automatically.
disc, check it for damage or BAD DISC Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
deformation. If there is no damage, PLEASE CHECK Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
insert the disc again. OWNERS Mechanical Error deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
MANUAL PUSH (see page 228). Insert the disc again. If the code
For the additional information on EJECT does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
damaged discs, see page 228 . BAD DISC removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
PLEASE CHECK Servo Error force the disc out of the player.
The audio system will try to play the OWNERS
disc. If there is still a problem, the MANUAL
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
228
2008 MDX


Protecting Your Discs
General Information Protecting Discs

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, When a disc is not being played,
use only high quality discs labeled store it in its case to protect it from
for audio use. dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
When recording a CD-R or direct sunlight and extreme heat.
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the disc To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Features
changer. Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
Play only standard, round, 5-inch
(12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd- A new disc may be rough on the
shaped discs may jam in the drive inner and outer edges. The small
or cause other problems. plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a disc by its edges; never
can flake off and fall on the touch either surface. Do not place
Handle your discs properly to recording surface of the disc, stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
prevent damage and skipping. causing skipping or other problems. These, along with contamination
Remove these pieces by rubbing the from finger prints, liquids, and felt-
inner and outer edges with the side tip pens, can cause the disc to not
of a pencil or pen. play properly, or possibly jam in the
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. drive.
The label can curl up and cause the Never try to insert foreign objects in
disc to jam in the unit. the disc changer.
229
2008 MDX


Additional Information of 1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs

Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown Bubbled/ With Label/

Sticker
Using Printer
Label Kit
Sealed With Plastic
Ring
Wrinkled
to the right:
2. Damaged discs 3. Poor quality discs
Chipped/ Warped Burrs

Cracked
230
2008 MDX


4. Small, irregular shaped discs 5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo. For the
rear entertainment system, see
page 264 .
Features
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape
Fingerprints, scratches, etc. Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the

discs may cause the sound to skip.
This audio unit cannot play a Dual-

Can Shape Arrow Shape disc .
231
2008 MDX


Auxiliary Input Jack
All models except U.S. Entertainment U.S. Entertainment Package and

Package and Canadian Elite Package Canadian Elite Package models
models
Auxiliary input jacks and headphone

The auxiliary input jack is inside the connectors for the rear
front console compartment. The entertainment system are on the
system will accept auxiliary input back of the center console
from standard audio accessories. compartment.
When a compatible audio unit is For more information, see page 267 .
connected to the jack, press the AUX
button to select it.
232
2008 MDX


Remote Audio Controls
The VOL button adjusts the volume If you are playing a disc, the system
up () or down (). Press the top skips to the beginning of the next
or bottom of the button, hold it until track each time you press the top
the desired volume is reached, then () of the CH button. Press the
MODE
BUTTON release it. bottom () to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
The MODE button changes the it again to return to the previous
CH
mode. Pressing the button track. You will see the disc and track
Features
BUTTON
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, numbers in the upper display.
DISC (if a disc is loaded), DVD video
(if equipped), XM1, XM2, or AUX. To go to the next disc, press the top
VOL BUTTON () of the button. Press the bottom
If you are listening to the radio, use () to go back to the previous disc.
Three controls for the audio system the CH button to change stations. When you play an MP3/WMA disc,
are mounted in the steering wheel Each time you press the top () of press the top () of the button for 1
hub. These let you control basic the button, the system goes to the second to go to the next folder. Press
functions without removing your next preset station on the band you the bottom () for 1 second to go
hand from the wheel. are listening to. Press the bottom back to the previous folder.
() to go back to the previous
station.
To search up and down from the

current frequency and find a station
with a strong signal, press the top
() or bottom () of the button for
1 second. CONTINUED
233
2008 MDX


Remote Audio Controls
If you are listening to XM Satellite If you are playing a DVD video, use
Radio, use the CH button to change the channel button to change
channels. Each time you press the chapters. Each time you press the
top () of the button, the system top () of the button, the system
goes to the next preset channel. goes to the next chapter. Press the
Press the bottom () to go back to bottom () to return to the
the previous preset channel. beginning of the current chapter.
To go to the next channel of the Press it again to return to the
category you are listening to, press previous chapter.
the top () of the button for 1
second. Press the bottom () for 1
second to go back to the previous
channel.
234
2008 MDX


Radio Theft Protection
Your vehicles audio system may If your vehicles battery is discon- The system will retain your AM and
disable itself if it is disconnected nected or goes dead, or the radio FM presets even if power is
from electrical power for any reason. fuse is removed, the audio system disconnected.
To make it work again, you must will disable itself. If this happens,
enter a specific five-digit code with you will see in the audio
the preset buttons. Because there display the next time you turn on the
are hundreds of number system. Use the preset buttons to
combinations possible from the five enter the five-digit code. The code is
Features
digits, making the system work located on the radio code card
without knowing the exact code is included in your owners manual kit.
nearly impossible. When it is entered correctly, the
radio will start playing.
You should have received a card that
lists your audio system code number If you make a mistake entering the
and serial number. It is best to store code, do not start over; complete the
this card in a safe place at home. In five-digit sequence, then enter the
addition, you should write the audio correct code. You have 10 tries to
systems serial number in this owners enter the correct code. If you are
manual. unsuccessful in 10 attempts, you
must then leave the system on for 1
If you lose the card, you must obtain hour before trying again.
the code number from your dealer.
To do this, you will need the audio
systems serial number.
235
2008 MDX


Setting the Clock and Calendar
4. After you set the day information,

pressing the SET button again will
cancel this setting mode and the
system shows the adjusted display.
The system will also automatically

return to the normal display about 10
seconds after you stop adjusting a
mode.
On models with navigation system

U.S. model is shown : Press SET The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
On models without navigation system 2. Press and release the SET button system (GPS), and the displayed
You can see the clock and calendar repeatedly. The mode switches time is updated automatically by the
information on the upper display. from hours, minutes, AM/PM, GPS. Refer to the navigation system
year, month, then to day as shown manual for how to adjust the time.
To set the clock and the calendar: above.
1. Press and hold the SET button
until the clock display begins to 3. Select the desired mode by
blink. pressing the SET button, then
press either or button to
change the setting.
236
2008 MDX


Rear Entertainment System
Available on U.S. Entertainment To Turn On the System you will see DVD EJECT in the
Package and Canadian Elite Package Press the REAR PWR button. The display. You should select another
models indicator on the REAR PWR button source or insert a DVD.
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear will come on, as well as the indicator
entertainment system that includes a on the FRONT SOURCE button. Rear Speakers
DVD player for the enjoyment of the The rear seat passengers can then When you turn on the system, the
rear passengers. operate the rear system from the rear speakers are automatically
control panel in the ceiling. The rear turned off if the rear system selects
Features
With this system, the rear control panel can also be detached a different entertainment source
passengers can enjoy a different and used as a remote control, by than the front system. You will see
entertainment source (radio, disc pushing the RELEASE button, and the Rear Speakers Off icon both in
changer, DVD player, XM Radio, or pulling the remote toward you. the audio display and the overhead
optional CD changer/tape player) Pressing the REAR CTRL OFF screen. The sound for the rear
than the front seat occupants. The button disables rear control. The system is sent to the wireless
audio is broadcast through the indicator in the button comes on and headphones.
supplied wireless headphones. your passengers can no longer
operate the system with the rear If you want to turn the rear speakers
The ignition switch must be in the control panel. When the button is on again, press and hold the REAR
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) pressed, the CTRL OFF message PWR button until the Rear Speakers
position to operate the rear appears in the overhead screen to let Off icon goes off.
entertainment system. your passengers know that the
control panel is disabled. NOTE: The rear speakers are
The rear system selects the source it connected to the front system, so
was last set to. If that source has they will always play the source that
been removed (the DVD has been the front system is set to.
ejected from the player, for example), CONTINUED
237
2008 MDX


U.S. Entertainment Package and

Canadian Elite Package models
REAR PWR BUTTON REAR CTRL OFF BUTTON Overhead Screen Unit
FRONT SOURCE BUTTON REAR SOURCE BUTTON
238
2008 MDX


To Select Rear Entertainment Operating the DVD Player from REAR CONTROL PANEL
from the Front Control Panel the Front Control Panel
To operate the rear entertainment The DVD player in your rear
system from the front panel, press entertainment system can play DVD
the REAR SOURCE button. You will video discs, audio CDs MP3/WMA
hear two beeps and the indicator in discs and DTS CDs.
the button comes on to show that the
control panel is enabled.
Features
If you do not operate the rear OPEN BUTTON
entertainment system from the front
panel within 10 seconds, the OVERHEAD SCREEN
indicator goes off and the FRONT
SOURCE indicator comes on Open the overhead screen by
automatically. pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
To play the radio, the buttons for the Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
front entertainment system have the If you pivot the screen too far
same functions. forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen
If discs are loaded in the disc back to the second or first detent to
changer of the upper part, select the turn the display back on. To close
6 DISC button. If a disc is loaded in the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
the lower player, select the DVD
button.
CONTINUED
239
2008 MDX


U.S. Entertainment Package and Insert a DVD into the lower DVD/
Canadian Elite Package models CD slot in the audio unit.
SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS Push the DVD in halfway, the drive

will pull it in the rest of the way.
PLAY Press the DVD ( )

button if the DVD does not start
playing automatically.
PAUSE Press the DVD ( )

button to pause the DVD. Press the
button again or press PLAY to
resume. Pause works only with the
DVD player.
EJECT BUTTON
PLAY/PAUSE BUTTON
240
2008 MDX


SEEK/SKIP Press and hold the EJECT Press the eject button to Using the Rear Control Panel
button to move forward; you will remove the DVD from the drive. To turn on the rear entertainment
see the time elapsed shown in the system from the rear control panel,
overhead screen advances rapidly. To Return to Front Audio press the PWR button. Use the AM/
Press and hold the button to move Controls FM button, XM RADIO button, 6
backward; you will see the time To return front panel control to the DISC button, DVD button, or AUX
elapsed shown in the overhead front audio system. Press the button to select the entertainment
screen decreases. Release the button FRONT SOURCE button. You will source. The selected source will be
Features
when the system reaches the point hear a beep and the indicator in the shown in the display. Make sure the
you want. button comes on. The indicator also rear control operation has not been
comes on automatically, when you disabled with the REAR CTRL
Each time you press the button do not operate the rear button on the front panel. When the
and release it, the system skips entertainment system for 10 seconds. audio system is off or the front side
forward to the beginning of the next rear power is off, the rear control
track or chapter. Press and release panel cannot be turned on.
the button to skip backward to the
beginning of the current track. Press
and release it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track or
chapter.
241
2008 MDX


To Play the Radio from the Rear

Control Panel
Use the , , , or
button to highlight SEEK,
TUNE, AUTO SELECT, SCAN, or REAR CONTROL PANEL
one of the preset radio stations on
the overhead screen. You can enter
the highlighted function by pressing
the ENT button. These functions
have the same features as those of
the front audio system. You can also
use the or buttons to seek
up/down and or to tune
up/down. To Play the XM Radio from the change category or channel mode),
Rear Control Panel SCAN, or one of the preset channels
You can also use the or on the overhead screen. You can
buttons to change categories enter the highlighted function by
up/down and or to change pressing the ENT button. These
channels up/down within a category functions have the same features as
(in CATEGORY mode) or up/down those of the front audio system.
for all channels (in CH mode).
Use the , , , or
button to highlight CATE (to
change categories), CHAN (to
change channels), MODE (to
242
2008 MDX


While the overhead screen is closed, To Play a Disc in the 6-Disc To change the disc currently playing,
you can see the XM radio Changer from the Rear Control use the , , , or
information in the subsidiary display Panel button to highlight your
in the ceiling. Pressing the DISP If discs are loaded in the disc selected disc icon, and press ENT.
MODE button repeatedly changes changer, select them by pressing the
the subsidiary display from the 6 DISC button. If CDs are loaded in the CD changer
channel number, to the category and the overhead screen is not open,
name, to the music title, to the artist Use the , , , or pressing the or button changes
Features
name, and to the channel name, and button to highlight REPEAT, the discs.
then back to the channel number. RANDOM, SCAN, , (skip),
, or (cue) on the overhead
To change mode, press and hold the screen. You can enter the
DISP MODE button for 5 seconds. highlighted function by pressing the
ENT button. These functions have
the same features as those of the
front audio system.
243
2008 MDX


To Play a DVD from the Rear REAR CONTROL PANEL

Control Panel
The video screen is for use by rear
seat passengers only. The driver and
front seat passenger should not try
to view the screen while driving.
Open the overhead screen by

pushing the OPEN button. The OPEN
screen will swing down part-way. BUTTON
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far OVERHEAD SCREEN
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen Press the button again quickly To select the menu on the DVD,
back to the second or first detent to to go to the previous chapter. press the MENU/SCROLL button.
turn the display back on. To close Use the , , , and
the screen, pivot it up until it latches. To move rapidly within a chapter, buttons to move to the desired
press and hold the or menu selection, then press the ENT
Press the button when you button. The system will button to enter your selection.
want to pause the DVD. Press this continue to move through the
button again to go back to PLAY. chapter. Press the button to
move forward, or the button to
Press the button to skip to the move backward. Release the button
beginning of the next chapter. Press when the system reaches the point
the button to return to the you want.
beginning of the current chapter.
244
2008 MDX


DISP Button MENU SCROLL Button Top Menu
Features
When you press the DISP button When you press the MENU When you select TOP MENU, the
while a DVD is playing, the current SCROLL button while a DVD is screen changes to the DVDs title
status of title, chapter, elapsed time, playing, the DVD Menu appears. menu. This menu also appears when
angle, subtitle, audio, and sound The menu options are TOP MENU, you press the MENU SCROLL
characteristics, with the personal MENU, PLAY MODE, SEARCH, button while a DVD is not playing.
surround logo are displayed. To and NumInput. To go back to play, press the
return to the DVD video screen, RETURN button.
press the DISP button again. To go to your selected menu, use the
or button to highlight the
If you do not press the DISP button, icon and press the ENT button. To
the screen returns to the DVD video return to the DVD video screen,
screen after several seconds. select EXIT. CONTINUED
245
2008 MDX


Menu Play Mode Audio
When you select MENU with the When you select PLAY MODE To change the Audio setting,
or button, the screen with the or button, you highlight Audio from the play
changes to the DVDs title menu. can change the DVDs Audio, mode menu with the or
Subtitle or Angle setting. button and press the ENT
button. A submenu of the dubbed
language appears. You can select
another language by pressing the
or button. The sound
characteristics (Dolby Digital,
LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recorded
with the selected language is also
displayed next to the language.
246
2008 MDX


The selectable languages vary from Subtitle After selecting your desired subtitle,
DVD to DVD, and this feature may press the RETURN button or cursor
not be available on some DVDs. back with the or button to
go back to the top of the Play Mode
Press the RETURN button or cursor menu. Press the RETURN button
back with the or button to again to exit completely.
menu. Press the RETURN button
Features
again to exit completely.
To change the DVDs subtitle,

highlight Subtitle from the play
mode menu with the or
button and press the ENT
button. You can see the available
subtitles with the or
button. Press the ENT button
when your desired subtitle is
highlighted.
CONTINUED
247
2008 MDX


Angle If there are no multiple angles Search

available on the DVD, you cannot
change from Angle 1.
Press the RETURN button or cursor

back with the or button to
menu.
Press the RETURN button again to

exit completely.
To change the view angle, highlight When you highlight Search with
Angle from the play mode menu the or button, the Jump
with the or button and to chapter and title number input
press the ENT button. You can see message appears. To select
the available angle options with the Chapter or Title search, press
or button. Press the ENT the ENT button.
button when your desired subtitle is
highlighted.
248
2008 MDX


Title/Chapter Search NumInput
Features
With Title highlighted, use the A numerical command can be issued Select the first digit number using
or button to jump to your to a DVD by inputting a two digit the , , , or
desired title and press the ENT number, and a button number can be button, and enter it by pressing
button. When Chapter is selected on the screen. the ENT button. If you want to
highlighted, follow the same change the number, select DEL,
procedure for the chapter search. When you highlight, NumInput and press the ENT button, then
with the or button, the select and enter the new number.
Jump to keypad message appears.
Press the ENT button to go to the
NumInput selection screen.
CONTINUED
249
2008 MDX


Select and enter the second digit SETUP Button Disp Adjust
number the same way. The cursor To adjust the display, highlight Disp
will automatically move to the ENT Adjust from the setup menu with
icon when you press the ENT button. the or button and press
Press the ENT button to enter the the ENT button. You can adjust
number command. To go back to the these display settings:
DVD screen, press the RETURN Brightness
button or select EXIT and press the Contrast
ENT button. Black Level
Tint
Color
When you press the SETUP button

while a DVD is playing, the setup
menu appears. The menu options are
DISP ADUSTMENT, ASPECT
RATIO, and PERSONAL
SURROUND.
To change a setup, use the or

button to highlight your
selection and press the ENT button.
To return to the DVD video screen,
select EXIT.
250
2008 MDX


Features
Select the quality you want to adjust If you want to set the display to the The display changes as shown above.
by pressing the or button. default setting, select Reset by
Adjust the setting by pressing the pressing the or button, and, Select Yes, and press the ENT
or button. When you are then pressing the ENT button. button. You will see the message
finished with your adjustment, Default display settings applied on
cursor back to the top of the setup the display for 5 seconds.
menu, or press the RETURN button
to exit.
CONTINUED
251
2008 MDX


Aspect Ratio The selected setting will be

You can set the screen mode to highlighted in blue for one second,
these settings: and the screen returns to the play
Normal mode in the selected setting.
Wide
Zoom
Full
Select the Aspect Ratio by pressing

the or button, then press
the ENT button.
The selectable setting menu is

displayed, and the current setting is
highlighted in blue.
Select the desired setting by

pressing the or button,
then press the ENT button.
252
2008 MDX


Personal Surround Select Cinema, Music, or Voice If you select Off, the logo
by pressing the or button, disappears, and there will be no
and enter your selection by pressing special sound effect.
the ENT button. The PERSONAL
SURROUND logo is displayed in
the upper right corner of the screen.
Features
To change the Personal Surround
setting, highlight PERSONAL
SURROUND from the setup menu
with the or button and
press the ENT button. The effect
selection appears.
CONTINUED
253
2008 MDX


INITIAL SETTINGS Menu INITIAL SETTINGS (Language) Menu Language
When you press the SETUP button When you select Language with To select the language used in the
on the rear control panel when a the or button, the menu DISC menus, select Menu
DVD is not playing, the INITIAL shown above appears. Language by pressing the or
SETTINGS menu is displayed. button.
To return to the stop or prestop
There are two selectable menus: screen, select Exit using the
Language and Others. or button, and then press
the ENT, or the SETUP button.
254
2008 MDX


Features
Select the desired language by If you want another language than If you select No, and press the
pressing the or button, those listed, you need to enter the ENT button, the display returns to
and then pressing the ENT button. code number of the desired language. the initial screen of the Language
Select other, and press the ENT menu.
The selectable languages are, button. The display changes as
English, French, Spanish, German, shown in the next column.
Italian, Dutch, Chinese, Korean, Thai,
Japanese or others.
CONTINUED
255
2008 MDX


Audio Language
If you select Yes, the display If you made a mistake entering a You can select the dubbed language
changes to the language code input number digit, select DEL on the before playing DVDs.
mode. Select the first number digit display with the , , , Select Audio Language by pressing
using the , , , or or button, and press the ENT the or button. You will see the
button, and press the ENT button on the control panel. Then submenu next to Audio Language.
button to enter it. Repeat this until all select and enter the correct number
four digits are filled. When the digit as described. The display Follow the same instructions you
fourth digit is entered, the cursor returns to the initial Language used to set the menu language.
automatically moves to ENT on the menu screen.
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel to enter the new
language code.
256
2008 MDX


Subtitle Language INITIAL SETTINGS (Others) Dynamic Range

Dynamic Range reduces the
differences between the loud and
quiet sound levels throughout the
disc. When this is on, the louder
sounds are lowered, and quieter
sounds are increased.
Features
You can select the subtitle language When you select Others at the top
before playing DVDs. of the INITIAL SETTINGS screen,
Select Subtitle Language by the above menu appears on the
pressing the or button. You will screen.
see the submenu next to the
Subtitle Language.
Follow the same instructions you

used to set the menu language.
CONTINUED
257
2008 MDX


Angle Mark
ANGLE MARK
When you select the Dynamic When you switch to another angle Select Angle Mark by pressing the
Range by pressing the or while playing a DVD, the angle mark or button. The above submenu
button, you will see the submenu is displayed in the upper right corner appears. If you want the angle mark
next to the Dynamic Range as of the screen. to be displayed, select ON with the
shown above. or button.
You can set the system to display or
To turn Dynamic Range on or off, not display this angle mark.
select ON or OFF by pressing
the or button.
258
2008 MDX


Parental Level
You can place an auditory restriction
by changing the parental control
level. The higher the level number,
the lower the restriction.
Features
When you select and enter Yes,
Highlight Parental Level and press the display changes as shown above.
ENT button. You will see the To change the level, you need to
submenu. If you select No and enter your four digit password.
press the ENT button, the screen Select the number for the first digit
goes back to the Others menu. by pressing the , , , or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. Repeat this until all
four digits are filled. When you enter
the fourth number, the cursor
automatically moves to ENT on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel. CONTINUED
259
2008 MDX


Changing the Password
If the system does not recognize the If you enter the password correctly, The password was set to 1111
password you entered, you will see you can then change the parental when the vehicle left the factory.
the above display. Repeat the control level.
parental control level steps until you
enter the correct password. Once you correctly enter the
password, press the or
button to change the level, and
then press the ENT button to enter
your selection.
260
2008 MDX


Features
To change the password, select Select the first digit by pressing the If the system does not recognize the
Password. You will see the above , , , or button, password you entered, you will see
menu displayed. Select Yes by and enter it by pressing the ENT the above display. Repeat the
pressing the or button, button. Repeat this until all four password setting steps until you
then press the ENT button. digits are entered. When you enter enter the correct password.
the fourth number, the cursor
If you select No, and press the automatically moves to ENT on the
ENT button, the display returns to display. Press the ENT button on the
the Others menu. control panel.
CONTINUED
261
2008 MDX


Remote Control
RELEASE BUTTON
If you forget the password, select The display changes as shown above. The rear control panel can be
Password, and press the button If you want to use the default detached from the ceiling unit and
10 times. password (1111), select Yes, and used as a remote control. To remove
press the ENT button. it from the ceiling unit, press the
release button. The control panel will
The message Default password swing down partway. Pivot it down
setting applied is displayed for further past the detent until it
5 seconds. detaches from the hinge. To reinstall
it, reverse the procedure.
262
2008 MDX


Replacing the Remote Control An improperly disposed of battery As required by the FCC:
Batteries can hurt the environment. This device complies with Part 15 of the
Always confirm local regulations for FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
COVER battery disposal. following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
Features
operation.

approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the users
If it takes several pushes on the This device complies with Industry

button to operate the rear Canada Standard RSS-210.
entertainment system, have your Operation is subject to the following two
dealer replace the batteries as soon conditions: (1) this device may not cause
as possible. interference, and (2) this device must
Battery type: BR3032 undesired operation of the device.
263
2008 MDX


Playable DVDs The DVD player can also play discs Protecting DVDs
recorded in MP3/WMA formats and The tips on how to handle and
DTS CDs. protect DVDs are basically the same
as those for compact discs. Refer to
Those packages or jackets should Protecting Your CDs on page 229 .
also bear the designation of 1 or
ALL. DVD-ROMs cannot be played
in this system.
This product incorporates copyright

protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights.
There are various types of DVDs Use of this copyright protection

available. Some of them are not technology must be authorized by
compatible with your system. Macrovision, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing uses
The DVD player in your rear only unless otherwise authorized by
entertainment system can play Macrovision.
DVDs and CDs bearing the above
marks on their packages or jackets. Reverse engineering or disassembly
is prohibited.
264
2008 MDX


DVD Player Error Messages

The chart on the right explains the Error Massage Cause Solution
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc. Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.
DISC ERROR FOCUS Error Check for an error indication. Insert the disc
If you see an error message in the again. If the code does not disappear or the disc
display while playing a disc, press cannot be removed, consult your dealer.
the eject button. After ejecting the Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.
Features
disc, check it for damage or MECH ERROR Mechanical Error Check for an error indication. Insert the disc
deformation. If there is no damage, again. If the code does not disappear or the disc
insert the disc again. cannot be removed, consult your dealer.
HEAT ERROR High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
The audio system will try to play the normal.
disc. If there is still a problem, the The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the
error message will reappear. Press REGION ERR Invalid region code disc, and insert a disc compatible with this
the eject button, and pull out the disc. system.
PARENT ERR Invalid parental Reinsert the disc, and increase the parental
Insert a different disc. If the new control level control level (see page 259 ).
265
2008 MDX


Wireless Headphones To use the headphones, pivot the

earpieces outward. This turns them
on. To adjust the volume, turn the
dial on the bottom of the right
earpiece. When you remove the
headphones, the earpieces
automatically pivot inward, and the
headphones turn off. When not in
use, store the headphones in the
pocket of either front seat.
VOLUME DIAL
Some state and local government The audio for the rear entertainment
agencies prohibit the use of system is sent to the wireless
headphones by the driver of a motor headphones that come with the
vehicle. Always obey applicable laws system. When using the headphones,
and regulations. make sure you wear them correctly:
L (left) and R (right) are marked on
the sides of the frame. Wearing the
headphones backwards may affect
audio reception, limiting the sound
quality and range.
266
2008 MDX


Replacing Batteries Auxiliary Input Jacks

COVER
Features
TAB BATTERY
Each headphone uses one AAA Remove the battery. Install the new Auxiliary input jacks and headphone
battery. The battery is under the battery in the earpiece as shown in connectors for the rear
cover on the left earpiece. To the diagram next to the battery slot. entertainment system are on the
remove the cover, insert a coin in the Slide the cover back into place on the back of the center console
slot and twist it slightly to pry the earpiece, then press down on the compartment.
cover away from the earpiece. Pull back edge to lock it in place.
the cover outward, and pivot it out of
the way.
CONTINUED
267
2008 MDX


VOLUME DIALS
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS

HEADPHONE CONNECTORS
The system will accept auxiliary There are three headphone

inputs from standard video games connectors for the third seat
and video equipment. passengers. Each connector has its
Some video game power supplies own volume control.
may cause poor picture quality.
V = Video jack
L = Left audio jack
R = Right audio jack
268
2008 MDX


Security System
The security system helps to protect The security system will not set if
your vehicle and valuables from theft. the hood, tailgate, or any door is not
The horn sounds and a combination fully closed. If the system will not set,
of headlights, position lights, side check that the doors, the tailgate and
marker lights and taillights flashes if the hood are fully closed.
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the audio unit. Do not attempt to alter this system
This alarm continues for 2 minutes, or add other devices to it.
Features
then the system resets. To reset an
alarming system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
drivers door with the key or the SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
remote transmitter.
The security system automatically Once the security system is set,
sets 15 seconds after you lock the opening any door, the tailgate, or the
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the hood without using the key or the
system to activate, you must lock the remote transmitter, will cause it to
doors and the tailgate from the alarm. It also alarms if the radio is
outside with the key, drivers lock removed from the dashboard or the
tab, door lock master switch, or wiring is cut.
remote transmitter. The security
system indicator on the instrument
panel starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
269
2008 MDX


Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain Using Cruise Control 3. Press and release the SET/
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) DECEL button on the steering
without keeping your foot on the CRUISE BUTTON wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
accelerator pedal. It should be used RES/ACCEL indicator on the instrument panel
for cruising on straight, open BUTTON comes on to show the system is
highways. It is not recommended for now activated.
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Improper use of the cruise

CANCEL BUTTON SET/DECEL
control can lead to a crash. BUTTON
Use the cruise control only 1. Push in the CRUISE button on the
when traveling on open steering wheel. The CRUISE
highways in good weather. MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
The cruise control system can be

left on, even when it is not in use.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising

speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
270
2008 MDX


Cruise Control
Cruise control may not hold the set Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising
speed when you are going up and You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways:
down hills. If your vehicle speed speed in any of these ways:
increases going down a hill, use the Press and hold the SET/DECEL
brakes to slow down. This will cancel Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. Release the button when
the cruise control. To resume the set button. When you reach the you reach the desired speed.
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button. desired cruising speed, release the
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator button. To slow down in very small
Features
on the instrument panel will come amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
back on. Push on the accelerator pedal. button. Each time you do this,
Accelerate to the desired cruising your vehicle will slow down about
When climbing a steep hill, the speed, then press the SET/ 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
automatic transmission may DECEL button.
downshift to hold the set speed. Tap the brake pedal lightly with
To increase the speed in very your foot. The CRUISE
small amounts, tap the RES/ CONTROL indicator on the
ACCEL button. Each time you do instrument panel will go out.
this, your vehicle will speed up When the vehicle slows to the
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
CONTINUED
271
2008 MDX


Cruise Control
Even with cruise control turned on, Cancelling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed
you can still use the accelerator When you push the CANCEL button
pedal to speed up for passing. After CRUISE BUTTON or tap the brake pedal, the system
completing the pass, take your foot remembers the previously set speed.
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle To return to that speed, accelerate to
will return to the set cruising speed. above 25 mph (40 km/h), then press
and release the RES/ACCEL button.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
causes cruise control to cancel. comes on. The vehicle accelerates to
the same speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns

CANCEL BUTTON the system completely off and erases
the previous cruising speed.
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the

steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the

steering wheel.
272
2008 MDX


Compass
Canadian MDX model

Compass Operation
Compass operation can be affected
by driving near power lines or
stations, across bridges, through Press and
hold SET
tunnels, over railroad crossings, past Press SET
large vehicles, or driving near large Press
objects that can cause a magnetic
Features
disturbance. It can also be affected COMPASS DISPLAY
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
magnets.
Compass Calibration 1. Press and hold the SET button for 3. Press the button. CAL ? Y will
If you see in the compass five seconds until the Clock be displayed.
display and CAL and are display changes to ZON ? N.
shown in the calendar display, the (Clock adjustment mode will be 4. Press the SET button. The
compass is self-calibrating. started after the first two seconds.) compass display will change to
The compass may need to be and CAL and are
manually calibrated after exposure to 2. Press the SET button. CAL ? N shown.
a strong magnetic field. If the will be displayed. At this point,
compass seems to be continually pressing SET button will exit 5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two
showing the wrong direction and is calibration mode. complete circles.
not self-calibrating, do the following.
CONTINUED
273
2008 MDX


Compass
6. When the display goes from 4. Find the zone for your area on the
to an actual heading, the map.
unit is calibrated and the display
returns to normal. 5. If the zone is incorrect, press the
button to cycle the count down,
NOTE: Do this procedure in an open or the button to cycle the count
area, away from buildings, power up. Once the correct zone is
lines, and other vehicles. displayed, continue to step 6.
Compass Zone Selection 6. Press the SET button to set the

In most areas, there is a variation zone selection.
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so 7. Press and hold the SET button for
the compass can compensate for this 1. Press and hold the SET button for about 5 seconds to exit the zone
variation. To check and select the five seconds until the Clock selection and return display to
zone, do this: display changes to ZON ? N. normal.
(Clock adjustment mode will be
started after the first two seconds.)
2. Press the button. ZOY ? Y will

be displayed.
3. Press the SET button. The zone

the compass is currently in will be
displayed.
274
2008 MDX


Compass
Zone Map
Features
275
2008 MDX


HomeLink Universal Transceiver
The HomeLink Universal garage door opener that lacks safety to test that the safety features are
Transceiver built into your vehicle stop and reverse features. functioning properly. If you do not
can be programmed to operate up to have this information, contact the
three remote controlled devices Units manufactured between April 1, manufacturer of the equipment.
around your home, such as garage 1982 and January 1, 1993 may be Before programming HomeLink to a
doors, lighting, or home security equipped with safety stop and garage door or gate opener, make
systems. reverse features. If your unit does sure that people and objects are out
not have an external entrapment of the way of the device to prevent
General Safety Information protection system, an easy test to potential injury or damage.
Before programming your confirm the function and When programming a garage door
HomeLink to operate a garage door performance of the safety stop and opener, park just outside the garage.
opener, confirm that the opener has reverse feature is to lay a 2 4
an external entrapment protection under the closing door. The door Training HomeLink
system, such as an electronic eye, should stop and reverse upon Before you begin If you just
or other safety and reverse stop contacting the piece of wood. received your vehicle and have not
features. As an additional safety feature, trained any of the buttons in
garage door openers manufactured HomeLink before, you should erase
If your garage door was after January 1, 1993 are required to any previously learned codes before
manufactured before April 1, 1982, have external entrapment protection training the first button.
you may not be able to program systems, such as an electronic eye, To do this, press and hold the two
HomeLink to operate it. These units which detect an object obstructing outside buttons on the HomeLink
do not have safety features that the door. transceiver for about 20 seconds,
cause the motor to stop and reverse until the red indicator flashes.
it if an obstacle is detected during Important Safety Precautions Release the buttons, then proceed to
closing, increasing the risk of injury. Refer to the safety information that step 1.
Do not use HomeLink with any came with your garage door opener
276
2008 MDX


If you are training the second or If the red indicator in HomeLink If the red indicator in HomeLink
third buttons, go directly to step 1. begins to flash slowly at first, continues to flash slowly (does
then rapidly, release both not begin to flash rapidly),
1. Hold the end of the garage door buttons, and go to step 4. repeat steps 1 thru 3.
opener remote transmitter 1 to 3 If the red indicator in HomeLink
inches from HomeLink. Make continues to flash slowly (does 4. Test the HomeLink button by
sure you are not blocking your not flash rapidly), your remote pushing it for about 1 second.
view of the red indicator in transmitter may stop If the button works,
Features
HomeLink. transmitting after a short time. programming is complete.
Go to step 3. If the button does not work go
RED INDICATOR to step 5.
3. Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the 5. Push and hold the HomeLink
HomeLink buttons at the same button and watch the red indicator
time. While continuing to hold the on HomeLink.
HomeLink button, press and If the indicator stays on, press
release the remote transmitter the HomeLink button again; the
button every 2 seconds. remotely controlled device
If the red indicator in HomeLink should operate.
begins to flash slowly at first, If the indicator flashes rapidly
then rapidly, release both for 2 seconds then stays on, you
buttons, and go to step 4. have a rolling code transmitter:
2. Press and hold the remote go to Training with a Rolling
transmitter button and one of the Code System (see page 278 ).
HomeLink buttons at the same
time. CONTINUED
277
2008 MDX


6. Repeat these steps to train the 1. Make sure you have properly have approximately 30 seconds to
other two HomeLink buttons to completed the Training complete the following steps.
operate any other compatible HomeLink procedure.
remotely controlled devices 4. Press and hold the button on
around your home (lighting, 2. Find the training button on your HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
automatic gate, security system, garage door opener unit. The
etc.). location will vary, depending on 5. Press and hold the HomeLink
the manufacturer. button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
Training With a Rolling Code This should turn off the training
System TRAINING BUTTON indicator on the garage door
For security purposes, newer garage opener unit. (Some systems may
door opening systems use a rolling require you to press the button up
or variable code. Information from to three times.)
the remote control and the garage
door opener is needed before 6. Press the HomeLink button again
HomeLink can operate the garage for about 1 second. It should
door opener. operate the garage door.
The Training HomeLink

procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure 3. Press the training button on the
synchronizes HomeLink to the garage door opener unit until the
garage door opener so it sends and indicator next to the button comes
receives the correct codes. on. The indicator may blink, or
come on and stay on. You then
278
2008 MDX


Erasing Codes If a standard transmitter was As required by the FCC:

To erase the codes stored in all three programmed, the indicator will This device complies with Part 15 of the
buttons, press and hold the two stay on for about 25 seconds. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
outside buttons until the red following two conditions: (1) This device
indicator begins to flash, then 2. Once the HomeLink indicator may not cause harmful interference, and
release the buttons. begins to flash slowly, continue to (2) this device must accept any
hold the HomeLink button, and interference received, including
You should erase all three codes follow steps 3 thru 6 under interference that may cause undesired
Features
before selling the vehicle. Training HomeLink (see page operation.
276 ).
Retraining a Button Changes or modifications not expressly
If you want to retrain a programmed Client Assistance approved by the party responsible for
button for a new device, you do not If you have problems with training compliance could void the users
have to erase all button memory. the HomeLink Universal Transceiver, authority to operate the equipment.
You can replace the existing memory or would like information on home
code using this procedure: products that can be operated by This device complies with Industry
HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On Canada Standard RSS-210.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink the Internet, go to Operation is subject to the following two
button to be trained until the www.homelink.com. conditions: (1) this device may not cause
HomeLink indicator begins to interference, and (2) this device must
flash slowly. HomeLink is a registered accept any interference that may cause
If a rolling code transmitter was trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc. undesired operation of the device.
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.
279
2008 MDX


Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Your vehicle is equipped with Voice Control www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or by

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL recognizes simple voice calling the HandsFreeLink
HFL uses Bluetooth technology to commands, such as phone numbers consumer support at 1-888-528-7876.
link your cell phone to your vehicle. and names. It uses these commands In Canada, visit www.acura.ca, or call
With HFL, you can place and receive to automatically dial, receive, and 1-888-9-ACURA-9.
calls through your vehicles audio store numbers. For more
system, without the distraction of information on voice control, see Incoming/Outgoing Calls
handling your cell phone. To use this Using Voice Control on page 283 . With a linked phone, the HFL allows
feature, you need a Bluetooth- you to send and receive calls in your
compatible cell phone with the Bluetooth Wireless Technology vehicle without holding the phone.
Hands-Free Profile. For more Bluetooth is a registered trademark
information, and a list of compatible of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Phonebook
cell phones, visit www.acura.com/ Bluetooth is the wireless technology The HFL can store up to 50 names
handsfreelink, or call 1-888-528-7876. that links your phone to the HFL. and phone numbers in its phonebook.
In Canada, visit www.acura.ca, or call The HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, With a linked phone, you can then
1-888-9-ACURA-9. The HFL is which means the maximum range automatically dial any name or
available in English on U.S. models, between your phone and vehicle is number in the phonebook.
and in both English and French on 30 feet (10 meters).
Canadian models. To change the
language, see page 305 . To use the HFL, your phone must
have approved Bluetooth capability
Here are the main features of the along with the Hands Free Profile.
HFL. Instructions for using the HFL This type of phone is available
begin on page 290 . through many phone makers and
cellular carriers. You can also find an
approved phone by visiting
280
2008 MDX


On vehicles with navigation system Microphone HFL Buttons

Your vehicles HFL system has the The HFL microphone is on the
cellular phonebook import function. ceiling, between the front map lights HFL TALK BUTTON
This allows you to import your and the console buttons. On models
cellular phonebook to the HFL. with navigation system, the
Using the navigation system, you can microphone is shared with the
make a call directly and store a navigation system.
desired number in the HFL from the
Features
list shown on the navigation display. Audio System
For more information on how to When the HFL is in use, the sound
import the phonebook or to make a comes through the vehicles front
call, see page 290 . audio system speakers. If the audio HFL BACK
system is in use while operating BUTTON
On all models either of the HFL buttons or making
You can also store the desired a call, the HFL over-rides the audio To operate the HFL, use the HFL
number to the HFL directly from system. To change the volume level, Talk and Back buttons on the left
your cellphone using the receive use the audio system volume knob, side of the steering wheel.
contact function in the HFL. or the steering wheel volume
controls. The HFL buttons are used as
follows:
HFL Talk: This button is used before

you give a command, to answer
incoming calls, and to confirm
system information.
CONTINUED
281
2008 MDX


Multi-Information Display Signal Strength Indicates the

network signal strength of the
HFL TALK BUTTON
SIGNAL HFL BATTERY current phone. Five bars equals
STRENGTH MODE LEVEL STATUS full strength.
ROAM Status Indicates your

phone is roaming.
Battery Level Status Indicates

the power currently remaining in
your phones battery. Five bars
equals full battery strength.
HFL BACK BUTTON ROAM STATUS PHONE DIALING
HFL Mode Indicates when you
Press and release the button, then When you are operating the HFL, or are dialing and receiving calls.
wait for a beep before giving a when you manually select HFL on
command. the multi-information display, you Phone Dialing Indicates the
will see this information on the number you entered or the
HFL Back: This button is used to screen: number of the incoming call.
end a call, go back to the previous
voice control command, and to : Some phones do not send this
cancel an operation. information to the HFL.
282
2008 MDX


How to Use the HFL Using Voice Control Give a voice command in a clear
The HFL is operated by the HFL Here are some guidelines for using natural speaking voice without
Talk and Back buttons on the left voice control: pausing between words or
side of the steering wheel. The next numbers. If the system cannot
few pages provide instructions for all To enter a command, press and recognize your command because
basic features of the HFL. release the Talk button. Then, of the background noise, speak
after the beep, say your command louder.
NOTE: All phones may not in a clear, natural tone.
Features
operate identically, and some If the microphone picks up voices
may cause inconsistent Close the windows and the other than yours, the system may
operation of the HFL. moonroof. not interpret your voice
commands correctly.
When voice commands are used,
the fan speed will be automatically If the HFL does not recognize a
adjusted to low. However, for command, its response is, Pardon.
better voice recognition, lowering If it doesnt recognize the
the fan speed may be necessary. command a second time, its
response is, Please repeat. If it
Adjust the airflow from both the doesnt recognize the command a
dashboard and side vents so they third time, it plays the Help
do not blow against the prompt.
microphone on the ceiling.
After pressing the Talk button,

wait for the beep, then give a voice
command. CONTINUED
283
2008 MDX


To hear a list of available options To go back one step in a command When you finish a command
at any time, press the Talk button, process, say, Go back, or press sequence, the HFL goes back to
wait for the beep, and say, Hands the Back button. its main menu. For example, when
free link help. If nothing is said while the HFL is you store the name, Eric, the
listening for a command, the HFL HFL response is, Eric has been
Many commands can be spoken will time out and stop its voice stored. The next time you press
together. For example, you can recognition. The next time you the Talk button, you will be at the
say, Dial 123-456-7891. press the Talk button, the HFL main menu.
begins listening from the point at
To enter a string of numbers in a which it timed out.
Call or Dial command, you can say
them all at once, or you can To end a command sequence at
separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7, any time, press and hold the Back
10, and 11. button, or press and release the
Talk button, wait for the beep, and
To skip a voice prompt, press the say, Cancel. The next time you
Talk button while the HFL is press the Talk button, the HFL
speaking. The HFL will then begin begins from its main menu.
listening for your next command.
284
2008 MDX


Setting Up the System 3. Press and release the Talk button. 5. Press and release the Talk button.
The voice of the HFL can be set to After the beep, say Male or After the beep, say Ring tone or
male or female (U.S. models only). Female, depending on the Prompt. The HFL response is A
Also, the incoming notification can system voice you want. The HFL ring tone will be used or An
be set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no response is, Male (Female) incoming call prompt will be used.
notification. prompts have been selected. If you choose Ring tone, you will
Would you like an audible hear a ring tone through the audio
To set up the system, do this: notification of an incoming call? speakers to announce an incoming
Features
1. Press and release the Talk button. call. If you choose Prompt, you
After the beep, say System. The 4. Press and release the Talk button. will hear this message to
HFL response is, System options If you say Yes after the beep, the announce an incoming call: You
are setup and clear. HFL response is, Would you like have an incoming call.
the notification to be a ring tone or
2. Press and release the Talk button. prompt? If you say No after the 6. The HFL response continues A
After the beep, say Setup. The beep, the HFL returns to its main security option is available to lock
HFL response is Would you like menu. Saying No will result in no the HFL system. Each time the
male or female prompts? ring tone or prompt playback vehicle is turned on, a passcode
during an incoming call. The audio would be required to use this
system will still mute, and a system. Would you like this
message will be displayed. security option turned on? If you
say Yes, you can set your
passcode. Refer to the setting
procedure in the next column.
285
2008 MDX


Setting Your Passcode 5. Press and release the Talk button. cycle. If the passcode is set, its
The HFL will accept a numeric, four- After the beep, say Yes. The response is The system is locked.
digit passcode that you can use for HFL response is Security is on. What is the four-digit passcode?
security purposes. Each time the vehicle is turned on,
the passcode will be required to 2. Press and release the Talk button.
To set your passcode, do this: use the system. The system setup After the beep, say your four-digit
1. Follow the system setup is complete. Returning to the main passcode. For example, say 1, 2, 3,
procedure as described previously. menu. 4.
2. Press and release the Talk button. 6. Press and release the Talk button. 3. If the passcode is correct, the HFL
After the beep, say Yes. If you say No. after the beep, the response is Main menu. If the
HFL response is Security will not passcode is not correct, the HFL
3. The HFL response is What is the be used. The system setup is response is 1,2,3,4 is incorrect.
four-digit number you would like complete. Please try again. Go back to the
to set as your passcode? step 2.
To enter your passcode, do this;
4. Press and release the Talk button. Once a passcode is set, you can lock If you forget your passcode and you
After the beep, say the four-digit the HFL so it only operates after the cannot activate the HFL, consult
passcode you want to use. For passcode is entered. your dealer to cancel the passcode.
example, say 1, 2, 3, 4. The HFL
response is 1, 2, 3, 4. Is this 1. The HFL will prompt you for your
correct? passcode each time the ignition
switch is turned to the ON (II)
position and you press the Talk
button. You will only be asked for
the passcode once per ignition
286
2008 MDX


Pairing Your Phone NOTE: 1. With your phone on and the

Your Bluetooth compatible phone HFL does not allow you to pair ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
with HandsFree Profile must be your phone if the vehicle is ON (II) position, press and release
paired to the HFL before you can moving. the Talk button. After the beep,
make and receive hands-free calls. For pairing, your phone must be in say Phone setup. The HFL
To confirm that your phone is its Discovery mode. response is Phone setup options
Bluetooth compatible, visit www. Up to six phones can be paired to are status, pair, edit, delete, and
acura.com/handsfreelink, or call 1-888- the HFL. list.
Features
528-7876. In Canada, visit www.acura. The following procedure works for
ca, or call 1-888-9-ACURA-9. Your most phones. If you cannot pair 2. Press and release the Talk button.
phone retailer should also be able to your phone to the HFL with this After the beep, say Pair. The
confirm that your phone is Bluetooth procedure, refer to your phones HFL response is The pairing
compatible. operating manual, visit process requires operation of your
www.acura.com/handsfreelink, call mobile phone. For safety, only
the Hands Free Link consumer perform this function while the
support at (888) 528-7876, or call vehicle is stopped. State a four-
your phone retailer. In Canada, digit code for pairing. Note this
visit www.acura.ca or call (888) 9- code. It will be requested by the
ACURA-9. phone.
During the pairing process, turn
off any previously paired phones 3. Press and release the Talk button.
before pairing a new phone. After the beep, say the four-digit
code you want to use. For example,
say 1, 2, 3, 4. The HFL response
is, 1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?
CONTINUED
287
2008 MDX


4. Press and release the Talk button. 7. Press and release the Talk button. The HFL response is Phone
After the beep, say Yes. The After the beep, say the name you setup options are status, pair, edit,
HFL response is Searching for a want to use. For example, say delete, and list.
Bluetooth phone. Erics phone. The HFL response
is Erics phone has been 2. Press and release the Talk button.
NOTE: Steps 5 and 6 show a successfully paired. Returning to After the beep, say Edit. The
common way to get your phone into the main menu. HFL response is Which phone
its Discovery mode. If these steps do would you like to edit?
not work on your phone, refer to the 8. If you want to pair another phone,
phones operating manual. repeat steps 1 through 7. 3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name of
5. Follow the prompts on your phone Once the pairing process is the phone you want to rename.
to get it into its Discovery mode. completed, AcuraLink may display a For example, say Erics phone.
The phone will search for the HFL. connection confirmation screen. This The HFL response is What is the
When it comes up, select screen is used to create a data new name for Erics phone?
HandsFreeLink from the list of connection between your cell phone
options displayed on your phone. and the AcuraLink system. You can 4. Press and release the Talk button.
choose to set up the data connection After the beep, say the new name
6. When asked by the phone, enter now, or do it later. If you want to do of the phone. For example, say
the four-digit code from step 3 into it now, exit the HFL menu by Lisas phone. The HFL response
your phone. The HFL response is pressing the HFL Back button one is, The name has been changed.
A new phone has been found. or more times. Returning to the main menu.
What would you like to name this
phone? To rename a paired phone, do this:
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say Phone setup.
288
2008 MDX


To delete a paired phone, do this: 5. Press and release the Talk button. To find out the status of the phone being
1. Press and release the Talk button. If you say OK after the beep, the used, do this:
After the beep, say Phone setup. HFL response is The phone has 1. Press and release the Talk button.
The HFL response is Phone been deleted. Returning to the After the beep, say Phone setup.
setup options are status, pair, edit, main menu. If you say Go back, The HFL response is, Phone
delete, and list. or Cancel, the phone will not be setup options are status, pair, edit,
deleted. delete, and list.
Features
After the beep, say Delete. The To list all paired phones, do this: 2. Press and release the Talk button.
HFL response is, Which phone 1. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Status. An
would you like to delete? After the beep, say Phone setup. example of the HFL response is,
The HFL response is Phone Erics phone is linked. Battery
3. Press and release the Talk button. setup options are status, pair, edit, strength is three bars. Signal
After the beep, say the name of delete, and list. strength is five bars, and the
the phone you want to delete. For phone is roaming. Returning to the
example say Erics phone. The 2. Press and release the Talk button. main menu.
HFL response is Would you like After the beep, say List. The
to delete Erics phone? HFL responds by listing the name
of each paired phone. When all
4. Press and release the Talk button. phones paired to the system have
After the beep, say Yes. The been read, the HFL response is
HFL response is Preparing to The entire list has been read.
delete Erics phone. Say OK to Returning to the main menu.
continue. Otherwise, say Go back,
or Cancel.
CONTINUED
289
2008 MDX


To change from the currently linked Making a Call 2. Press and release the Talk button.
phone to another paired phone, do this: You can make calls using any phone After the beep, say the number
1. Press and release the Talk button. number, or by using a name in the you want to call. For example, say
After the beep, say Next phone. HFL phonebook. You can also redial 123 456 7891. The HFL response
The HFL response is Searching the last number called. During a call, is 123 456 7891. Say call, dial, or
for the next phone. The HFL the HFL allows you to talk up to 30 continue to add numbers.
then disconnects the linked phone minutes after you remove the key
and searches for another paired from the ignition switch. Continuing On vehicles with navigation system
phone. If no other phones are a call without running the engine You can also make a call directly
found, the first phone remains may discharge and weaken the from the list shown on the
linked. vehicles battery. navigation display.
To make a call using a phone number, 3. Press and release the Talk button.
do this: After the beep, say Call or Dial.
1. With your phone on and the The HFL response is Calling or
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or Dialing. Once connected, you
ON (II) position, press and release will hear the person you called
the Talk button. After the beep, through the audio speakers. To
say Call or Dial. The HFL change the volume, use the audio
response is, What name or system volume knob, or the
number would you like to call/ steering wheel volume controls.
dial?
4. To end the call, press the Back
button.
290
2008 MDX


To make a call using a name in the HFL 4. To end the call, press the Back Sending Numbers or Names
phonebook, do this: button. During a Call
1. With your phone on and the The HFL allows you to send
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or To redial the last number called by numbers or names during a call. This
ON (II) position, press and release the phone, press and release the is useful when you call a menu-
the Talk button. After the beep, Talk button. After the beep, say driven phone system. You can also
say Call or Dial. The HFL Redial. The HFL response is, program account numbers into the
response is, What name or Redialing. Once connected, you HFL phonebook for easy retrieval
Features
number would you like to call/ will hear the person you called during menu-driven calls.
dial? through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio To send a number during a call, do this:
2. Press and release the Talk button. system volume knob, or the steering 1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you wheel volume controls. After the beep, say Send. The
want to call. For example, say HFL response is, What name or
Eric. The HFL response is number would you like to send?
Would you like to call Eric?
3. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the number
After the beep, say Yes. The you want to send. For example,
HFL response is Calling or say 1, 2, 3. The HFL response is
Dialing. Once connected, you 1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue to
will hear the person you called add numbers.
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio NOTE: To send a pound (), say
system volume knob, or the pound. To send a star (*), say star.
steering wheel volume controls.
291
2008 MDX


3. Press and release the Talk button. Receiving a Call Transferring a Call
After the beep, say Send. The If you receive a call when you are not During a call, you can transfer it
dial tones will be sent, and the call on the phone, the HFL interrupts the from the HFL to your phone, or from
will continue. audio system (if it is on), and plays your phone to the HFL.
the incoming call notification, if
To send a name during a call, do this: activated. To answer the call, press To transfer a call from the HFL to your
1. Press and release the Talk button. the Talk button and begin speaking. phone, do this:
After the beep, say Send. The If you dont want to answer the call, Press and release the Talk button.
HFL response is, What name or press the Back button. After the beep, say Transfer. The
number would you like to send? audio switches from the HFL to the
If your phone has Call Waiting, and phone.
2. Press and release the Talk button. you receive a call when you are on
After the beep, say the name you the phone, press and release the To transfer a call from your phone to the
want to send. For example, say Talk button to answer it. When you HFL, do this:
Account number. The HFL do this, the original call is placed on
response is Would you like to hold. To return to the original call, Press and release the Talk button.
send account number? press the Talk button again. If you After the beep, say Transfer. The
dont want to answer the new call, audio switches from your phone to
3. Press and release the Talk button. disregard it, and continue with your the HFL.
After the beep, say Send. The original call. If you want to hang up
dial tones will be sent, and the call the original call and answer the new
will continue. call, press the Back button.
292
2008 MDX


Muting a Call Setting up the Phonebook 3. Press and release the Talk button.
During a call, you can mute or The HFL phonebook can store up to After the beep, say the name you
unmute your voice to the person you 50 names with their associated would like to store. For example,
are talking to. numbers. These can be any types of say Eric or say account number.
numbers. For example, you can store The HFL response is What is the
To mute your voice, do this: a phone number and use it to make a number for Eric, or What is the
1. Press and release the Talk button. call, or you can store an account number for account number?
After the beep, say Mute. The number and use it during a call to a
Features
HFL response is, Mute is active. menu-driven phone system. 4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number.
To unmute your voice, do this: To add a name, do this: For example, say 123 456 7891.
2. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button. The HFL response is 123 456
After the beep, say Mute. The After the beep, say Phonebook. 7891. Say Enter. or continue to
HFL response is, Mute is The HFL response is Phonebook add numbers.
canceled. options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list. 5. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say Enter. The
2. Press and release the Talk button. HFL response is Eric (or account
After the beep, say Store. The number) has been stored.
HFL response is, What name Returning to the main menu.
would you like to store?
CONTINUED
293
2008 MDX


To edit the number of a name, do this: 5. Press and release the Talk button. 4. Press and release the Talk button.
1. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Enter. The After the beep, say Yes. The
After the beep, say Phonebook. HFL response is The number has HFL response is, The name has
The HFL response is Phonebook been changed. Returning to the been deleted. Returning to the
options are store, edit, delete, main menu. main menu.
receive contact, and list.
To delete a name, do this: To list all names in the phonebook, do
2. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button. this:
After the beep, say Edit. The After the beep, say Phonebook. 1. Press and release the Talk button.
HFL response is, What name The HFL response is Phonebook After the beep, say Phonebook.
would you like to edit? options are store, edit, delete, The HFL response is, The
receive contact, and list. Phonebook options are store, edit,
3. Press and release the Talk button. delete, receive contact, and list.
After the beep, say the name you 2. Press and release the Talk button.
would like to edit. For example, After the beep, say Delete. The 2. Press and release the Talk button.
say Eric. The HFL response is HFL response is, What name After the beep, say List. The
What is the new number for would you like to delete? HFL responds by listing the
Eric? names in the phonebook. When
3. Press and release the Talk button. the end of the list is reached, the
4. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you HFL response is, The entire list
After the beep, say the new would like to delete. For example, has been read. Returning to the
number for Eric. For example, say say Eric. The HFL response is main menu.
987 654 3219. The HFL response Would you like to delete Eric?
is, 987 654 3219. Say Enter. or
continue to add numbers.
294
2008 MDX


To call a name from the phonebook list, wheel volume controls. edit, delete, receive contact and
do this: list.
1. Press and release the Talk button. Storing a Phone Number Directly
After the beep, say Phonebook. from Your Phone 2. Press and release the Talk button.
The HFL response is Phonebook You can store the desired number to After the beep, say Receive
options are store, edit, delete, the HFL phonebook directly from contact. The HFL response is,
receive contact, and list. your cellular phone. The receive process requires
operation of your mobile phone.
Features
2. Press and release the Talk button. NOTE: Your phone may not have For safety, only perform this
After the beep, say List. The this capability. Visit www.acura.com/ function while the vehicle is
HFL responds by listing the handsfreelink or call the Hands Free stopped. HFL is now waiting to
names in the phonebook. When it Link consumer support at (888) receive a contact from a Bluetooth
says the name you want to call, for 528-7876. In Canada, visit www.acura. device.
example, Eric, press the Talk ca or call (888) 9-ACURA-9. You can
button, and then say Call. The see your phones owners manual for 3. Select a desired number from the
HFL response is, Would you like information. list on your phone, and transmit/
to call Eric? send (individual steps will vary for
To store a phone number from your each type of phone, refer to your
3. Press and release the Talk button. phone: phones owners manual) via
After the beep, say Yes. The 1. With your phone on and the Bluetooth. The HFL response is
HFL response is Calling. Once ignition switch in the One phone number has been
connected, you will hear the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) received for this contact. What
person you called through the position, press and release the name would you like to store for
audio speakers. To change the Talk button. After the beep, say the mobile number? To discard
volume, use the audio system Phonebook. The HFL response this number, say Discard.
volume knob, or the steering is, Phonebook options are store, CONTINUED
295
2008 MDX


4. Press and release the Talk button. 6. If you want to continue to store 8. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you any other numbers, press and After the beep, say the name you
would like to store. For example, release the Talk button. After the would like to store. For example,
say Neil at work. The HFL beep, say Yes. The HFL say Susan at work. The HFL
response is, Neil at work will be response is, HFL is now waiting response is, Susan at work will be
stored. Is this correct? to receive a contact from a stored. Is this correct?
Bluetooth device.
5. Press and release the Talk button. 9. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say either Yes or 7. Select a desired number from the After the beep, say either Yes or
No. If you say Yes, the HFL list on your phone, and transmit/ No. The HFL response is Susan
response is, Neil at work has send (individual steps will vary for at work has been stored. Would
been stored. Would you like HFL each type of phone, refer to your you like HFL to receive another
to receive another contact? Go to phones owners manual) via contact?
step 6. Bluetooth. The HFL response is
One phone number has been 10. If you do not want to continue to
If you say No, the HFL response received for this contact. What store any other numbers, press
is Returning to the main menu. name would you like to store for and release the Talk button. After
the mobile number? To discard the beep, say No. The HFL
this number, say Discard. response is Returning to the main
menu.
296
2008 MDX


Cellular Phonebook Options PIN Number. This option allows you

On vehicles with navigation system to add, change, or remove a PIN
The cellular phonebook option number for any phonebook that has
allows you to store up to 1,000 names been imported.
and 10,000 phone numbers in the
phonebook of Bluetooth Import Cellular Phonebook: This
HandsFreeLink from your cellular option allows you to store the
phonebook. The maximum names phonebook of your cellular phone in
Features
and numbers to be stored varies on the HFL. When you link your phone
the data size. With the HFL, you can to the HFL and select this option, the
then automatically dial any name or system will start importing and
number in the phonebook. loading the phonebook.
NOTE: Your phone may not have To use the cellular phonebook with
this capability. Visit www.acura.com/ the HFL, say or select Cellular
handsfreelink or call the Hands Free Phonebook from the Information
Link consumer support at (888) screen. The navigation display will
528-7876. In Canada, visit www.acura. change as shown above.
ca or call (888) 9-ACURA-9. You can
see your phones owners manual for If any phonebook is not stored and
information. your phone is not linked to the HFL,
Cellular Phonebook is grayed out.
CONTINUED
297
2008 MDX


Search Imported Phonebook: This To import the cellular phonebook NOTE:

option allows you to search the You can import the phonebook of HFL does not allow you to pair
phone numbers stored in the HFL. your cellular phone in the HFL. Link your phone if the vehicle is
When you enter keyword for a your phone to the HFL and select moving.
persons name, such as the first Import Cellular Phonebook from Up to six phones can be paired to
name or last name, the system will the Select an option screen. When the HFL.
find the number you want and let the message The import was
you make calls. successful. is displayed, push in on For information on linking to the
the Interface Dial to select OK. HFL, see page 287 .
Delete Imported Phonebook: This
option allows you to delete the stored
phonebook from the HFL. When you
link your phone to the HFL and
select this option, the system will
automatically delete the phonebook
of the linked phone from the HFL
(see page 297 ).
298
2008 MDX


To search the imported phonebook Select a phonebook from the

displayed list. If the phonebook you
select has a PIN icon, you will need
the 4-digit PIN number to access the
phonebook. The following screen
will appear.
Features
Enter the keyword for a persons
name, such as the first name or last
You can search the stored number name, using the Interface Dial. If the
by entering keywords to make calls system does not find an exact match,
by using the HFL. say or select LIST when you finish
entering the keyword.
Select Search Imported Phonebook
from the Select an option screen. Enter the PIN number to access the The system will display a list of
The display will change as shown phonebook. You cannot access a PIN persons names, with the closest
above. protected phonebook if you do not match to the name you entered at
use the correct PIN number. the top of the list.
CONTINUED
299
2008 MDX


Select the number (16) of the

desired person from the list.
Work
Up to three category icons are
displayed in the right side of the list.
These category icons indicate how
many numbers are stored for the Pager
person. If a name has more than
three category icons, is
displayed.
The following category icons will Fax

appear:
After selecting a person, the system
will display a list of the persons
Preference Car phone numbers.
Select the desired number from the

list to make a call.
Home Voice
Mobile Other
300
2008 MDX


To store in the Bluetooth To delete the imported phonebook Select a phonebook from the
HandsFreeLink displayed list. If the phonebook you
select has a PIN icon, you will need
the 4-digit PIN number to access the
phonebook. The following screen
will appear.
Features
You can delete the stored
Say or select STORE IN phonebook from the HFL.
HandsFreeLink from the Select a Link your phone to the HFL and
number to call screen. The screen select Delete Imported Phonebook
shown above will appear. from the Select an option screen.
The display will change as shown Enter the PIN number to access the
Select the desired number from the above. phonebook. You cannot access a PIN
list to store it in the HFL. protected phonebook if you do not
use the correct PIN number.
CONTINUED
301
2008 MDX


After you enter the correct PIN To add, change, or remove a PIN To add a PIN number
number, or if the phonebook you number from any phonebook
select is not PIN protected, the
following screen appears.
1. Select the phonebook you wish to

You can add, change or remove a add the PIN number to. The
PIN number from any phonebook. phonebook you select cannot
Say or select Yes, and the message Select PIN Number from the already have a PIN icon. The
The imported phonebook has been Select an Option screen. The display will change as shown
deleted. will appear. Select OK to display will change as shown above. above.
complete the deletion.
302
2008 MDX


To change a PIN number
Features
2. Enter the 4-digit PIN number. You 1. Select the phonebook that you 2. Enter your current PIN number.
will be asked to re-enter the PIN to wish to change the PIN number
verify. for. The display will change as
shown above.
CONTINUED
303
2008 MDX


Clearing the System 3. Press and release the Talk button.

This operation clears the HFL of After the beep, say Yes. The
your passcode, your paired phones, HFL response is Preparing to
all names in the HFL phonebook, clear all paired phones, all
and all imported phonebooks. phonebook entries, the passcode,
Clearing is recommended before you and restore the defaults in the
sell your vehicle. system setup. Say OK to proceed,
otherwise say go back or cancel.
To clear the system, do this:
After the beep, say System. The
HFL response is, System options
are setup and clear.
3. Enter your new 4-digit PIN 2. Press and release the Talk button.
number. You will be asked to re- After the beep, say Clear. The
enter the PIN to verify. HFL response is, This process
will clear all paired phones, clear
all entries in the phonebook, clear
the passcode, and restore the
defaults in the system setup. Is
this what you would like to do?
304
2008 MDX


4. Press and release the Talk button. Changing Language 3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say OK to Canadian models only After the beep, say Oui or Yes.
proceed, or say Go back or To change from English to French, do If there are no paired phones
Cancel. this: without French name tags, the
1. Press and release the Talk button. HFL response is Venillez
5. If you said OK, the HFL After the beep, say Change attendre que le systeme change de
response is, Please wait while the language. The HFL response is langue. Please wait while the
system is cleared. This may take English or French? language is changed. La langue
Features
up to 2 minutes to complete, then a ete changee. Retour au menu
the HFL response is, The system 2. Press and release the Talk button. principal.
has been cleared. Returning to the After the beep, say French. The
main menu. HFL response is Vous avez NOTE: If there are paired phones
selectionne Franais. Les noms without French name tags, the
enregistres en mode Anglais ne following prompts will continue.
seront pas accessible en mode
Franais. Voulez-vous continuer? If there are paired phones without
You have selected French. Name French name tags, the HFL
tags that were stored while in response is Pour que le systme
English mode will not be identifie les tlphones qui ont t
accessible in French mode. Would jumels dans une autre langue, les
you like to continue? noms des tlphones doivent tre r-
enregistrs.
CONTINUED
305
2008 MDX


4. The HFL response is, for example, To change from French to English, do 3. Press and release the Talk button.
Quel est le nom Franais pour this: After the beep, say Yes or Oui.
Pauls phone? Press and 1. Press and release the Talk button. If there are no paired phones
release the Talk button. After the After the beep, say Changer without English name tags, the
beep, say Tlphone de Paul. Langue. The HFL response is, HFL response is Please wait
The HFL response is, Quel est le Anglais ou Franais? while the language is changed.
nom Franais pour Pats Venillez attendre que le systeme
phone? Press and release the 2. Press and release the Talk button. change de langue. The language
Talk button. Say Tlphone de After the beep, say Anglais. The has been changed. Returning to
Pat. After all paired phones HFL response is, You have the main menu.
missing a French name tag are re- selected English. Name tags that
recorded, the HFL will prompt, were stored while in French mode NOTE: If there are paired phones
Retour au menu principal. will not be accessible in English without English name tags, the
mode. Would you like to continue? following prompts will continue.
Vous avez selectionne Anglais. Les
noms enregistres en mode If there are paired phones without
Franais ne seront pas accessible English name tags, the HFL
en mode Anglais. Voulez-vous response is The language has
contnuez? been changed. For the system to
identify phones that were paired
while in another language, the
phone names need to be re-
recorded.
306
2008 MDX


4. The HFL says, for example, What As required by the FCC:

is the English name for This device complies with Part 15 of the
Tlphone de Paul? Press FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
and release the Talk button. After following two conditions: (1) This device
the beep, say Pauls phone. The may not cause harmful interference, and
HFL response is What is the (2) this device must accept any
English name for Tlphone de interference received, including
Pat? Press and release the Talk interference that may cause undesired
Features
button. After the beep, say Pats operation.
phone. After all paired phones
missing an English name tag are Changes or modifications not expressly
re-recorded, the HFL will say approved by the party responsible for
Returning to the main menu. compliance could void the users
HFL Limitations
In addition, you cannot use the HFL This device complies with Industry
while using AcuraLink. Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
undesired operation of the device.
307
2008 MDX


AcuraLink
U.S. Technology and Sport Packages Interface Dial The selector can be pushed left,
AcuraLink enhances your ownership Most AcuraLink functions are right, up, down, and in. Use the
experience by providing a direct controlled by the interface dial. The selector to scroll through lists, to
communication link between your interface dial has two parts, a knob select menus, and to highlight menu
vehicle and the Acura Server. and a selector. items. When you make a selection,
Working through the XM radio push the center of the selector
satellite, AcuraLink works in KNOB ENTER (ENTER) to go to that selection.
conjunction with the navigation
system, Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(HFL), and audio system in your
vehicle. It displays and receives
several kinds of messages, including:
Operating tips and information on

your vehicles features.
Important recall and safety SELECTOR

information.
The knob turns left and right. Use it
Maintenance information to keep to make selections or adjustments to
your vehicle in top condition. a list or menu on the screen.
Diagnostic information to provide

information about any problems
with your vehicle.
308
2008 MDX


AcuraLink
Reading Messages To view previously read messages:

If you have new messages, an
envelope icon appears in the top
right corner of the navigation screen.
Features
A list of all messages will be shown.
New Messages will be at the top. Press the INFO button. The
Select the message you want to read information screen will be shown.
by pressing ENTER.
To open a message:
Press ENTER on the interface
selector, then select New Message
from the navigation system map
menu.
CONTINUED
309
2008 MDX


AcuraLink
Unread messages have a closed Message Options

envelope icon next to them. The icon
disappears when it has already been
read.
NOTE: Only Diagnostic Info

messages overlay the navigation
screen while driving. They indicate if
your vehicle has a problem that may
need immediate attention (see page
315 ).
After purchasing your vehicle,

Select Messages, then select a messages may not appear
message category by pressing immediately. When you open a message, you can
ENTER. Select the message you Your dealer has to register the read a summary of it, and then
want to read and press ENTER. vehicle identification before you can choose one of several options. If an
receive messages. This can take option is not available for a message,
several days to process. that button will not be highlighted.
310
2008 MDX


AcuraLink
Delete Select this button to Find Nearest Acura Dealer Diagnostic Info Select this
delete the current message. Select this button to find the nearest button to get more information about
Acura dealer using the navigation the current diagnostic message. To
Voice Select this button to hear a system. use this option, your cellphone must
voice read the entire message. This be paired with the HFL. In addition,
gives you more information than the Call Your Acura Dealer Select the paired phone must have a
screen can display at one time. When this button to call the Acura dealer compatible data service and be set
you select the Voice button, it you purchased your vehicle from. up with the AcuraLink system to
Features
changes to a Stop Reading button. AcuraLink also directs you to this make a data connection. Access the
Select the button again to stop the dealer so you can schedule a handsfreelink.com website to find
voice. maintenance appointment or receive out which data services are currently
information about a message. If your compatible with AcuraLink.
Call Select this button to call a assigned servicing dealer changes,
phone number embedded in the AcuraLink will reset to call that Message Preferences
message. When you select Call, the dealer. To set your AcuraLink preferences
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) (the types of messages you want to
dials the number for you. receive, if any), visit the Owner Link
website at www.owners.acura.com,
To make a call, your Bluetooth and choose what you would like to
compatible phone must be paired to receive. If you do not have internet
the vehicles HandsFreeLink system, access, call Acura Client Services at
powered on, and located within the (800) 382-2238; they can set your
vehicle (see page 280 ). message preferences for you.
311
2008 MDX


AcuraLink
Deleting Messages To delete all messages: Use the interface knob to scroll to
NOTE: Diagnostic info and recall/ the AcuraLink/Messages button,
campaign messages can only be NOTE: The Delete All Messages and select it by pressing ENTER
deleted by your dealer. command does not apply to on the interface selector.
To delete a single message: Diagnostic Info and Recall messages.
Press the INFO button to bring up They can only be deleted by your Scroll to the Delete Messages
the Information screen. dealer. option, and select it by pressing
Scroll to the Messages option, Press the SETUP button to view
then select it by pressing ENTER the setup screen. Scroll to the category with the
on the interface selector. messages you want to delete, and
Select MORE by pushing the select the category by pressing
Select the message category that interface selector to the right. ENTER on the interface selector.
contains the message you want to
delete.
Use the interface knob to scroll up

or down to the message title you
want to delete, and select it by
selector.
Scroll to Delete with the interface

knob, and select it by pressing
312
2008 MDX


AcuraLink
Message Categories Quick Tips Feature Guide

There are six message categories in
AcuraLink: Quick Tips, Feature
Guides, Maintenance Minders,
Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info,
and Dealer Appointment Reminders.
The system can store up to 256
messages.
Features
Message categories can be added,
revised, or deleted through
broadcast messages from Acura.
These messages, based on updated During the first 90 days of

vehicle information and comments ownership, one of up to 32 different
from other MDX owners, messages appears each day. These
supplement your Owners Manual messages help you to use and
and Quick Start Guide. They provide understand the features of your
you with relevant information for a vehicle.
safe and enjoyable ownership
experience. For additional
information, call Acura Client
Services directly through the HFL.
313
2008 MDX


AcuraLink
Maintenance Minder You can then use the message Recall/Campaigns

options to call your dealer for an
appointment or to find the nearest
dealer.
These messages provide detailed If your vehicle is affected by a recall

information about the service or other important safety
needed for your vehicle. When a information, a letter will be mailed to
maintenance message appears on you about the issue and how to fix it.
the multi-information display, a list of If you dont get your vehicle fixed,
needed maintenance items is you will also receive a reminder
provided through an AcuraLink message through AcuraLink. You
message. These messages tell you can then use the message options to
the exact maintenance needed, call your dealer for an appointment
helping you to avoid unnecessary or to find the nearest dealer.
maintenance costs.
314
2008 MDX


AcuraLink
Diagnostic Info information.)

When an indicator comes on or a
message is displayed on the Multi- Depending on the severity of the
Information Display (MID), problem, the message will let you
AcuraLink can provide information know if you should see your dealer
about the cause of the indicator or immediately or if you can wait until a
message and the recommended later date.
action to address it. This helps you
Features
handle the problem as it occurs,
preventing or limiting costly repairs.
The AcuraLink system cannot

determine some mechanical
problems (such as squeaks or When an indicator comes on or a
rattles) that are not triggered by the message is displayed on the MID,
diagnostic indicator monitors. AcuraLink immediately notifies you
with the message, An indicator is on.
For more information on the AcuraLink can help you decide what
instrument panel indicators, see page to do. If you do not want the
64 . information right away, select the
Check Later option. If you want the
information now, select the Check
Now option. (If the navigation screen
is not active, you must select OK
from the navigation disclaimer
screen before you can check the CONTINUED
315
2008 MDX


AcuraLink
When viewing a diagnostic info Dealer Appointment Reminder

message through the INFO menu,
you can use the Diagnostic Info
button to connect to the Acura
server and retrieve the latest
information regarding the problem.
NOTE: There may not be any

additional information, depending on
the time elapsed since the previous
time you retrieved the information
from the Acura server.
You can then use the message

options to call your dealer for an When you make an appointment
appointment or to find the nearest through the Owners Link Online
dealer. Scheduling Service, you can be
reminded in advance about that
appointment through AcuraLink. If
you need to reschedule, you can call
your dealer directly with the HFL.
The timing of your reminder is

based on your reminder preference
established on Owner Link.
316
2008 MDX


AcuraLink
AcuraLink/Message Screen To access the following functions, New Message Notification

press the SETUP button, push the Select ON if you want to be notified
interface selector to the right to of new messages (envelope icon
select MORE, then rotate the appears on the navigation screen).
interface knob to select AcuraLink/ Select OFF if you do not want to be
Messages. notified of new messages (envelope
icon does not appear on the screen).
Delete Messages Select this Messages can still be accessed using
Features
button to delete all stored messages the INFO menu. If you would like to
within a category, except for stop receiving messages, visit the
diagnostic info and recall campaign OwnerLink website at www.owners.
messages. These messages can only acura.com to change your messaging
be deleted by a certified technician preferences.
after the recall is done or the
problem is corrected, or through a Auto Reading Select ON to have
broadcast message from Acura. the system automatically read each
message to you. Select OFF to
manually select the Voice button
when you want a message read to
you.
317
2008 MDX


AcuraLink
Phone-Data Connection Select To find more information on

this button to begin the process Bluetooth compatible and enabled
required to connect to Acura. This is cell phones, visit
used to access the most recent www.acura.com/handsfreelink or call
diagnostic information when a the Hands Free Link consumer
problem occurs. support at (888) 528-7876. In Canada,
visit www.acura.ca, or call (888) 9-
ACURA-9.
NOTE: For the Phone Data

Connection button to be active, you
need a Bluetooth compatible and
enabled cellphone paired to the
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL).
To complete the data connection
setup, the paired phone must have a
compatible data service.
318
2008 MDX


AcuraLink
Connect to the Acura Server

The default setting is prompt. When
a diagnostic info message appears,
and you select the Check Now
button, the system will prompt you
before connecting to the Acura
server. If you do not wish to connect
at that time, select No at the prompt,
Features
and you will see the information
from the onboard database. The
Auto setting will remove the
prompt when you select the Check
Now button and will automatically
connect to the Acura server. This
setting only applies when you have a
Bluetooth enabled phone that is
paired with the HFL and you have
completed the Phone-Data
Connection setup.
319
2008 MDX


Rearview Camera and Monitor
On vehicles with navigation system Since the rearview camera display

area is limited, you should always
back up slowly and carefully, and
look behind you for obstacles.
Whenever you shift to reverse (R)

with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the rear view is shown
on the navigation system screen.
For the best picture, always keep the

rearview camera clean, and do not
cover the camera lens. To avoid
scratching the lens when you clean it,
use a moist, soft cloth.
320
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 322

vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation .................. 322
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures .......... 323
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling..................................... 323
need to know how to properly store Tighten Fuel Cap Message ...... 324
luggage or packages. The Opening and Closing the
information in this section will help Hood ........................................ 325
you. If you plan to add any Oil Check .................................... 326
accessories to your vehicle, please Engine Coolant Check .............. 326
read the information in this section Fuel Economy ................................ 327
Before Driving
first. Accessories and Modifications .... 330
Carrying Cargo .............................. 332
321
2008 MDX


Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation Use of gasoline with these additives

Help assure your vehicles future Your vehicle is designed to operate may adversely affect performance,
reliability and performance by paying on premium unleaded gasoline with a and cause the malfunction indicator
extra attention to how you drive pump octane of 91 or higher. If this lamp on your instrument panel to
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). octane grade is unavailable, regular come on. If this happens, contact
During this period: unleaded gasoline with a pump your dealer for service.
octane of 87 or higher may be used
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid temporarily. The use of regular Some gasoline today is blended with
acceleration. unleaded gasoline can cause metallic oxygenates such as ethanol or
knocking noises in the engine and MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
Avoid hard braking for the first will result in decreased engine operate on oxygenated gasoline
200 miles (300 km). performance. The long-term use of containing up to 10% ethanol by
regular-grade gasoline can lead to volume and up to 15% MTBE by
Do not change the oil until the engine damage. volume. Do not use gasoline
multi-information display indicates containing methanol.
it is needed. We recommend quality gasolines
containing detergent additives that If you notice any undesirable
Do not tow a trailer. help prevent fuel system and engine operating symptoms, try another
deposits. service station or switch to another
You should also follow these In addition, in order to maintain good brand of gasoline.
recommendations with an performance, fuel economy, and
overhauled or exchanged engine, or emissions control, we strongly For further important fuel-related
when the brakes are replaced. recommend, in areas where it is information, please refer to your
available, the use of gasoline that Quick Start Guide.
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
322
2008 MDX


Service Station Procedures
Refueling If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off even

though the tank is not full, there may
FUEL FILL CAP be a problem with your vehicles fuel
vapor recovery system. The system
TETHER helps keep fuel vapor from going
into the atmosphere. Try filling at
another pump. If this does not fix the
Push
problem, consult your dealer.
Before Driving
Gasoline is highly flammable
HOLDER and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
1. Park with the drivers side closest 3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. when handling fuel.
to the service station pump. You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes. Stop the engine, and keep
2. Open the fuel fill door by pressing Place the cap in the holder on the heat, sparks, and flame away.
the button in the drivers door. (To fuel fill door. Handle fuel only outdoors.
open the fuel fill door manually, Wipe up spills immediately.
see page 446 .) 4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to top off the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
CONTINUED
323
2008 MDX


5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on Tighten Fuel Cap Message replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to
until it clicks at least once. If you another message, press the INFO
do not properly tighten the cap, button. The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
you will see a TIGHTEN FUEL message will appear each time you
CAP message on the multi- restart the engine until the system
information display (see right turns the message off.
column on this page), and the
malfunction indicator lamp may If the system still detects a leak in
also come on (see page 437 ). the vehicles evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
it latches. cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
Your vehicles on board diagnostic clicks at least once. The MIL should
system will detect a loose or missing go off after several days of normal
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system driving once the cap is tightened or
leak. The first time a leak is detected replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message have your vehicle inspected by a
appears on the multi-information dealer. For more information, see
display. Turn the engine off, and page 437 .
confirm the fuel fill cap is installed. If
it is, loosen it, then retighten it until
it clicks at least once. The message
should go off after several days of
normal driving once you tighten or
324
2008 MDX


Opening and Closing the Hood 3. Lift the hood up most of the way.
The hydraulic supports will lift it
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE up the rest of the way and hold it
up.
To close the hood, lower the hood to

about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then press down firmly with
your hands. Make sure it is securely
latched.
Before Driving
LATCH
1. Park the vehicle, and set the 2. Put your fingers under the front
parking brake. Pull the hood edge of the hood near the center.
release handle located under the Slide your hand to your left until
lower left corner of the dashboard. you feel the hood latch handle.
The hood will pop up slightly. Push this handle up until it
releases the hood. Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,

or if you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.
325
2008 MDX


Oil Check Engine Coolant Check

DIPSTICK RESERVE TANK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
MIN
MAX
Wait a few minutes after turning the 4. Remove the dipstick again, and Look at the coolant level in the
engine off before you check the oil. check the level. It should be radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the upper and lower between the MAX and MIN lines. If
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop). marks. it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 396 for
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean If it is near or below the lower mark, information on adding the proper
cloth or paper towel. see Adding Engine Oil on page 393 . coolant.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back Refer to Owner sMaintenance
into its hole. Checks on page 389 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
326
2008 MDX


Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel

Economy Estimates Comparison. City MPG Highway MPG
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments. Combined Fuel Estimated Annual
Economy Fuel Cost
Before Driving
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right (Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA achieved is also provided. Estimated Annual Fuel Cost
estimates include: Provides an estimated annual fuel
Combined Fuel Economy cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
City MPG Represents urban Represents a combination of city and km) per year multiplied by the cost
driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A highway driving. The scale per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
range of miles per gallon achieved is represents the range of combined data) divided by the combined fuel
also provided. fuel economy for other vehicles in economy.
the class.
Highway MPG Represents a For more information on fuel
mixture of rural and interstate economy ratings and factors that
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle, affect fuel economy, visit www.
typical of longer trips in free-flowing fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www.
traffic. A range of miles per gallon vehicles.gc.ca)
327
2008 MDX


Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscosity Observe the speed limit
The following factors can lower your motor oil, displaying the API Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
vehicles fuel economy: Certification Seal (see page on fuel mileage at speeds above 45
Aggressive driving (hard 393). mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
acceleration and braking) Maintain proper tire inflation speed and you reduce the drag.
Excessive idling, accelerating and An under-inflated tire increases Trailers, car top carriers, roof
braking in stop-and-go traffic rolling resistance, which reduces racks and bike racks are also big
Cold engine operation (engines fuel economy. contributors to increased drag.
are more efficient when warmed Avoid carrying excess weight in Always drive in the highest gear
up) your vehicle It puts a heavier possible If your vehicle has a
Driving with a heavy load or the load on the engine, increasing fuel manual transmission, you can
air conditioner running consumption. boost your fuel economy by up
Improperly inflated tires Keep your vehicle clean In shifting as early as possible.
particular, a build-up of snow or Avoid excessive idling Idling
Improving Fuel Economy mud on your vehicles underside results in 0 miles per gallon.
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Vehicle Maintenance Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
A properly maintained vehicle economy.
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce Drive Efficiently
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance Drive moderately Rapid
messages displayed on the acceleration, abrupt cornering,
information display (see Owner s and hard braking increase fuel
Maintenance Checks on page 389 ). consumption.
For example:
328
2008 MDX


Fuel Economy
Minimize the use of the air Checking Your Fuel Economy

conditioning system The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible. Gallons of Miles per
Plan and combine trips Miles driven fuel Gallon
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
Before Driving
100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km
Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy. 1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking 2) Reset trip counter to zero.
fuel gauge readings are NOT 3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
accurate measures of fuel economy. 4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles.
329
2008 MDX


Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:

some non-Acura accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before Improper accessories or Make sure the accessory does not
you make any modifications or add modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
any accessories, be sure to read the vehicles handling, stability, and with proper vehicle operation or
following information. performance, and cause a performance.
crash in which you can be hurt
Accessories or killed. Be sure electronic accessories do
Your dealer has Acura accessories not overload electrical circuits
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this (see page 440 ) or interfere with
vehicle. These accessories have owners manual regarding proper operation of your vehicle.
been designed and approved for your accessories and modifications.
vehicle, and are covered by warranty. Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
Although non-Acura accessories may When properly installed, cellular windows. Accessories installed in
fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and these areas may interfere with
meet factory specifications, and low-powered audio systems should proper operation of the side
could adversely affect your vehicles not interfere with your vehicles curtain airbags.
handling and stability. computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and Before installing any electronic
tire pressure monitoring system. accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
330
2008 MDX


Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle Larger or smaller wheels and tires

Removing parts from your vehicle, can interfere with the operation of
or replacing components with your vehicles anti-lock brakes and
aftermarket components could other systems.
seriously affect your vehicles
handling, stability, and reliability. Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicles
Some examples are: safety features can make the
Lowering your vehicle with a systems ineffective.
non-Acura suspension kit that
Before Driving
significantly reduces ground If you plan to modify your vehicle,
clearance can allow the consult your dealer.
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a non-

Acura suspension kit can affect
the handling and stability.
Non-Acura wheels, because they

are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
331
2008 MDX


Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT storage areas:
GLOVE BOX DOOR POCKETS Glove box

REAR COMPARTMENT Door and seat-back pockets
Rear cargo area, including the
second and third row seats when
folded flat
Console compartment
Storage compartment
Rear compartment
Roof-rack (if equipped)
However, carrying too much cargo,

or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicles handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
STORAGE COMPARTMENT SEAT-BACK POCKETS
CARGO AREA
332
2008 MDX


Carrying Cargo
Load Limits (4)The resulting figure equals the

The maximum load for your vehicle available amount of cargo and
is 1,158 lbs (525 kg). Overloading or improper luggage load capacity. For
loading can affect handling and example, if the XXX amount
See Tire And Loading Information stability and cause a crash in equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
label attached to the drivers which you can be hurt or killed. five 150 lb. passengers in your
doorjamb. vehicle, the amount of available
Follow all load limits and other cargo and luggage load capacity is
Label Example loading guidelines in this 650 lbs.
manual. (1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)
Before Driving
Steps for Determining Correct Load (5)Determine the combined weight
Limit of luggage and cargo being loaded
(1)Locate the statement The on the vehicle. That weight may
combined weight of occupants and not safely exceed the available
cargo should never exceed XXX cargo and luggage load capacity
kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicles calculated in Step 4.
This figure includes the total weight placard.
of all occupants, cargo, and (6)If your vehicle will be towing a
accessories, and the tongue load if (2)Determine the combined weight trailer, load from your trailer will
you are towing a trailer. of the driver and passengers that be transferred to your vehicle.
will be riding in your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
(3)Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity of
the driver and passengers from your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
333
2008 MDX


Carrying Cargo
In addition, the total weight of the

vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
Example 1 not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Max Load (1,158 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs) (858 lbs) Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
are on a label on the drivers
doorjamb.
Example 2
Max Load (1,158 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs) (558 lbs)
Example 3
Max Load (1,158 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs) (408 lbs)
334
2008 MDX


Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area If you carry large items that
Compartment or on a Roof Rack prevent you from closing the
Store or secure all items that could Distribute cargo evenly on the tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
be thrown around and hurt floor of the cargo area, placing the passenger area. To avoid the
someone during a crash. heaviest items on the bottom and possibility of carbon monoxide
as far forward as possible. Tie poisoning, follow the instructions
Be sure items placed on the floor down items that could be thrown on page 58 .
behind the front seats cannot roll about the vehicle during a crash or
underneath and interfere with the sudden stop. If you carry any items on a roof
proper operation of the seats, the rack, be sure the total weight of
Before Driving
sensors under the seats, or the If you fold down the second or the rack and the items does not
drivers ability to operate the third row seats, tie down items exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
pedals. that could be thrown about the
vehicle during a crash or sudden If you use an accessory roof rack,
Also, keep all cargo below the stop. the roof rack weight limit may be
bottom of the windows. If it is lower. Refer to the information
higher, it could interfere with the that came with your roof rack.
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Keep the glove box closed while

driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
335
2008 MDX


Carrying Cargo
Optional Separation Net Cargo Hooks

The separation net can be used to
hold back soft, lightweight items GROCERY HOOKS
stored in the cargo area. Heavy
items should be tied down, as the net
may not prevent them from being
thrown about the vehicle in a crash
or a sudden stop.
Optional Cargo Cover

The cargo cover can be used to
cover the cargo area behind the third CARGO
row seats. When the third row seats HOOKS
are folded down, the cargo cover can
be extended over the larger area. Do The four hooks on the side panels Your vehicle also has a grocery hook
not install the cover over the larger can be used to install a net for on each side panel in the cargo area.
area if the third row seats are not securing items. Each hook is They are designed to hold light
folded down. designed to hold up to 50 lbs (23 kg) items. Heavy objects may damage
of weight. the hook. Make sure any items put
on each hook weigh less than 6.5 lbs
(3 kg).
336
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Driving
This section gives you tips on Driving Guidelines ......................... 338

starting the engine under various Preparing to Drive ......................... 338
conditions, and how to operate the Starting the Engine........................ 339
automatic transmission. It also Check Starting System
includes important information on Message .................................. 340
parking your vehicle, the braking Automatic Transmission............... 341
system, the super handling-all wheel Super Handling-All Wheel Drive
drive (SH-AWD) system, the vehicle (SH-AWD) System .................... 348
stability assist (VSA) system, active Parking ............................................ 350
damper system, the tire pressure Tire Pressure Monitoring System
monitoring system (TPMS), and (TPMS) ....................................... 351
facts you need if you are planning to Braking System.............................. 356
Driving
tow a trailer or drive off-high way. Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 357
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System......................................... 359
Active Damper System ................. 361
Towing a Trailer ............................ 363
Trailer Stability Assist ................... 375
Off-Highway Driving
Guidelines ................................... 377
337
2008 MDX


Driving Guidelines, Preparing to Drive
Driving Guidelines Do not modify your vehicle in any Preparing to Drive

Your vehicle has higher ground way that would raise the center of You should do the following checks
clearance that allows you to travel gravity. and adjustments before you drive
over bumps, obstacles, and rough your vehicle.
terrain. It also provides good Do not carry heavy cargo on the
visibility so you can anticipate roof. 1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
problems earlier. and outside lights are clean and
See page 377 for off-highway driving unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
Because your vehicle rides higher guidelines. or ice.
off the ground, it has a high center
of gravity that can cause it to roll 2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher 3. Visually check the tires. If a tire
roll over rate than other types of looks low, use a gauge to check its
vehicles. pressure.
To prevent rollovers or loss of 4. Check that any items you may be

control: carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger 5. Check the seat adjustment (see
vehicle. page 140 ).
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt

maneuvers whenever possible.
338
2008 MDX


Preparing to Drive, Starting the Engine
6. Check the adjustment of the Starting the Engine starter motor runs for about 6 to 9
inside and outside mirrors (see Your vehicles starting system has an seconds until the engine starts.
page 154 ). auto control mode. When you turn
the ignition switch to the START If you hold the ignition switch in
7. Check the steering wheel (III) position, this feature keeps the the START (III) position for more
adjustment (see page 124 ). engines starter motor running until than 7 seconds, the starter motor,
the engine starts. Follow these depending on the outside
8. Make sure the doors and tailgate instructions to start the engine: temperature, runs for about 10 to
are securely closed and locked. 25 seconds until the engine starts.
1. Apply the parking brake.
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that If the engine does not start, wait at
your passengers have fastened 2. In cold weather, turn off all least 10 seconds before trying
Driving
their seat belts (see page 15 ). electrical accessories to reduce again.
the drain on the battery.
10. When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the 3. Make sure the shift lever is in
instrument panel, and the Park. Press on the brake pedal. The immobilizer system protects your
messages on the multi-information vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-
display (see pages 63 , 72 and 4. Without touching the accelerator coded key (or other device) is used, the
81 ). pedal, turn the ignition switch to engines f uel system is disabled. For
the START (III) position, then more inf ormation, see page 128 .
release the ignition switch. You do
not need to hold the ignition
switch in the START (III) position
to start the engine. Depending on
the outside temperature, the CONTINUED
339
2008 MDX


Starting the Engine
5. If the engine does not start within Check Starting System Message If this message is on, the ignition
15 seconds, or starts but stalls switch has to be held in the
right away, repeat step 4 with the START (III) position manually
accelerator pedal pressed halfway until the engine starts. The
down. If the engine starts, release ignition switch can be held in that
pressure on the accelerator pedal position up to 15 seconds.
so the engine does not race.
Even though you may be able to
6. If the engine fails to start, press start the engine manually without
the accelerator pedal all the way the auto control mode of the starting
down, and hold it there while system, have your dealer inspect
starting to clear flooding. If the your vehicle.
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
If there is a problem with the
starting system, you will see a
CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
The engine is harder to start in cold message on the multi-information
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at display when the ignition switch is
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400 turned to the ON (II) position. You
meters) adds to this problem. will also see this message when the
auto control mode of the starting
system has a problem.
340
2008 MDX


Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators The D indicator comes on for a Shifting

few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp

comes on along with the D
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
Driving
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
These indicators on the instrument To shift from Park to any position,
panel show which position the shift When the D indicator warns of a press firmly on the brake pedal, and
lever is in. In the Sequential possible problem with the press the release button on the front
SportShift Mode, the M indicator transmission, you will see a CHECK of the shift lever, then move the
next to the D indicator comes on, TRANSMISSION message on the lever. You cannot shift out of Park
and the illuminated number under multi-information display (see page when the ignition switch is in the
the charging system indicator shows 82 ). LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
you the gear you have selected. position.
CONTINUED
341
2008 MDX


To avoid transmission damage, come Drive (D) Use this position for
To shift from: Do this: to a complete stop before shifting your normal driving. The
Press the brake pedal, and into Park. The shift lever must be in transmission automatically selects a
P to R press the shift lever release Park before you can remove the key suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
button. from the ignition switch. speed and acceleration. You may
R to P Press the shift lever release notice the transmission shifting up at
N to R button. Reverse (R) Press the brake higher engine speeds when the
D to D3 pedal and press the release button engine is cold. This helps the engine
D3 to D on the front of the shift lever to shift warm up faster.
D to N Move the shift lever. from Park to reverse. To shift from
N to D reverse to neutral, come to a
R to N complete stop, and then shift. Press
the release button before shifting
Park (P) This position mechani- into reverse from neutral.
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or Neutral (N) Use neutral if you
starting the engine. To shift out of need to restart a stalled engine, or if
Park, you must press on the brake it is necessary to stop briefly with
pedal and press the release button the engine idling. Shift to the Park
on the shift lever. Make sure your position if you need to leave your
foot is off the accelerator pedal. vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
If you have done all of the above and the shift lever from neutral to
still cannot move the lever out of another gear.
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 346 .
342
2008 MDX


Sequential SportShift Mode When you accelerate away from a

stop, the transmission starts in first
() UP SHIFT gear. You have to manually upshift
between first and fifth gears. Make
sure you upshift before the engine
speed reaches the tachometers red
zone.
The transmission remains in the
selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There
is no automatic downshift when you
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor.
Driving
SELECTED GEAR () DOWN SHIFT
With the shift lever in D position, To enter the Sequential SportShift

you can select the Sequential mode, move the shift lever further to
SportShift mode to shift gears much the drivers side. To return to D,
like a manual transmission, but move the shift lever to the
without a clutch pedal. passengers side.
In Sequential SportShift mode, each
When you move the shift lever from time you push forward on the shift
D to M position, the display lever, the transmission shifts to a
shows the selected gear. higher gear. Pull back on the lever to
downshift. The number of the gear
selected is displayed on the
instrument panel. CONTINUED
343
2008 MDX


The transmission may automatically Downshifting gives you more power If you try to manually downshift at a
downshift from the higher gear to when climbing, and provides engine speed that would cause the engine to
the lower gear under these braking when going down a steep hill. exceed the redline in a lower gear,
conditions: the transmission does not downshift.
The transmission also shifts The gear indicator will flash the
Driving on level roads and downhill automatically as the vehicle comes to number of the lower gear several
a complete stop. It downshifts to first times, then return to the higher gear.
To shift from Speed range gear when the vehicle speed is under
10 mph (16 km/h). If the vehicle speed slows to below
43 under 19 mph the redline of the selected lower gear
(31 km/h) position while the indicator is
flashing, the transmission
54 under 38 mph downshifts, and the display shows
(60 km/h) the selected lower gear.
Driving uphill
To shift from Speed range
43 under 34 mph
(55 km/h)
54 under 47 mph
(75 km/h)
344
2008 MDX


The table shows the speed ranges Starting in Second Gear

for upshifting and downshifting. To shift from Speed range When you are in Sequential
SportShift mode, and the vehicle is
32 under 60 mph stopped, push forward on the shift
To shift from Speed range (96 km/h) lever to shift to second gear. You
will see 2 in the display. Starting
12 over 0 mph 43 under 93 mph out in second gear will help to
(0 km/h) (150 km/h) reduce wheelspin in deep snow or
on a slippery surface.
23 over 10 mph 54 under 118 mph
(16 km/h) (190 km/h) If you start out in second gear, the
transmission will be fixed in that
Driving
34 over 19 mph gear.
(31 km/h)
The transmission will not
45 over 37 mph automatically downshift to first gear
(60 km/h) even when the vehicle speed is
under 10 mph (16 km/h). You need
to shift down to first gear manually.
CONTINUED
345
2008 MDX


Drive (D3) This position is Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock Release
similar to D, except only the first If you exceed the maximum speed This allows you to move the shift
three gears are selected. Use D3 for the gear you are in, the engine lever out of Park if the normal
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain, speed will enter into the tachometers method of pushing on the brake
or to provide engine braking when red zone. If this occurs, you may feel pedal and pressing the release
going down a steep hill. D3 can also the engine cut in and out. This is button does not work.
keep the transmission from cycling caused by a limiter in the engines
between third, fourth, and fifth gears computer controls. The engine will 1. Set the parking brake.
in stop-and-go driving. run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone. 2. Remove the key from the ignition
For faster acceleration when in D3 or switch.
D, you can get the transmission to Before downshifting, make sure the
automatically downshift by pushing engine will not go into the
the accelerator pedal to the floor. tachometers red zone.
The transmission will shift down one,
two, or three gears, depending on
your speed.
346
2008 MDX


6. Remove the key from the shift

RELEASE lock release slot, then reinstall the
BUTTON cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the drivers side. Press
the brake pedal, and restart the
engine.
If you need to use the shift lock

release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Driving
COVER SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift 4. Insert a key into the shift lock
lock release slot cover. Use a small release slot.
flat-tipped screwdriver or metal
fingernail file to carefully pry up 5. Push down on the key while you
the edge of the cover and remove press the release button on the
it from the slot. front of the shift lever and move
the shift lever out of Park to
neutral.
347
2008 MDX


Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD ) System
The super handling-all wheel drive SH-AWD Torque Distribution Each torque indicator is displayed
(SH-AWD) system is a full time all- Monitor as a bar graph divided into 5
wheel-drive system that segments. The number of
automatically controls and transfers TORQUE INDICATOR
segments represents the amount
varying amounts of engine torque to of torque distributed to each
all wheels independently, according wheel.
to the driving conditions.
When there is only a slight change in
While the SH-AWD system helps to torque distribution while driving,
enhance the vehicles driving such as cruising on level roads at the
stability in all situations, it is still same speed, the torque distribution
your responsibility to drive and monitor may stop displaying the
corner at reasonable speeds and to TORQUE INDICATOR amount of torque. This is not a
leave a sufficient margin of safety. system problem. The monitor will
show the amount if the system
The SH-AWD torque distribution senses any change in torque
monitor on the multi-information distribution.
display shows you the amount of
torque being sent to the wheels.
Each wheel: right front (RF), left
front (LF), right rear (RR), and left
rear (LR), has its own torque
indicator.
348
2008 MDX


Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) System
Your vehicle still has normal front-

wheel drive with vehicle stability
assist (VSA), but does not have
the advantages of SH-AWD. Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer
as soon as possible.
Driving
If the SH-AWD indicator blinks while checked.
driving, it indicates the differential
temperature is too high. You will also If the SH-AWD indicator on the
see an SH-AWD DIFF TEMP. instrument panel stays on, and the
HIGH message on the multi- CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM
information display. If this happens, message also appears on the multi-
pull to the side of the road when it is information display, there is problem
safe, shift to Park, and let the engine with the SH-AWD system.
idle until the indicator goes out. If
the indicator does not go out, take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
349
2008 MDX


Parking
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips Never park over dry leaves, tall
you park your vehicle. Make sure Make sure the moonroof and the grass, or other flammable
the parking brake is set firmly, or windows are closed. materials. The hot three way
your vehicle may roll if it is parked catalytic converter could cause
on an incline. Turn off the lights. these materials to catch on fire.
Set the parking brake before you put Place any packages, valuables, etc. If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the transmission in Park. This keeps in the cargo area or take them the front wheels away from the
the vehicle from moving and putting with you. curb.
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission. Lock the doors and the tailgate. If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
Check the indicator on the

instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Make sure the parking brake is

fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
350
2008 MDX


Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire Low Tire Pressure/ If you think you can safely drive a
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) TPMS Indicator short distance to a service station,
that turns on every time you start the When the low tire pressure/TPMS proceed slowly to the station, then
engine and monitors the pressure in indicator is on, one or more of your inflate the tire to the recommended
your tires while driving. tires is significantly underinflated. pressure.
You should stop and check your tires
Each tire has its own pressure as soon as possible, and inflate them If the tire is flat, or if the tire
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire to the proper pressure as indicated pressure is too low to continue
becomes significantly low, the on the vehicles tire information driving, replace the tire with the
sensor in that tire immediately sends placard. compact spare tire (see page 425 ).
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator in the It is possible that the pressures Driving on a significantly under-
Driving
instrument panel to come on. If this shown on the multi-information inflated tire causes the tire to
happens, you will see which tire is display and the pressures you overheat and can lead to tire failure.
losing pressure on the multi- manually measure are slightly Under-inflation also reduces fuel
information display along with a different. efficiency and tire tread life, and may
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE If the difference is significant or you affect the vehicles handling and
message. cannot make the low tire pressure/ stopping ability.
TPMS indicator and message on the
multi-information display go out after Because tire pressure varies by
inflating the tires to the specified temperature and other conditions,
values, have your dealer check the the low tire pressure/TPMS
system as soon as possible. indicator may come on unexpectedly.
CONTINUED
351
2008 MDX


For example, if you check and fill Although your tire pressure is Tire Pressure Monitor
your tires in a warm area, then drive monitored, you must manually check
in extremely cold weather, the tire the tire pressures monthly.
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated Each tire, including the spare, should
and cause the low tire pressure/ be checked monthly when the
TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if vehicle is cold, and set to the
you check and adjust your tire recommended inflation pressure as
pressure in cooler conditions, and specified on the vehicle placard and
drive into extremely hot conditions, in the owners manual (see page
the tire may become overinflated. 416 ).
However, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator will not come on if
the tires are overinflated.
To select the tire pressure monitor,
Refer to page 415 for tire inflation press the INFO button several times
guidelines. with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
this indicator begins to flash. It stops You will see the above display on the
flashing after approximately 1 multi-information display when all
minute, then stays on. You will also tire pressures are normal.
see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM
message on the multi-information
display (see page 82 ).
352
2008 MDX


Driving
This shows that front left tire is
U.S. model Canadian model losing pressure.
To see the inflation pressures of all Each tire pressure is shown in PSI Each tire has its own pressure
four tires, press the SEL/RESET (U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadian sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
button. The display changes as models). becomes significantly low, the
shown above. sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator in the
instrument panel to come on. If this
happens, you will see which tire is
losing pressure on the multi-
information display along with a
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
message. CONTINUED
353
2008 MDX


TPMS System Failure
If any of the tires has low pressure, If there is a problem with the TPMS, If there is a problem with the TPMS,
the tire pressure monitor also shows the tire pressure monitor shows a you will see the above message on
above message to warn you about SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR the multi-information display.
the low tire pressure when you select message and the tire pressure
the display by pressing the INFO readings are not displayed. If this If you see this message, the system
button several times. Following this happens, you will first see a system is off and is not monitoring the tire
display, press the SEL/RESET warning message CHECK TPMS pressures. Have the system checked
button to see each tire pressure. SYSTEM on the multi-information by your dealer as soon as possible.
When you continue driving after display.
installing the spare tire, you will also Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS
see this message on the multi- indicator begins to flash, then stays
information display. on (see page 352 ).
354
2008 MDX


If the low tire pressure/TPMS After the flat tire is replaced with the your tires serviced by your dealer or
indicator comes on, or the multi- spare tire, the low tire pressure/ a qualified technician.
information display shows a TPMS indicator stays on while Never use a puncture-repairing agent
CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message, driving. After several miles in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
the VSA system automatically turns (kilometers) driving, this indicator replace the tire pressure sensor.
on even when the VSA system is begins to flash, then stays on again. Have the flat tire repaired by your
turned off by pressing the VSA OFF You will also see a CHECK TPMS dealer as soon as possible.
switch (see page 360 ). If this SYSTEM message on the multi-
happens, you cannot turn the VSA information display. This is normal;
system off by pressing the VSA OFF the system cannot monitor the spare
switch again. tire pressure. Manually check the
spare tire pressure to be sure it is
Driving
When you restart the vehicle with correct.
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
system message will also be This indicator and the warning
displayed on the multi-information message on the multi-information
display after several miles display will go off, after several miles
(kilometers) driving. (kilometers) driving, when the spare
tire is replaced with the specified
Changing a Tire with TPMS regular tire equipped with the tire
If you have a flat tire, the low tire pressure monitor sensor.
pressure/TPMS and tire monitor Each wheel is equipped with a tire
indicators will come on. Replace the pressure sensor mounted inside the
indicated flat tire with the compact tire behind the valve stem. You must
spare tire (see page 425 ). use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have CONTINUED
355
2008 MDX


Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Braking System
As required by the FCC: Braking System Constant application of the brakes

This device complies with Part 15 of the Your vehicle is equipped with disc when going down a long hill builds
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the brakes at all four wheels. A power up heat and reduces their effective-
following two conditions: (1) This device assist helps reduce the effort needed ness. Use the engine to assist the
may not cause harmful interference, and on the brake pedal. The emergency brakes by taking your foot off the
(2) this device must accept any brake assist system increases the accelerator and downshifting to a
interference received, including stopping force when you depress the lower gear.
interference that may cause undesired brake pedal hard in an emergency
operation. situation. The anti-lock brake system Check the brakes after driving
Changes or modifications not expressly (ABS) helps you retain steering through deep water. Apply the
approved by the party responsible for control when braking very hard. brakes moderately to see if they feel
compliance could void the users normal. If not, apply them gently and
authority to operate the equipment. Resting your foot on the pedal keeps frequently until they do. Be extra
This device complies with Industry the brakes applied lightly, builds up cautious in your driving.
Canada Standard RSS-210. heat, and reduces their effectiveness
Operation is subject to the following two and reduces brake pad life. In
conditions: (1) this device may not cause addition, fuel economy can be
interference, and (2) this device must reduced. It also keeps your brake
accept any interference that may cause lights on all the time, confusing
undesired operation of the device. drivers behind you.
356
2008 MDX


Braking System, Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Braking System Design Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake
The hydraulic system that operates The anti-lock brake system (ABS) pedal when the ABS activates, and
the brakes has two separate circuits. helps prevent the wheels from may hear some noise. This is normal:
Each circuit works diagonally across locking up, and helps you retain it is the ABS rapidly pumping the
the vehicle (the left-front brake is steering control by pumping the brakes. On dry pavement, you will
connected with the right-rear brake, brakes rapidly, much faster than a need to press on the brake pedal
etc.). If one circuit should develop a person can do it. very hard before the ABS activates.
problem, you will still have braking However, you may feel the ABS
at two wheels. The electronic brake distribution activate immediately if you are trying
(EBD) system, which is part of the to stop on snow or ice.
Brake Wear Indicators ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
All four brakes have audible brake braking distribution according to
Driving
wear indicators. vehicle loading.
If the brake pads need replacing, you You should never pump the brake pedal.
will hear a distinctive, metallic Let the ABS work for you by always
screeching sound when you apply keeping firm, steady pressure on the
the brake pedal. If you do not have brake pedal. This is sometimes
the brake pads replaced, they will referred to as stomp and steer.
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
357
2008 MDX


Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS Indicator If the ABS indicator and the brake Important Safety Reminders
system indicator come on together, ABS does not reduce the time or
If this indicator comes on, the anti- and the parking brake is fully distance it takes to stop the
lock function of the braking system released, the EBD system may also vehicle. It only helps with steering
has shut down. The brakes still work be shut down. control during braking.
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have Test your brakes as instructed on ABS will not prevent a skid that
your dealer inspect your vehicle as page 438 . If the brakes feel normal, results from changing direction
soon as possible. drive slowly and have your vehicle abruptly, such as trying to take a
repaired by your dealer as soon as corner too fast or making a sudden
You will also see a CHECK ABS possible. Avoid sudden hard braking lane change. Always drive at a safe
SYSTEM message on the multi- which could cause the rear wheels to speed for the road and weather
information display (see page 81 ). lock up and possibly lead to a loss of conditions.
control.
If the indicator comes on while ABS cannot prevent a loss of
driving, test the brakes as instructed The VSA indicator will come on stability. Always steer moderately
on page 438 . along with the ABS indicator. when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
A vehicle with ABS may require a

longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock.
358
2008 MDX


Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA) VSA Activation Indicator You will also see a CHECK VSA
system helps to stabilize the vehicle SYSTEM message on the multi-
during cornering if the vehicle turns When VSA activates, you will see the information display if there is a
more or less than desired. It also VSA activation indicator blink. problem with the VSA system.
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or Vehicle Stability Assist If the low tire pressure/TPMS
slippery road surfaces. It does this (VSA) System Indicator indicator comes on, or the multi-
by regulating the engines output and If this indicator comes on while information display shows a
by selectively applying the brakes. driving, pull to the side of the road CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message,
when it is safe, and turn off the the VSA system automatically turns
When VSA activates, you may notice engine. Reset the system by on even when the VSA system is
that the engine does not respond to restarting the engine. If the VSA turned off by pressing the VSA OFF
Driving
the accelerator in the same way it system indicator stays on or comes switch (see page 360 ). If this
does at other times. There may also back on while driving, have the VSA happens, you cannot turn the VSA
be some noise from the VSA system inspected by your dealer. system off by pressing the VSA OFF
hydraulic system. You will also see switch again.
the VSA activation indicator blink. If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to Without VSA, your vehicle will have
The VSA system cannot enhance the the ON (II) position, there may be a normal braking and cornering ability,
vehicles driving stability in all problem with the VSA system. Have but it will not have VSA traction and
situations and does not control your your dealer inspect your vehicle as stability enhancement.
vehicles entire braking system. It is soon as possible.
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
359
2008 MDX


Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Off Switch VSA is turned on every time you VSA and Tire Sizes
start the engine, even if you turned it Driving with varying tire or wheel
off the last time you drove the sizes may cause the VSA to
vehicle. malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
In certain unusual conditions when and type as your original tires (see
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow page 419 ).
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily If you install winter tires, make sure
switched off. When the VSA system they are the same size as those that
is off, the traction control system is were originally supplied with your
also off. You should only attempt to vehicle. Exercise the same caution
free your vehicle with the VSA off if during winter driving as you would if
you are not able to free it when the your vehicle was not equipped with
This switch is under the drivers side VSA is on. VSA.
vent. To turn the VSA system on and
off, press and hold it until you hear a Immediately after freeing your
beep. vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
When VSA is off, the VSA activation your vehicle with the VSA and
indicator comes on as a reminder. traction control systems switched off.
With the VSA off, the trailer stability
assist function is also turned off (see
page 375 ).
360
2008 MDX


Active Damper System
U.S. Sport Packages and Canadian Elite The system provides two selectable
models modes.
The active damper system is always
on, constantly adjusting your vehicles Sport mode: The system prioritizes
dampers to the best settings for handling response, vehicle body
current road conditions along with control and tire-to-road adhesion to
vehicle speed and handling inputs. allow for higher performance
handling.
The system uses electrically
controlled dampers to enhance Comfort mode: The system
handling precision, vehicle prioritizes road isolation to allow for
composure, tire to road adhesion and a more comfortable ride.
Driving
rough road ride comfort isolation.
The system reacts to inputs from Either mode can be used in any type To switch between comfort and
various electronic sensors to give of operating conditions. sport mode, press and release the
exactly the right amount of active damper system button located
suspension damping to provide on the center console to choose the
optimal ride comfort and handling. desired mode.
CONTINUED
361
2008 MDX



Indicator
If there is a problem with the active
damper system, the active damper
system shuts down and the active
damper system indicator on the
instrument panel comes on.
When comfort mode is selected, the When sport mode is selected, the
green indicator in the button comes green indicator in the button goes off,
ON, and the message COMFORT and the message SPORT will
will appear on the multi-information appear on the multi-information
display for five seconds. display for five seconds.
You will also see the CHECK ADS

SYSTEM message appears on the
multi-information display.
362
2008 MDX


Active Damper System, Towing a Trailer
If you see this warning indicator and Towing a Trailer

message, have your vehicle checked Your vehicle has been designed
at your dealer as soon as possible. primarily to carry passengers and Exceeding any load limit or
their cargo. You can also use it to improperly loading your vehicle
In this case, your vehicle still has the tow a trailer if you carefully observe and trailer can cause a crash in
normal damper function, but it will the load limits, use the proper which you can be seriously hurt
not have the active damper function. equipment, and follow the guidelines or killed.
in this section.
Check the loading of your
Break-In Period vehicle and trailer carefully
Avoid towing a trailer during your before starting to drive.
vehicles first 600 miles (1,000 km)
Driving
(see page 322 ).
Be sure to read the Off-Highway

Driving Guidelines section on page
377 if you plan to tow off paved
surfaces.
Your vehicle is equipped with a

trailer stability assist to help stabilize
the vehicle/trailer combination by
reducing the vehicle speed. For
more information, see page 375 .
363
2008 MDX


Towing a Trailer
Load Limit and cause it to sway.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) The maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo
and the tongue load is 5,952 lbs
(2,700 kg).
Gross Axle Weight Ratings

(GAWR) The maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo,
and the tongue load must not exceed
Total Trailer Weight Tongue Load 2,888 lbs (1,310 kg) on the front axle,
The maximum allowable weight of The weight that the tongue of a fully and 3,175 lbs (1,440 kg) on the rear
the trailer and everything in or on it loaded trailer puts on the hitch axle.
depends on the number of occupants should be 5 to 10 percent of the total
in your vehicle and the type of trailer trailer weight for boat trailers, and 8 Gross Combined Weight Rating
being towed (see page 366 ). to 15 percent of total trailer weight (GCWR) The maximum
for all other trailers. (See page allowable weight of the fully loaded
Towing a trailer that is too heavy can 366 for limits for your towing vehicle and trailer is 10,053 lbs
seriously affect your vehicles situation). Too much tongue load (4,560 kg) with the proper hitch. The
handling and performance. It can reduces front-tire traction and GCWR must be reduced 2 percent
also damage the engine and steering control. Too little tongue for every 1,000 feet (305 meters) of
drivetrain. load can make the trailer unstable elevation.
364
2008 MDX


Towing a Trailer
Estimating Loads To Estimate the Tongue Load MDX and Technology Packages models
The best way to confirm that all 1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
loads are within limits is to check If the Estimated
them at a public scale. For public 2. Measure and record the distance difference is: tongue load is:
scales in your area, check your local from the ground to the bottom of
phone book, or contact your trailer the trailer hitch. 13/32 150 lbs (68 kg)
dealer or rental agency for 11/16 250 lbs (114 kg)
assistance. 3. Connect the fully loaded trailer to 31/32 350 lbs (159 kg)
the hitch. 1 1/4 450 lbs (205 kg)
To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,
or if you cannot get to a public scale, 4. Measure again from the ground to
we recommend that you estimate the same spot on the bottom of the U.S. Sport Packages and Canadian Elite
Driving
your total trailer weight and tongue hitch. models
load as described next.
5. Subtract the second measurement If the Estimated
To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight from the first measurement, then difference is: tongue load is:
Add the weight of your trailer (as refer to the following table.
quoted by the manufacturer) with 1/2 150 lbs (68 kg)
everything in or on the trailer. Then 27/32 250 lbs (114 kg)
check the tables on page 366 to 1 5/32 350 lbs (159 kg)
make sure you do not exceed the 1 1/2 450 lbs (205 kg)
limit for your conditions.
If the difference is more than 1
inch, you have too much load on the
tongue. Redistribute the load or
remove cargo as needed.
365
2008 MDX


Towing a Trailer
Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:

Number of Maximum Total Trailer Weight Maximum Tongue Load
Occupants
2 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) 500 lbs (227 kg)
3 4,750 lbs (2,155 kg) 470 lbs (213 kg)
4 4,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 370 lbs (168 kg)
5 4,250 lbs (1,928 kg) 275 lbs (125 kg)
6 4,000 lbs (1,814 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
7 Towing is Not Recommended

The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg),
and each has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cargo area. Any additional weight, including cargo or accessories, reduces the maximum trailer
weight and maximum tongue load. Never exceed the gross axle weight ratings (see page 364 ).

Recommended tongue load should be 515% of the total trailer weight for boat trailers, and 815% of the total trailer weight for all other
trailers.
366
2008 MDX


Towing a Trailer
Checking Loads
To accurately check your loads at
the public scale, the vehicle and
trailer should be fully loaded, and all
occupants should stay in the vehicle
while the attendant watches the
scale.
2. Check the gross vehicle weight. 5. Check the gross combined weight.
Limit: 5,952 lbs (2,700 kg) Limit: 10,053 lbs (4,560 kg)
Remember, maximum gross
3. Check the rear gross axle weight. combined weight should be
Limit: 3,175 lbs (1,440 kg) decreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet
Driving
(305 meters) of elevation.
4. If you cannot weigh the rear axle
1. Check the front gross axle weight. directly, you can calculate the rear
Limit: 2,888 lbs (1,310 kg) gross axle weight by subtracting
the weight in step 1 from the
weight in step 2.
Limit: 3,064 lbs (1,390 kg)
CONTINUED
367
2008 MDX


Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and

Accessories
Towing generally requires a variety
of supplemental equipment. To
ensure the best quality, we
recommend that you purchase Acura
equipment whenever possible.
Your dealer offers a trailer package

6. Check the weight of the hitched 7. Check the weight of the unhitched that includes a hitch, a ball mount,
trailer. Write this number down. trailer. Limit: See page 366 . and a wiring harness.
8. Calculate the tongue load. Discuss any additional needs with

Subtract the weight in step 6 from your trailer sales or rental agency,
the weight in step 7. and make sure all equipment is
Limit: See page 366 . properly installed, maintained, and
Recommended: see page 364 . also meets state, federal, province,
Range: 5-10% for boat trailers and local regulations.
8-15% for other trailers
368
2008 MDX


Towing a Trailer
Hitch Trailer Brakes A 4-pin gray connector is available as

We strongly recommend that you Acura requires that any trailer with a an option at your dealer. This
have your dealer install a class 3 total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455 connector has all of the circuits
hitch. Using non-Acura equipment kg) or more have its own brakes. required to install most electric
may result in serious damage to your trailer brake controllers. A jumper
vehicle. There are two common types of harness to adapt your electric trailer
trailer brakes: surge and electric. brake controller to the vehicle is
Read the trailer manufacturers Surge brakes are common for boat included with the optional Acura
instructions, and select the trailers, since the brakes will get wet. Genuine trailer hitch kit. To obtain a
appropriate draw bar for the height connector and a trailer hitch kit, see
of the trailer you will be towing. If you choose electric brakes, be your dealer.
sure they are electronically actuated.
Weight Distributing Hitch Do not attempt to tap into your Have a qualified mechanic install
A weight distributing hitch is not vehicles hydraulic system. No your trailer brake controller
Driving
recommended for use with your matter how successful it may seem, following the trailer brake controller
vehicle, as an improperly adjusted any attempt to attach trailer brakes manufacturers instructions. Failure
weight distributing hitch may reduce to your vehicles hydraulic system to properly install the trailer brake
handling, stability, and braking will lower braking effectiveness and controller may increase the distance
performance. create a potential hazard. it takes for you to stop your vehicle
when towing a trailer.
See your trailer manufacturer for
more information on installing
electric brakes.
CONTINUED
369
2008 MDX


Towing a Trailer
Use this illustration to identify each Safety Chains Spare Tires

terminal in the trailer brake Always use safety chains when you When towing a trailer, we
controller connector. tow a trailer. Make sure the chains recommend that you carry a full-size
are secured to the trailer and hitch, spare wheel and tire for your vehicle
ELECTRIC BRAKE BRAKE and that they cross under the tongue and trailer. See page 419 for proper
(YELLOW) (20A)
(BLUE)
and can catch the trailer if it tire size, page 429 for how to store a
becomes unhitched. Leave enough full size wheel and tire, and page
slack to allow the trailer to turn 425 for information on changing a
corners easily, but do not let the flat tire.
chains drag on the ground.
Remember to unhitch the trailer
Sway Control before changing a flat. Ask your
This device is recommended if your trailer sales or rental agency where
GROUND STOP trailer tends to sway. Your trailer and how to store the trailers spare
(BLACK) (LIGHT GREEN) maker can tell you what kind of sway tire.
control you need and how to install it.
Trailer Mirrors
Many states and provinces require
special exterior mirrors when towing
a trailer. Even if they dont, you
should install special mirrors if you
cannot clearly see behind you, or if
the trailer creates a blind spot.
370
2008 MDX


Towing a Trailer
Trailer Lights If you use a non-Acura trailer

lighting harness and converter, you
ACCESSORY OPTION TRAILER BACK-UP LIGHT can get the mating connector and
BACK-UP LIGHT () pins that mate with the connector in
your vehicle from your dealer.
ILLUMINATION
LIGHTS BRAKE
DIAGNOSTIC Since lighting and wiring vary with
trailer type and brand, you should
RIGHT TURN ELECTRIC BRAKE also have a qualified mechanic install
SIGNAL
a suitable connector between the
TRAILER HAZARD vehicle and the trailer.
LEFT TURN LIGHT
Driving
SIGNAL B CHARGE TAILLIGHTS
Trailer lights and equipment must Refer to the above illustration for
comply with federal, state, province, wiring information.
and local regulations. Check trailer
light requirements for the areas We recommend that you have your
where you plan to tow, and use only dealer install an Acura wiring
equipment designed for your vehicle. harness and converter. This harness
has been designed for your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
connector to install an optional trailer
lighting connector that mates with
your vehicle. You can get this
optional connector from your dealer.
371
2008 MDX


Towing a Trailer
Pre-Tow Checklist The lights and brakes on your Driving Safely With a Trailer
When preparing to tow, and before vehicle and the trailer are working The added weight, length, and
driving away, be sure to check the properly. height of a trailer will affect your
following: vehicles handling and performance,
Your vehicle tires and spare are in so driving with a trailer requires
The vehicle has been properly good condition and properly some special driving skills and
serviced, and the suspension and inflated. techniques.
the cooling system are in good
operating condition. The trailer tires and spare are in For your safety and the safety of
good condition and inflated as others, take time to practice driving
The trailer has been properly recommended by the trailer maneuvers before heading for the
serviced and is in good condition. maker. open road, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
The hitch, safety chains, and any

other attachments are secure.
All items on and in the trailer are

properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
372
2008 MDX


Towing a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears When driving uphill and downhill, If the automatic transmission fluid
Drive slower than normal in all use the Sequential SportShift mode temperature increases and exceeds
driving situations, and obey posted to provide the proper engine power the specified limit, the A/T
speed limits for vehicles with trailers. and engine braking on each gear. temperature indicator comes on (see
Use D position when towing a trailer Select fourth, third, second, or first page 68 ). You will also see a A/T
on level roads. D3 is the proper shift gear; depending on the vehicle TEMP HIGH message on the multi-
lever position to use when towing a speeds and road condition. Do not information display.
trailer in hilly terrain. (See Driving use fifth gear. The recommended
on Hills on the next page for speed range for each gear position is Making Turns and Braking
additional gear information.) shown in the table. Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
When towing a fixed-sided trailer (e. Gear position Speed range smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
Driving
g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph can hit or run over something the
(88 km/h). At higher speeds, the 1 0 19 mph vehicle misses.
trailer may sway or affect vehicle (0 30 km/h)
handling. Allow more time and distance for
2 19 31 mph braking. Do not brake or turn
(30 50 km/h) suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
3 31 41 mph
(50 65 km/h)
4 over 41 mph
(over 65 km/h)
CONTINUED
373
2008 MDX


Towing a Trailer
Driving on Hills Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting Retrieving a Boat

When climbing hills, closely watch Crosswinds and air turbulence If the vehicles tires slip when
your temperature gauge. If it nears caused by passing trucks can disrupt retrieving a boat from the water,
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air your steering and cause the trailer to keep D position and do not use the
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if sway. When being passed by a large sequential sport shift mode. This
necessary, pull to the side of the vehicle, keep a constant speed, and prevents the transmission damage.
road to let the engine cool. steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking Towing Your Vehicle
If the transmission shifts frequently corrections. Your vehicle is not designed to be
while going up a hill, shift to D3. towed behind a motor home. If your
Backing Up vehicle needs to be towed in an
If you must stop when facing uphill, Always drive slowly and have emergency, see page 446 .
use the foot brake or parking brake. someone guide you when backing up.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in Grip the bottom of the steering wheel,
place by pressing on the accelerator, then turn the wheel to the left to get
as this can cause the automatic the trailer to move to the left. Turn
transmission to overheat. the wheel to the right to move the
trailer to the right.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to D3. Do Parking
not ride the brakes. Remember, it Follow all normal precautions when
takes longer to slow down and parking, including putting the
stop when towing a trailer. transmission in Park and firmly
setting the parking brake. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailers
tires.
374
2008 MDX


Trailer Stability Assist
Your vehicle is equipped with trailer Under these conditions, trailer Trailer stability assist cannot prevent
stability assist function. This stability assist begins to stabilize the a loss of control. Always reduce the
function works on the same sensors vehicle/trailer combination by vehicle speed and steer firmly. Do
as the vehicle stability assist (VSA) reducing the vehicle speed. The not brake suddenly or make quick
system. This function helps to control unit sends signals to steering motion. It could cause the
stabilize the vehicle/trailer selectively apply the brakes and trailer to jackknife or turn over and
combination when the trailer regulate the engine output. The the system becomes ineffective.
severely sways or oscillates. For brake lights of your vehicle will be
more information of the VSA system, turned on automatically by the Trailer stability assist cannot prevent
see page 359 . system even if you do not keep the swaying that can occur in crosswinds
pressure on the brake pedal. and in normal and emergency
If the function detects the vehicle/ driving maneuvers. It helps only to
Driving
trailer instability, it checks if the When the brakes are applied, the stabilize the vehicle/trailer
swaying is caused by the trailer, and trailers brake lights come on along combination in these conditions,
if the trailer swaying or oscillation is with the vehicle brake lights. after the oscillation becomes severe.
increasing.
When the trailer stability assist Trailer stability assist will also be
The vehicle/trailer combination is activates, you will see the VSA ineffective while driving at high
more affected by crosswinds, activation indicator blink. There may speed or towing a trailer with a high
buffeting, and improper tongue load. also be some noise from the VSA center of gravity.
These conditions can make the hydraulic system.
trailer unstable, and cause it to sway. Always obey the recommended
speed limits for towing a trailer, see
page 373 .
375
2008 MDX


Trailer Stability Assist
Trailer Stability Assist Failure In this case, your vehicle still has the If you turn off the VSA, the trailer
VSA traction and stability stability assist function also shuts off.
enhancement, but it will not have the Press and hold the VSA off switch
trailer stability assist function. until you hear a beep (see page 360 ).
The VSA activation indicator comes
If there is a problem with the VSA on as a reminder. Press and hold the
system, the system and Trailer switch again to turn the system on.
Stability Assist shuts off. The VSA
system and VSA activation indicators The function turns on every time you
also come on (see page 359 ). start the engine along with the VSA,
even if you turned it off the last time
The ABS indicator and the brake you drove the vehicle.
system indicator may also come on
along with the VSA system indicator.
The control unit monitors the VSA
circuitry and the braking system. If If you see these warning indicators,
there is a problem with the brake have your vehicle checked at your
lighting system, the trailer stability dealer as soon as possible.
assist function shuts down and the
CHECK TRAILER STABILITY
ASSIST message appears on the
multi-information display.
If you see this message, have your

vehicle checked at your dealer as
soon as possible.
376
2008 MDX


Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information Important Safety Precautions

Your vehicle has been designed To avoid loss of control or rollover,
primarily for use on pavement. But Improperly operating this be sure to follow all precautions and
its higher ground clearance and vehicle on or off-pavement can recommendations.
super handling-all wheel drive cause an accident or rollover in
(SH-AWD) system allow you to which you and your passengers Be sure to store cargo properly
occasionally travel on unpaved roads, could be seriously injured or and do not exceed your cargo load
to campgrounds, picnic sites, and killed. limits (see page 333 and 364 ).
similar locations. It is not designed
for trailblazing, mountain climbing, Follow all instructions and Whenever you drive, make sure
or other challenging off-road guidelines in this owners you and your passengers always
activities. manual. wear seat belts.
Driving
Keep your speed low, and
If you decide to drive on unpaved dont drive faster than Keep your speed low, and never
roads, you will find that it requires conditions permit. go faster than the conditions allow.
somewhat different driving skills.
Your vehicle will also handle Its up to you to continually assess
somewhat differently than it does on the situation and drive within the
pavement. Be sure to pay extra limits.
attention to the precautions and tips
in this section, and get acquainted
with your vehicle before leaving the
pavement.
377
2008 MDX


Check Out Your Vehicle Accelerating and Braking Driving on Slopes

Before you leave the pavement, be For better traction on all surfaces, If you cant clearly see all conditions
sure to do all scheduled maintenance accelerate slowly and gradually build or obstacles on a slope, walk the
and service, and inspect your vehicle up speed. If you try to start too fast slope before you drive on it. If you
for any problems. Pay special on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you have any doubt whether or not you
attention to the condition of the tires, might not have enough traction to can safely drive on the slope, dont
and check the tire pressures. get underway, and you may dig do it. Find another route.
yourself a hole. Starting with the If you are driving up a hill and find
After you return to the pavement, shift lever in D position will help you that you cannot continue, do not try to
carefully inspect your vehicle to have a smoother start on snow or ice. turn around. Your vehicle could roll
make sure there is no damage that over. Slowly back down the hill,
could make driving it unsafe. Keep in mind that you will usually following the same route you took up
Recheck the condition of the tires need more time and distance to the hill.
and the tire pressures. brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.
Avoid hard braking. Do not pump Crossing a Stream
Remember the brakes; let the anti-lock braking Before driving through water, stop,
The route presents limits (too steep system pump them for you. get out if necessary, and make sure
or bumpy roads). You have limits that:
(driving skill and comfort). And your Avoiding Obstacles The water is not deep enough to
vehicle has limits (traction, stability, Debris in the road can damage your cover your wheel hubs, axles, or
and power). suspension or other components. exhaust pipe. You could stall and
Because your vehicle has a high not be able to restart your engine.
Driving off-highway can be center of gravity, driving over a large The water can also damage
hazardous if you fail to recognize obstacle, or allowing a wheel to drop important vehicle components.
limits and take the proper into a deep hole can cause your
precautions. vehicle to tip or roll over.
378
2008 MDX


The banks are sloped so you can If the water is deeper than the wheel becoming stuck, too.
drive out. hubs, some additional service may
The water is not flowing too fast. be required. This service is not You should never use a jack to try to
Deep rushing water can sweep you covered by your warranties. get unstuck. Your vehicle could
downstream. Even very shallow easily slip off the jack and hurt you
rushing water can wash the If You Get Stuck or someone else.
ground from under your tires and If you get stuck, carefully try to go in
cause you to lose traction and the direction (forward or reverse) Towing a Trailer Off-Road
possibly roll over. that you think will get you unstuck. You may be able to safely tow a
The banks and surface under the Do not spin the tires at high speeds. lightweight trailer (such as a
water provide good traction. The It will not help you get out and may motorcycle or small tent trailer) off-
water may hide hazards such as cause damage to the transmission or road if you follow these guidelines.
Driving
rocks, holes, or mud. SH-AWD system. Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45
If you decide it is safe to drive If you are still unable to free yourself, kg).
through water, choose a suitable your vehicle is equipped with front
speed, and proceed without shifting, and rear tow hooks designed for this Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,
changing speeds, stopping, or purpose. and avoid driving in hilly terrain.
shutting off the engine.
Use a nylon strap to attach the MDX Allow extra room for starting,
After driving through water, test to the recovery vehicle and carefully stopping, and turning.
your brakes. If they got wet, gently take out the slack in the strap. Once
pump them while driving slowly the strap is tight, the recovery Slow down if you encounter bumps
until they operate normally. vehicle should apply force. or other obstacles.
Remember that the recovery vehicle
needs good traction to avoid
379
2008 MDX

380
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Maintenance
This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ....................... 382

important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Minder ..................... 383
maintained and how to follow basic Fluid Locations............................... 391
maintenance safety precautions. Engine Compartment Cover ........ 392
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 393
This section also includes Changing the Engine Oil and
instructions on how to read the Filter ............................................ 394
maintenance minder messages on Engine Coolant ............................... 396
the multi-information display, and Windshield Washers ..................... 398
instructions for simple maintenance Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 399
tasks you may want to take care of Brake Fluid ..................................... 401
yourself. Power Steering Fluid ..................... 402
Timing Belt ..................................... 402
If you have the skills and tools to Lights .............................................. 403
Maintenance
perform more complex maintenance Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 409
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 409
to purchase the service manual. See Floor Mats ...................................... 410
page 469 for information on how to Wiper Blades .................................. 411
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Tires ................................................ 415
Checking the Battery .................... 421
Vehicle Storage .............................. 422
381
2008 MDX


Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this Wear eye protection and engine and exhaust system cool
section should be performed by a protective clothing when working down before touching any parts.
certified technician or other qualified with the battery or compressed air.
mechanic. Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
Important Safety Precautions instructed to do so.
To eliminate potential hazards, read Improperly maintaining this
the instructions before you begin, vehicle, or failing to correct a
and make sure you have the tools problem before driving can
and skills required. cause a crash in which you can Failure to properly follow
be seriously hurt or killed. maintenance instructions and
Make sure your vehicle is parked precautions can cause you to
on level ground, the parking brake Always follow the inspection be seriously hurt or killed.
is set, and the engine is off. and maintenance
recommendations and Always follow the procedures
To clean parts, use a commercially schedules in this owners and precautions in this owners
available degreaser or parts manual. manual.
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or Potential Vehicle Hazards Some of the most important safety
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, Carbon Monoxide poison from precautions are given here. However,
and flames away from the battery engine exhaust. Be sure there is we cannot warn you of every
and all fuel-related parts. adequate ventilation whenever you conceivable hazard that can arise in
operate the engine. performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
Burns from hot parts. Let the should perform a given task.
382
2008 MDX


Maintenance Minder
One of the most convenient and Engine Oil Life The remaining engine oil life is
important features of the multi- displayed according to the table
information display on your vehicle shown below.
is the maintenance minder.
REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE Calculated Engine Displayed
Based on engine operating Oil Life (%) Engine Oil Life
conditions and accumulated engine (%)
revolutions, the onboard computer in 100% 91% 100%
your vehicle calculates the remaining 90% 81% 90%
engine oil life. 80% 71% 80%
70% 61% 70%
The system also displays the code 60% 51% 60%
for other scheduled maintenance 50% 41% 50%
items needing service. 40% 31% 40%
Maintenance
To see the remaining engine oil life 30% 21% 30%
displayed on the multi-information 20% 16% 20%
display as a percentage, turn the 15% 11% 15%
ignition switch to the ON (II) 10% 6% 10%
position. Make sure the display 5% 1% 5%
shows blank, SH-AWD and tire 0% 0%
pressure, and then press the SEL/
RESET button on the steering wheel
repeatedly until the engine oil life
appears (see page 73 ).
CONTINUED
383
2008 MDX


Maintenance Minder
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM SUB ITEMS
When the remaining engine oil life is When the remaining oil life is 1 to 5 Press the SEL/RESET button on the
15 to 6 percent, the multi-information percent, the multi-information steering wheel repeatedly to select
display shows a SERVICE DUE display shows a SERVICE DUE the engine oil life. The message
SOON message along with the NOW message with the same SERVICE, along with 5%, and the
maintenance schedule code maintenance items SERVICE DUE maintenance item code are displayed
indicating the main and sub items SOON was displayed with. When on the lower part of the multi-
required at the time of the oil change. you see this message have the information display when the
Refer to page 390 for a complete list indicated maintenance performed as calculated engine oil life is 15
of the maintenance main items and soon as possible. percent (see page 383 ).
sub items.
384
2008 MDX


Maintenance Minder
These messages will come on every

time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position.
Immediately have the service

performed, and make sure to reset
the oil life minder as previously
described.
The message will be canceled if the

or button on the steering wheel
is pressed. Press the or button
to see the message again.
Maintenance
If the indicated maintenance service Press the SEL/RESET button on the
is not done and the remaining engine steering wheel repeatedly to select
oil life reaches 0%, the multi- the engine oil life. The message
information display will show the SERVICE, along with 0 %, and
message SERVICE PAST DUE the maintenance item code are
and the maintenance item code(s). displayed on the lower part of the
This message is displayed when the multi-information display when the
total mileage is less than 10 miles calculated engine oil life is 01 %.
(for U.S. models) or 10 km (for
Canadian models) after the engine
oil life became 0%.
CONTINUED
385
2008 MDX


Maintenance Minder
This message is displayed when you

drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models)
TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE or 10 km (for Canadian models) U.S.
U.S. after seeing the 0% message.
Immediately have the service

performed, and make sure to reset
the display as previously described. CANADA
MAINTENANCE CODE
CANADA TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE
The message will be canceled if the
or button on the steering wheel
is pressed. Press the or button
to see the message again.
If the indicated required service is When you press the SEL/RESET

not done and the remaining engine button to select the engine oil life,
oil life becomes 0%, the multi- the message SERVICE, along with
information display will show a the maintenance item code and the
SERVICE PAST DUE message, total negative mileage after the oil
the total mileage after the remaining life became 0 %, will be displayed on
oil life became 0%, and the the lower part of the multi-
maintenance item code(s). information display.
386
2008 MDX


Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items and Sub Resetting the Engine Oil Life more than 10 seconds. The
Items Display remaining engine oil life reset
Your dealer will reset the display mode will be shown on the multi-
after completing the required information display.
maintenance service. You will see
OIL LIFE 100% on the display the
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE next time you turn the ignition
MAIN ITEM SUB ITEMS switch to the ON (II) position.
If maintenance service is done by

someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE follows:
MAIN ITEM SUB ITEMS
Maintenance
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
All the maintenance items displayed (II) position.
in the multi-information display are
in code. 2. If the engine oil life is not 4. Select RESET by pressing the
displayed, press the SEL/RESET INFO (/) button, then press
For an explanation of the button on the steering wheel the SEL/RESET button to reset
maintenance codes, see page 390 . repeatedly the multi-information the engine oil life display. The
display shows blank, SH-AWD and maintenance item code(s) will
tire pressure. disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to 100. If you want to
3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET cancel the oil life reset mode,
button on the steering wheel for select CANCEL.
387
2008 MDX


Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance Your authorized dealer knows your We recommend using Acura parts
Precautions vehicle best and can provide and fluids whenever you have
If you have the required service competent, efficient service. maintenance done. These are
done but do not reset the display, or However, service at a dealer is not manufactured to the same high-
reset the display without doing the mandatory to keep your warranties quality standards as the original
service, the system will not show the in effect. Maintenance may be done components, so you can be confident
proper maintenance intervals. This by any qualified service facility or of their performance and durability.
can lead to serious mechanical person who is skilled in this type of
problems because you will no longer automotive service. Keep all receipts
have an accurate record of when as proof of completion, and have the
maintenance is needed. person who does the work fill out
your Maintenance Journal or
Canadian Maintenance Log. Check
your warranty booklet for more
information.
388
2008 MDX


Maintenance Minder
U.S. Vehicles: Owner s Maintenance Checks Lights Check the operation of

Maintenance, replacement, or You should check the following the headlights, parking lights,
repair of emissions control items at the specified intervals. If taillights, high-mount brake light,
devices and systems may be done you are unsure of how to perform and license plate lights monthly.
by any automotive repair any check, turn to the appropriate See page 403 .
establishment or individual using page listed.
parts that are certified to EPA
standards. Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
According to state and federal page 326 .
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked Engine coolant level Check the
with will not void your emissions radiator reserve tank every time
warranties. However, Acura you fill the fuel tank. See page 326 .
Maintenance
recommends that all maintenance
services be performed in accordance Automatic transmission Check
with the intervals indicated by the the fluid level monthly. See page
Multi-Information Display. 399 .
Brakes Check the fluid level

monthly. See page 401 .
Tires Check the tire pressure

monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
416 .
389
2008 MDX


Maintenance Minder
Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

A Replace engine oil1 1 Rotate tires
B Replace engine oil1and oil filter 2 Replace air cleaner element
Inspect front and rear brakes If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
Check parking brake adjustment miles (24,000 km).

Inspect these items: Replace dust and pollen filter
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
Suspension components concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from
Driveshaft boots diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS) (24,000 km).
All fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect drive belt
Exhaust system 3 Replace transmission and transfer fluid
Fuel lines and connections 4 Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
1 : If the message SERVICE DUE NOW does not appear more than 12 If you drive regularly in very high temperatures
months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year. (over 110F, 43C), in very low temperatures
(under20F, 29C), or towing a trailer, replace every
: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first 60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).
column on page 389 . Inspect valve clearance
5 Replace engine coolant
NOTE : Independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-information 6 Replace rear differential fluid
display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years. Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km). speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy. mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires
differential fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you
regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,
have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles
(12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
390
2008 MDX


Fluid Locations
BRAKE FLUID
POWER STEERING FLUID (Black cap)
(Red cap)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
AUTOMATIC
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK TRANSMISSION
(Orange loop) FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
RADIATOR CAP
391
2008 MDX


Engine Compartment Cover
The component parts in the engine

compartment are protected by the FRONT BULKHEAD COVER
cover. You may need to remove the HOLDING CLIP
cover when you perform some
simple maintenance work.
Cover is secured by holding clips.
To remove the front bulkhead cover,

remove the holding clips with a flat-
tip screwdriver.
392
2008 MDX


Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP Recommended Engine Oil The oil viscosity or weight is
Oil is a major contributor to your provided on the containers label.
engines performance and longevity. 5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20 round protection of your vehicle to
detergent oil displaying the API improve cold weather starting and
Certification Seal. This seal indicates fuel economy.
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institutes latest requirements. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda motor oil in your vehicle.
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says For Gasoline Engines.
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
Maintenance
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills Ambient Temperature
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could API CERTIFICATION SEAL
damage the engine.
393
2008 MDX


Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Synthetic Oil Changing the Engine Oil and

You may use a synthetic motor oil if Filter
it meets the same requirements Always change the oil and filter
given for a conventional motor oil: it according to the maintenance
displays the API Certification Seal messages shown on the multi-
and it is the proper weight. You must information display. The oil and filter
follow the oil and filter change collect contaminants that can
intervals shown on the multi- damage your engine if they are not
information display. removed regularly.
Engine Oil Additives Changing the oil and filter requires

Your vehicle does not require any oil special tools and access from WASHER DRAIN BOLT
additives. Additives may adversely underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
affect the engine or transmission should be raised on a service station- 2. Open the hood, and remove the
performance and durability. type hydraulic lift for this service. engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
Unless you have the knowledge and drain bolt and washer from the
proper equipment, you should have bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
this maintenance done by a skilled into an appropriate container.
mechanic.
1. Run the engine until it reaches

normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
394
2008 MDX


Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER 4. Install a new oil filter according to 7. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
the instructions that come with it. Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
Make sure to clean off any dirt seconds. If it does not, turn off the
and dust on the connecting engine, and check your work.
surface of a new oil filter.
8. Let the engine run for several
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, minutes, then check the drain bolt
then reinstall the drain bolt. and oil filter for leaks.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbfft (39 Nm , 4.0 kgfm) 9. Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
6. Refill the engine with the recom- the oil level on the dipstick. If
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the mended oil. necessary, add more oil.
Maintenance
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your Engine oil change capacity
dealer) is required. (including filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 ) Improper disposal of engine oil can be
Make sure the oil filter gasket is harmf ul to the environment. If you
not stuck to the engine block. If it change your own oil, please dispose of
is, remove it before installing a the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
new oil filter. container, and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
395
2008 MDX


Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant Always use Honda Long-life Anti- If the reserve tank is completely
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant empty, you should also check the
is pre-mixed with 50 percent coolant level in the radiator.
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
Removing the radiator cap
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not while the engine is hot can
available, you may use another cause the coolant to spray out,
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a seriously scalding you.
MAX
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant Always let the engine and
MIN recommended for aluminum engines. radiator cool down before
Continued use of any non-Honda removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant level in the reserve coolant can result in corrosion,
tank is at or below the MIN line, add causing the cooling system to
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
Inspect the cooling system for leaks. system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
396
2008 MDX


Engine Coolant
4. The coolant level should be up to

the base of the filler neck. Add
RADIATOR CAP COVER RADIATOR CAP coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and

carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and

tighten it fully.
Maintenance
1. Make sure the engine and radiator 3. Remove the radiator cap by
are cool. pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
2. Remove the radiator cap cover.
Relieve any pressure in the cooling

system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
CONTINUED
397
2008 MDX


Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers
Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the
MAX windshield washer reservoir at least Do not use engine antif reeze or a
monthly during normal use. vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
If the washer fluid is low, a can damage your vehicles paint, while
WASHER FLUID LOW message a vinegar/water solution can damage
appears on the multi-information the windshield washer pump. Use only
display. commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
RESERVE TANK MIN increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX When you refill the reservoir, clean
and MIN marks. Put the cap back the edges of the windshield wiper
on the reserve tank. blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
Do not add any rust inhibitors or condition the blade edges.
other additives to your vehicles
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
398
2008 MDX


Automatic Transmission Fluid
The transmission should be drained

DIPSTICK
and refilled with new fluid when this
service is shown on a maintenance
message in the multi-information
display.
Check the fluid level with the engine

UPPER MARK
at normal operating temperature.
LOWER MARK
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut DIPSTICK
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) 3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
Maintenance
no longer than 90 seconds) before from the transmission, and wipe it the transmission securely as
doing step 2. with a clean cloth. shown in the illustration.
4. Remove the dipstick and check

the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
CONTINUED
399
2008 MDX


Automatic Transmission Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower The transmission should be drained

mark, add fluid into the dipstick and refilled with new fluid when this
hole to bring it to the level service is shown on a maintenance Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1
between the upper and lower message in the multi-information (Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do
marks. display. not mix with other transmission f luids.
Using transmission f luid other than
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully If you are not sure how to add fluid, Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause
so you do not spill any. Clean up contact your dealer. deterioration in transmission operation
any spill immediately; it could and durability, and could result in
damage components in the engine damage to the transmission.
compartment. Damage resulting f rom the use of
transmission f luid other than Honda
Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the
(automatic transmission fluid). Acura new vehicle warranty.
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back

into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the rubber cap on the

dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
all the way.
400
2008 MDX


Brake Fluid
Replace the brake fluid when this Always use Honda Heavy Duty
service is indicated on a maintenance Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
message in the multi-information available, you should use only DOT 3
display. or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
Check the fluid level in the brake replacement.
fluid reservoir monthly.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid MIN MAX
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
The fluid level should be between
Maintenance
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not the MIN and MAX marks on the side
compatible with your vehicles of the reservoir. If the level is at or
braking system and can cause below the MIN mark, your brake
extensive damage. system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
401
2008 MDX


Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Power Steering Fluid Always use Honda Power Steering Timing Belt
Fluid. You may use another power The timing belt should be replaced
UPPER LEVEL steering fluid as an emergency at the intervals shown in the
replacement, but have the power maintenance minder schedule.
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible. Replace the timing belt every 60,000
miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km
A low power steering fluid level can (Canada) if you regularly drive your
indicate a leak in the system. Check vehicle in any of the following
the fluid level frequently, and have conditions:
the system inspected as soon as
possible. In very high temperatures
LOWER LEVEL (over 110F, 43C).
If you are not sure how to add In very low temperatures
Check the level on the side of the fluid, contact your dealer. (under 20F, 29C).
reservoir when the engine is cold. Frequently tow a trailer.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not add power steering fluid to the Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
UPPER LEVEL mark. or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
402
2008 MDX


Lights
Headlight Aiming Replacing a High Beam Headlight BULB

MDX and Technology Packages models Bulb
The headlights were properly aimed Your vehicle has halogen headlight
when your vehicle was new. If you bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
regularly carry heavy items in the it by its base, and protect the glass
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment from contact with your skin or hard
may be required. Adjustments objects. If you touch the glass, clean
should be done by your dealer or it with denatured alcohol and a clean
other qualified technician. cloth.
Low Beam Headlight Bulb

Replacement CONNECTOR
The low beam headlight bulbs are a Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
type of high voltage discharge tube. when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch 3. Remove the electrical connector
Maintenance
High voltage can remain in the on the glass can cause the bulb to from the bulb by pushing on the
circuit even with the light switch off overheat and shatter. tab and pulling the connector
and the key removed. Because of down.
this, you should not attempt to 1. Open the hood.
examine or change a low beam 4. Remove the bulb by turning it
headlight bulb yourself. If a low 2. Remove the front bulkhead cover about one-quarter turn
beam headlight bulb fails, take the (see page 392 ). counterclockwise.
vehicle to your dealer to have it
replaced.
CONTINUED
403
2008 MDX


Lights
5. Insert the new bulb into the hole, Replacing Front Turn Signal/
and turn it one-quarter turn Parking and Side Marker Light
clockwise to lock it in place. Bulbs
6. Push the electrical connector onto FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

BULB
PARKING LIGHT BULB
the new bulb.
7. Turn on the headlights to test the

new bulb.
SOCKET SOCKET
1. Open the hood. 5. Push the new bulb straight into

the socket until it bottoms.
2. Remove the front bulkhead cover
(see page 392 ). 6. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
3. Remove the socket by turning it clockwise to lock it in place.
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
7. Turn on the lights to make sure
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its the new bulb is working.
socket.
404
2008 MDX


Lights
Replacing Front Fog/Daytime

Running Light Bulbs
Your vehicle uses halogen light
SIDE MARKER LIGHT bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle BOLT
BULB
it by its plastic case, and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth. HOLDING
CLIPS
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.

SOCKET Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the 1. Remove the bolt and use the flat-
Maintenance
glass can cause the bulb to overheat tip screwdriver to remove the
and shatter. holding clips located under the
front bumper.
2. Push down the inner fender.
CONTINUED
405
2008 MDX


Lights
CONNECTOR Replacing Rear Bulbs

(in Rear Pillar)
COVER BOLT
INNER FENDER
3. Remove the electrical connector BOLT

from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector 1. Open the tailgate. Use a flat-tip 2. Remove the two bolts, and remove
down. screwdriver protected with a cloth the rear light assembly from the
to pry open the two covers. rear pillar.
4. Remove the bulb from the fog
light assembly by turning it one- 3. Determine which of the two bulbs
quarter turn counterclockwise. is burned out: turn signal/hazard
lights or side marker light.
406
2008 MDX


Lights
6. Push the new bulb straight into Replacing a Back-up Light Bulb

the new bulb is working.
8. Put the socket back into the light

assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
9. Install the rear light assembly in

the rear pillar. Tighten the two
bolts. Snap the bolt covers into COVER
BULB SOCKET position.
Maintenance
1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
4. Remove the socket by turning it the edge of the light assembly
one-quarter turn counterclockwise. cover. Remove the cover by
carefully prying in the notch on its
5. Pull the bulb straight out of its middle edge with a flat-tip
socket. screwdriver.
CONTINUED
407
2008 MDX


Lights
6. Put the socket back into the light Side Turn Signal Light
assembly, and turn it clockwise to Each outside mirror has side turn
BULB lock it in place. signal lights. The lights should be
replaced by your dealer.
7. Place the cover back into the light
assembly. Push it up until it locks Rear License Plate Bulb
in place. The license plate has two lights
above it. The bulbs should be
replaced by your dealer.
SOCKET
2. Remove the socket by turning it

one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its

socket.
4. Push the new bulb straight into


the new bulb is working.
408
2008 MDX


Dust and Pollen Filter, Cleaning the Seat Belts
Dust and Pollen Filter Cleaning the Seat Belts Dirt build-up around the openings of
This filter removes the dust and the seat belt anchors can cause the
pollen that is brought in from the OPENING belts to retract slowly. Wipe the
outside through the climate control openings with a clean cloth
system. dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the multi-
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
Maintenance
the climate control system becomes If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
less than usual. brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
409
2008 MDX


Floor Mats
Front Rear
The floor mats that came with your If you use a non-Acura floor mat,
vehicle hook over the floor mat make sure it fits properly and that it
anchors. This keeps the floor mats can be used with the floor mat
from sliding forward, possibly anchors. Do not put additional floor
interfering with the pedals, or mats on top of the anchored mats.
backwards, making the front
passengers weight sensors
ineffective.
If you remove a floor mat, make sure

to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.
410
2008 MDX


Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper WIPER ARMS

blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, and areas
that are getting hard or if they leave
streaks and unwiped areas when
used.
LOCK TAB
To replace the front wiper blades: 2. Disconnect the blade assembly
Maintenance
from the wiper arm:
1. Raise each wiper arm off the Press and hold the lock tab.
windshield, lifting the drivers side Slide the blade assembly toward
first, then the passengers side. the lock tab until it releases
from the wiper arm.
When replacing a wiper blade, make

Do not open the hood when the wiper sure not to drop the wiper blade or
arms are raised, or you will damage the wiper arm down on the windshield.
hood and the wiper arms.
CONTINUED
411
2008 MDX


Wiper Blades
BLADE BLADE 5. Slide the new wiper blade into the

holder until the tabs lock.
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly

onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm against the

window.
Windshield: Lower the passengers
side first, then the drivers side.
REINFORCEMENT
3. Remove the blade from its holder 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
by grabbing the tabbed end of the they have no plastic or metal
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs reinforcement along the back
come out of the holder. edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
412
2008 MDX


Wiper Blades
WIPER ARM
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
To replace the rear wiper blade: 2. Slide the blade out of the wiper 3. Examine the new wiper blades. If
Maintenance
arm. they have no plastic or metal
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear reinforcement along the back
window. edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
CONTINUED
413
2008 MDX


Wiper Blades
4. Slide the new blade into the wiper

arm. Make sure it is engaged in
the slot along its full length.
5. Lower the wiper arm.
414
2008 MDX


Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Guidelines immediately with a tire gauge.
tires must be the proper type and Keeping the tires properly inflated
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of Use a gauge to measure the air
tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding pressure in each tire at least once a
comfort. month. Even tires that are in good
The following pages give more condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
detailed information on how to take Underinflated tires wear unevenly, 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
care of your tires and what to do adversely affect handling and fuel month. Remember to check the
when they need to be replaced. economy, and are more likely to spare tire at the same time.
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your

Using tires that are excessively vehicle ride more harshly, are
worn or improperly inflated can more prone to damage from road
Maintenance
cause a crash in which you can hazards, and wear unevenly.
be seriously hurt or killed.
The tire pressure monitoring system
Follow all instructions in this (TPMS) warns you when a tire
owners manual regarding tire pressure is low. See page 351 for
inflation and maintenance. more information.
Even though your vehicle is

equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it CONTINUED
415
2008 MDX


Tires
Check the air pressures when the While tubeless tires have some Recommended Tire Pressures
tires are cold. This means the ability to self-seal if they are The following chart shows the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 punctured, you should look closely recommended cold tire pressures for
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 for punctures if a tire starts losing most normal and high-speed driving
km). Add or release air, if needed, to pressure. conditions.
match the recommended cold tire
pressures. You should get your own tire Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
pressure gauge and use it whenever for Normal Driving
If you check air pressures when the you check your tire pressures. This P255/55R18 104H Front/Rear:
tires are hot [driven for several miles will make it easier for you to tell if a 32 psi (220 kPa ,
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4 pressure loss is due to a tire problem 2.2 kgf/cm )
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 and not due to a variation between
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold gauges. The compact spare tire pressure is:
readings. This is normal. Do not let 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be For convenience, the recommended
underinflated. tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the drivers doorjamb.
For additional information about

your tires, see page 454 .
416
2008 MDX


Tires
Tire Inspection INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS Tire Service Life

Every time you check inflation, you The service life of your tires is
should also examine the tires for dependent on many factors,
damage, foreign objects, and wear. including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
You should look for: loading, inflation pressure,
Bumps or bulges in the tread or maintenance history, speed, and
side of the tire. Replace the tire if environmental conditions (even
you find either of these conditions. when the tires are not in use).
In addition to your regular
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side inspections and inflation pressure
of the tire. Replace the tire if you TREAD WEAR INDICATORS maintenance, it is recommended that
can see fabric or cord. you have annual inspections
Your tires have wear indicators performed once the tires reach five
Maintenance
Excessive tread wear. molded into the tread. When the years old. It is also recommended
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2 that all tires, including the spare, be
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the removed from service after 10 years
tread. This shows there is less than from the date of manufacture,
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on regardless of their condition or state
the tire. of wear.
The last four digits of the TIN (tire
A tire this worn gives very little identification number) are found on
traction on wet roads. You should the sidewall of the tire and indicate
replace the tire if you can see three the date of manufacture (See Tire
or more tread wear indicators. Labeling on page 456 ).
417
2008 MDX


Tires
Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels

In addition to proper inflation, Replace your tires with radial tires of
correct wheel alignment helps to Front Front the same size, load range, speed
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire rating, and maximum cold tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer pressure rating (as shown on the
check the wheel alignment. tires sidewall).
Have your dealer check the tires if Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
you feel a consistent vibration while your vehicle can reduce braking
driving. A tire should always be ability, traction, and steering
rebalanced if it is removed from the accuracy. Using tires of a different
wheel. When you have new tires (For Non-directional (For Directional size or construction can cause the
installed, make sure they are Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels) ABS and vehicle stability assist
balanced. This increases riding system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
comfort and tire life. For best results, To help increase tire life and
have the installer perform a dynamic distribute wear more evenly, rotate The ABS works by comparing the
balance. the tires according to the speed of the wheels. When replacing
maintenance messages displayed on tires, use the same size originally
the multi-information display. Move supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
the tires to the positions shown in and construction can affect wheel
Improper wheel weights can damage the illustration each time they are speed and may cause the system to
your vehicles aluminum wheels. Use rotated. If you purchase directional activate.
only Acura wheel weights f or balancing. tires, rotate only front-to-back.
When the tires are rotated, make
sure the air pressures are checked.
418
2008 MDX


Tires
It is best to replace all four tires at Winter Driving

the same time. If that is not possible Tires marked M S or All
or necessary, replace the two front Installing improper tires on your Season on the sidewall have an all-
tires or two rear tires as a pair. vehicle can affect handling and weather tread design suitable for
Replacing just one tire can seriously stability. This can cause a crash most winter driving conditions.
affect your vehicles handling. in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed. For the best performance in snowy
If you ever replace a wheel, make or icy conditions, you should install
sure that the wheels specifications Always use the size and type of snow tires or tire chains. They may
match those of the original wheels. tires recommended in this be required by local laws under
owners manual. certain conditions.
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the Snow Tires
tire pressure monitoring system will Wheel and Tire Specifications If you mount snow tires on your
Maintenance
not work. Wheel: vehicle, make sure they are radial
18 x 8 J tires of the same size and load range
Replacement wheels are available at as the original tires. Mount snow
your dealer. Tires: tires on all four wheels. The traction
P255/55R18 104H provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
See page 454 for information about Check with the tire dealer for
DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page maximum speed recommendations.
456 for tire size and labeling
information.
419
2008 MDX


Tires
Tire Chains Wheels

Mount tire chains on your tires when Clean the wheels as you would the
required by driving conditions or Using the wrong chains, or not rest of the exterior. Wash them with
local laws. Install them only on the properly installing chains, can the same solution, and rinse them
front tires. damage the brake lines and thoroughly.
cause a crash in which you can
Because your vehicle has limited tire be seriously injured or killed. Aluminum alloy wheels have a
clearance, Acura strongly protective clear-coat that keeps the
recommends using the chains listed Follow all instructions in this aluminum from corroding and
below. owners manual regarding the tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
selection and use of tire chains. harsh chemicals (including some
SCC Super Z-6SZ 435 commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
When installing chains, follow the clean the wheels, use a mild
manufacturers instructions and detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
mount them as tightly as you can. Traction devices that are the wrong
Drive slowly with chains installed. If size or improperly installed can
you hear them contacting the body damage your vehicles brake lines,
or chassis, stop and investigate. suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
Make sure the chains are installed driving if they are hitting any part of
tightly, and that they are not the vehicle.
contacting the brake lines or
suspension. Remove the chains as
soon as you start driving on cleared
roads.
420
2008 MDX


Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW Check the terminals for corrosion (a

white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a The battery gives off explosive
solution of baking soda and water. It hydrogen gas during normal
will bubble up and turn brown. When operation.
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a A spark or flame can cause the
cloth or paper towel. Coat the battery to explode with enough
terminals with grease to help prevent force to kill or seriously hurt you.
further corrosion.
Wear protective clothing and a
If additional battery maintenance is face shield, or have a skilled
needed, see your dealer or a technician do the battery
Check the condition of the battery qualified technician. maintenance.
Maintenance
monthly by looking at the test
indicator window: WARNING: Battery posts,
Green Good condition terminals, and related accessories If the radio fuse is removed, the
White Liquid level low, replace contain lead and lead compounds. audio system will disable itself. The
battery Wash your hands after handling. next time you turn on the radio you
Black Charging necessary will see ENTER CODE in the
If you need to connect the battery to frequency display. Use the preset
a charger, disconnect both cables to buttons to enter the digit code (see
prevent damaging your vehicles page 235 ).
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative () cable first, and
reconnect it last.
421
2008 MDX


Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for Block the rear wheels. Cover the vehicle with a
an extended period (more than 1 breathable cover, one made
month), there are several things you If the vehicle is to be stored for a from a porous material such as
should do to prepare it for storage. longer period, it should be cotton. Non-porous materials, such
Proper preparation helps prevent supported on jackstands so the as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
deterioration and makes it easier to tires are off the ground. which can damage the paint.
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if If possible, periodically run the
the vehicle is being stored engine until it reaches full
Fill the fuel tank. indoors). operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
Wash and dry the exterior Disconnect the battery. twice). Preferably, do this once a
completely. month.
Support the front and rear wiper
Clean the interior. Make sure the blade arms with a folded towel or
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are rag so they do not touch the
completely dry. windshield.
Leave the parking brake off. Put To minimize sticking, apply a

the transmission in Park. silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
422
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire....................... 424

common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 425
experience with their vehicles. It If the Engine Wont Start .............. 431
gives you information about how to Jump Starting ................................. 432
safely evaluate the problem and what If the Engine Overheats ............... 434
to do to correct it. If the problem has Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 436
stranded you on the side of the road, Charging System Indicator........... 436
you may be able to get going again. Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 437
If not, you will also find instructions Brake System Indicator ................ 438
on getting your vehicle towed. Fuses ............................................... 439
Fuse Locations ............................... 443
Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually ..................................... 446
Emergency Towing ....................... 446
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ........... 447

423
2008 MDX


Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a Do not mount snow chains on a INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
temporary replacement only. Get compact spare.
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as Do not use your compact spare
soon as you can. tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you After the flat tire is replaced with
check the other tires. It should be the spare tire, the low tire
inflated to: pressure/TPMS indicator stays on.
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) After several miles (kilometers)
driving with the spare, this TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Follow these precautions: indicator begins to flash, then
stays on again. You will also see a Replace the tire when you can see
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). CHECK TPMS SYSTEM the tread wear indicator bars. The
message on the multi-information replacement should be the same size
This tire gives a harsher ride and display (see page 354 ). and design tire, mounted on the
less traction on some road same wheel. The spare tire is not
surfaces. Use greater caution designed to be mounted on a regular
while driving. wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
424
2008 MDX


Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,

stop in a safe place to change it. CARGO AREA JACK
Drive slowly along the shoulder until FLOOR
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
The vehicle can easily roll off

the jack, seriously injuring TOOLS
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for

changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the SPARE TIRE

jack.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights, 4. Push the rear edge of the handle
and turn the ignition switch to the to raise the handle loop and pull up
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and LOCK (0) position. Have all the loop to raise the cargo area
non-slippery ground. Put the passengers get out of the vehicle floor.
transmission in Park. Apply the while you change the tire.
parking brake.
3. Open the tailgate.
CONTINUED
425
2008 MDX


PLASTIC COVER
KNOB COVER
5. The tools and jack are under the 6. Turn the jacks end bracket 7. The spare tire is stored
cargo area behind a cover on the counterclockwise to loosen it, then underneath the rear cargo area.
drivers side. Remove the cover by remove the jack. Remove the plastic cover on the
turning the knobs cargo area lining to access the
counterclockwise, then pulling out shaft for the spare tire hoist.
the cover.
426
2008 MDX


WHEEL NUT WRENCH WHEEL NUT WRENCH
BRACKET
9. Keep turning the wheel nut 11.Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
wrench to create slack in the cable. with the wheel nut wrench.
The wheel nut wrench supplied with

your vehicle is specially adapted to f it 10.Remove the bracket from the
the hoist shaf t. Do not use any other spare tire.
tool.
8. Put the wheel nut wrench on the

hoist shaft. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire to the ground.
CONTINUED
427
2008 MDX


EXTENSION
JACKING POINT WHEEL NUT WRENCH BRAKE HUB
12. Place the jack under the jacking 13. Use the extension and the wheel 15.Before mounting the spare tire,
point nearest the tire you need to nut wrench as shown to raise the wipe any dirt off the mounting
change. Turn the end bracket vehicle until the flat tire is off the surface of the wheel and hub with
clockwise until the top of the jack ground. a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
contacts the jacking point. Make carefully; it may be hot from
sure the jacking point tab is 14.Remove the wheel nuts, then driving.
resting in the jack notch. remove the flat tire.
428
2008 MDX


16.Put on the spare tire. Put the 20.Place the flat tire face up under
wheel nuts back on finger-tight, the hoist.
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench 21.Insert the hoist bracket into the
until the wheel is firmly against center hole of the flat tire.
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
17.Lower the vehicle to the ground,

and remove the jack.
18.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in

the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at

the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
94 lbfft (127 Nm , 13 kgfm)
19.Remove the center cap from the

flat tire.
CONTINUED
429
2008 MDX


WHEEL NUT WRENCH

Always raise the spare tire hoist, even Loose items can fly around the
if you are not stowing a tire. If the interior in a crash and could
hoist is lef t down, it will be damaged seriously injure the occupants.
during driving and need to be replaced.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
24.Store the jack in its holder. Turn securely before driving.
the jacks end bracket to lock it in
place. Store the tools, and install
the cover.
25.Refer to Changing a Tire with

22.Slowly turn the wheel nut wrench TPMS (see page 355 ).
clockwise to take up the slack of
the hoist cable. Make sure the
bracket is seated in the center
hole of the flat tire.
23.Turn the wheel nut wrench

clockwise until the flat tire rests
against the underbody of the
vehicle and you hear the hoist
click.
430
2008 MDX


If the Engine Won t Start
Diagnosing why the engine wont Check these things: If the headlights dim noticeably or
start falls into two areas, depending Check the transmission interlock. go out when you try to start the
on what you hear when you turn the The transmission must be in Park engine, either the battery is
ignition switch to the START (III) or neutral or the starter will not discharged or the connections are
position: operate. corroded. Check the condition of
You hear nothing, or almost the battery and terminal connec-
nothing. The engines starter Turn the ignition switch to the ON tions (see page 421 ). You can
motor does not operate at all, or (II) position. Turn on the then try jump starting the vehicle
operates very slowly. headlights, and check their from a booster battery (see page
brightness. If the headlights are 432 ).
You can hear the starter motor very dim or do not come on at all,
operating normally, or the starter the battery is discharged. See The Starter Operates Normally
motor sounds like it is spinning Jump Starting on page 432 . In this case, the starter motors
faster than normal, but the engine speed sounds normal, or even faster
does not start up and run. Turn the ignition switch to the than normal, when you turn the
START (III) position. If the ignition switch to the START (III)

Nothing Happens or the Starter headlights do not dim, check the position, but the engine does not run.
Motor Operates Very Slowly condition of the fuses. If the fuses
When you turn the ignition switch to are OK, there is probably Are you using a properly coded
the START (III) position, you do not something wrong with the key? An improperly coded key will
hear the normal noise of the engine electrical circuit for the ignition cause the immobilizer system
trying to start. You may hear a switch or starter motor. You will indicator in the instrument panel
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or need a qualified technician to to blink rapidly (see page 70 ).
nothing at all. determine the problem. See
Emergency Towing on page 446 .
CONTINUED
431
2008 MDX


If the Engine Won t Start, Jump Starting
Are you using the proper starting Jump Starting To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
procedure? Refer to Starting the Although this seems like a simple 1. Open the hood, and check the
Engine on page 339 . procedure, you should take several physical condition of the battery.
precautions. In very cold weather, check the
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel condition of the electrolyte. If it
gauge; the warning indicator may seems slushy or frozen, do not try
not be working. jump starting until it thaws.
A battery can explode if you do
There may be an electrical not follow the correct procedure,
problem, such as no power to the seriously injuring anyone
fuel pump. Check all the fuses nearby. If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
(see page 440 ). electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Keep all sparks, open flames, Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
If you find nothing wrong, you will and smoking materials away battery can cause it to rupture.
need a qualified technician to find from the battery.
the problem. See Emergency 2. Turn off all the electrical acces-
Towing on page 446 . sories: heater, A/C, climate
You cannot start your vehicle by control, audio system, lights, etc.
pushing or pulling it. Put the transmission in neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
432
2008 MDX


Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
6. Start your vehicle. If the starter

motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
7. Once the vehicle is running,

disconnect the negative cable from
BOOSTER BATTERY your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
The numbers in the illustration show 4. Connect the second jumper cable positive cable from your vehicle,
you the order to connect the jumper to the negative () terminal on and then from the booster battery.
cables. the booster battery. Connect the

other end to the grounding strap Keep the ends of the jumper cables
3. Connect one jumper cable to the as shown. Do not connect this away from each other and any metal
positive () terminal on your jumper cable to any other part of on the vehicle until everything is
vehicles battery. Connect the the engine. disconnected. Otherwise, you may
other end to the positive () cause an electrical short.
terminal on the booster battery.
433
2008 MDX


If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of your vehicles 1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
temperature gauge should stay in Put the transmission in Park, and
the midrange under most conditions. Steam and spray from an set the parking brake. Turn off the
If it climbs to the red mark, you overheated engine can all accessories, and turn on the
should determine the reason (hot seriously scald you. hazard warning indicators.
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
Do not open the hood if steam 2. If you see steam and/or spray
If the vehicle overheats, you should is coming out. coming from under the hood, turn
take immediate action. The only off the engine. Wait until you see
indication may be the temperature no more signs of steam or spray,
gauge climbing to or above the red then open the hood.
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood. 3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
Driving with the temperature gauge the engine should start to cool
pointer at the red mark can cause down almost immediately. If it
serious damage to the engine. does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
434
2008 MDX


If the Engine Overheats
4. If the temperature gauge stays at 9. Start the engine and set the
the red mark, turn off the engine. climate control to AUTO at Hi.
Removing the radiator cap Add coolant to the radiator up to
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks, while the engine is hot can the base of the filler neck. If you
such as a split radiator hose. cause the coolant to spray out, do not have the proper coolant
Everything is still extremely hot, seriously scalding you. mixture available, you can add
so use caution. If you find a leak, it plain water. Remember to have
must be repaired before you Always let the engine and the cooling system drained and
continue driving (see Emergency radiator cool down before refilled with the proper mixture as
Towing on page 446 ). removing the radiator cap. soon as you can.
6. If you do not find an obvious leak, 10.Put the radiator cap back on
check the coolant level in the 8. Using gloves or a large heavy tightly. Run the engine, and check
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant cloth, turn the radiator cap the temperature gauge. If it goes
if the level is below the MIN mark. counterclockwise, without pushing back to the red mark, the engine
down, to the first stop. After the needs repair (see Emergency

7. If there was no coolant in the pressure releases, push down on Towing on page 446 ).
reserve tank, you may need to add the cap, and turn it until it comes
coolant to the radiator. Let the off. 11.If the temperature stays normal,
engine cool down until the pointer check the coolant level in the
reaches the middle of the tempera- radiator reserve tank. If it has
ture gauge, or lower, before check- gone down, add coolant to the
ing the radiator. MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
435
2008 MDX


Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut Charging System
Indicator off the engine. Turn on the hazard Indicator
This indicator should never come on warning indicators. If the charging system indicator
when the engine is running. If it comes on brightly when the engine
starts flashing or stays on, the oil 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. is running, the battery is not being
pressure has dropped very low or Open the hood, and check the oil charged.
lost pressure. Serious engine level (see page 326 ). An engine
damage is possible, and you should very low on oil can lose pressure You will also see a CHECK
take immediate action. during cornering and other driving CHARGING SYSTEM message on
maneuvers. the multi-information display (see
You will also see a CHECK page 81 ).
ENGINE OIL LEVEL message on 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
the multi-information display when level back to the full mark on the Immediately turn off all electrical
this indicator comes on. dipstick (see page 393 ). accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
4. Start the engine, and watch the oil the power windows. Keep the engine
pressure indicator. If it does not go running; starting the engine will
Running the engine with low oil out within 10 seconds, turn off the discharge the battery rapidly.
pressure can cause serious mechanical engine. There is a mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f problem that needs to be repaired Go to a service station or garage
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get before you can continue driving where you can get technical
the vehicle stopped. (see Emergency Towing on page assistance.
446 ).
436
2008 MDX


Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on If the indicator comes on repeatedly, these codes are set. If they are not
while driving, it means one even though it may turn off as you set, the test cannot be completed.
of the engines emissions control continue driving, have your vehicle
systems may have a problem. Even checked by the dealer as soon as If the battery in your vehicle has
though you may feel no difference in possible. been disconnected or gone dead,
your vehicles performance, it can these codes may be erased. It takes
reduce your fuel economy and cause several days of driving under various
increased emissions. Continued conditions to set the codes again.
operation may cause serious damage. If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can To check if they are set, turn the
If you have recently refueled your damage your vehicles emissions ignition switch to the ON (II)
vehicle, the indicator coming on controls and engine. Those repairs may position, without starting the engine.
could be due to a loose or missing not be covered by your vehicles The malfunction indicator lamp will
fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it warranties. come on for 20 seconds. If it then
clicks at least once. Tightening the goes off, the readiness codes are set.
cap will not turn the indicator off You will also see a CHECK If it blinks five times, the readiness

immediately; it can take several days EMISSION SYSTEM message on codes are not set. If possible, do not
of normal driving. the multi-information display (see take your vehicle for an emissions
page 81 ). test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to Emissions Testing for
Readiness Code more information (see page 463 ).
Your vehicle has certain readiness
codes that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
437
2008 MDX


Brake System Indicator
U.S. Canada If the fluid level is low, take your Slow down by shifting to a lower
The brake system vehicle to a dealer, and have the gear, and pull to the side of the road
indicator normally brake system inspected for leaks or when it is safe. Because of the long
comes on when you turn the ignition worn brake pads. distance needed to stop, it is
switch to the ON (II) position, and as hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
a reminder to check the parking However, if the brake pedal does not should have it towed, and repaired as
brake. It will stay on if you do not feel normal, you should take soon as possible (see Emergency
fully release the parking brake. immediate action. A problem in one Towing on page 446 ).
part of the systems dual circuit
If the brake system indicator comes design will still give you braking at If you must drive the vehicle a short
on while driving, the brake fluid level two wheels. You will feel the brake distance in this condition, drive
is probably low. Press lightly on the pedal go down much farther before slowly and carefully.
brake pedal to see if it feels normal. the vehicle begins to slow down, and
If it does, check the brake fluid level you will have to press harder on the If the ABS indicator and the VSA
the next time you stop at a service pedal. system indicator come on with the
station (see page 401 ). brake system indicator, have your
You will also see a CHECK BRAKE vehicle inspected by your dealer
You will also see a LOW BRAKE SYSTEM message on the multi- immediately.
FLUID message on the multi- information display (see page 81 ).
information display (see page 81 ).
438
2008 MDX


Fuses
INTERIOR LID REAR LID UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY)
TAB
The vehicles fuses are located in The rear fuse box is located at the
four fuse boxes. left side of cargo area. UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)

The interior fuse box is underneath The primary under-hood fuse box is
the dashboard on the drivers side. located next to the battery. The
secondary fuse box is on the
To remove the fuse box lid, put your passengers side.
finger in the notch on the lid, pull it
toward you, and take it out of its To open it, push the tabs as shown.
hinges.
TAB
439
2008 MDX


Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses FUSE BLOWN

If something electrical in your BLOWN
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
443 , 444 , and 445 , or the diagram
on the fuse box lid, which fuse or
fuses control that device. Check
those fuses first, but check all the
fuses before deciding that a blown
fuse is the cause. Replace any blown
fuses, and check if the device works.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the 3. Check each of the large fuses in
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the the under-hood fuse boxes by
headlights and all other looking through the top at the wire
accessories are off. inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head
2. Remove the cover from the fuse screwdriver.
box.
440
2008 MDX


Fuses
BLOWN
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a

spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
FUSE PULLER might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
4. Check the smaller fuses in the 5. Look for a burned wire inside the fuse with one of the correct rating as
under-hood fuse boxes and rear fuse. If it is burned out, replace it soon as you can.
fuse box, and all the fuses in the with one of the spare fuses of the

interior and rear fuse boxes by same rating or lower.
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
CONTINUED
441
2008 MDX


Fuses
If the radio fuse is removed, the

audio system will disable itself. The
Replacing a f use with one that has a next time you turn on the radio you
higher rating greatly increases the will see ENTER CODE in the
chances of damaging the electrical frequency display. Use the preset
system. If you do not have a buttons to enter the digit code (see
replacement f use with the proper rating page 235 ).
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
6. If the replacement fuse of the

same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
442
2008 MDX


Fuse Locations
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 120 A Main fuse 35 50 A Power Window

Not Used 36 60 A SH-AWD, Power Tailgate
21 Not Used Open/Closer, Rear ACC
22 Not Used Socket, Cargo Area Light,
23 30 A Rear Blower Motor Rear Defroster
24 40 A ABS VSA 37 30 A ECU (PCM)
25 40 A Trailer Main 38 Not Used
26 40 A Power Seats, Drivers 4 40 A Audio, Door Lock, Interior
Position Memory System, Lights
Subwoofer 5 Not Used
27 40 A Front Heated Seat, TPMS, 6 Not Used
Moonroof, Drivers Lumber 7 30 A Active Damper Control Unit
Support 8 30 A Audio Amplifier

28 Not Used 9 7.5 A Rear Entertainment System
31 60 A Fog Lights, Front Blower 10 15 A Hazard
Motor 11 15 A Horn, Stop
32 40 A Headlights, Daytime 12 20 A ABS VSA
Running Lights 13 20 A Trailer (Brake)
33 60 A Cooling Fan, Condenser Fan, 14 20 A Rear Heated Seat
MG Clutch, Headlight 15 20 A A/C Inverter
Washer
34 50 A Ignition Switch Main
: Canadian model
443
2008 MDX


Fuse Locations
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX REAR FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected
5 7.5 A Small Lights (Exterior)

6 30 A Headlight Low Main
7 7.5 A Cooling Fan Timer
8 15 A IGP
9 15 A IG Coil
10 15 A DBW
11 15 A AFHT
12 40 A Front Blower Motor
13 20 A Fog lights
14 30 A Headlight Washer
15 30 A Condenser Fan No. Amps. Circuits Protected
No. Amps. Circuits Protected 16 30 A Cooling Fan
17 7.5 A MG Clutch 1 Not Used
1 10 A Left Daytime Running Light 18 15 A Left Headlight Low 2 Not Used
2 10 A Right Daytime Running 19 15 A Right Headlight Low 3 Not Used
Light 22 7.5 A Small Lights (Interior) 4 Not Used
3 10 A Left Headlight High : Canadian model 5 10 A Rear ACC Socket
4 10 A Right Headlight High 6 20 A Power Tailgate
7 Not Used
8 10 A Cargo Area Light
9 30 A SH-AWD
10 30 A Rear Defroster
11 40 A Power Tailgate
444
2008 MDX


Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
6 7.5 A Interior Light 22 10 A SRS

7 10 A Interior Light, Moonroof 23 Not Used
8 20 A Door Lock 24 20 A Left Rear Power Window
9 15 A ACC Socket 25 20 A Right Rear Power Window
10 15 A IG Coil 26 30 A Passengers Power Window
11 30 A Windshield Wiper 27 30 A Drivers Power Window
12 10 A Subwoofer 28 20 A Tilt Steering Wheel
Auxiliary 13 20 A Passengers Power Recline 29 10 A ABS VSA
14 20 A Drivers Power Slide 30 10 A A/C
15 20 A Telescope Steering Wheel Headlight Auto Leveling,
No. Amps. Circuits Protected 16 20 A Drivers Power Recline 31 15 A Rear Wiper, Windshield/
17 20 A Passengers Power Slide Rear Washer
1 7.5 A TPMS 18 10 A Alternator 32 10 A ACC

2 10 A Drivers Lumber Support 19 20 A Fuel Pump 33 Not Used
Motor 20 7.5 A SH-AWD , Active Damper
3 10 A Moonroof Control Unit Auxiliary
4 20 A Front Heated Seats 21 7.5 A Gauges
5 10 A Audio No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 7.5 A Starter DIAG

2 7.5 A STS
445
2008 MDX


Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually, Emergency Towing
Opening the Fuel Fill Door Emergency Towing

Manually If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
LID organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
The only way you can safely tow

your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment. The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
RELEASE LEVER contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required.
If the fuel fill door release button To open the fuel fill door, pull the
does not work, use the release lever release lever rearward.
inside the rear fuse box lid in the
cargo area. Towing with only two tires on the
ground will damage parts of the
all-wheel-drive system. Your vehicle
should be transported on a f lat-bed
truck or trailer.
446
2008 MDX


If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand, Front COVER Rear COVER

mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see the previous page).
For very short distances, such as

freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchors in the front and rear
bumpers.
1. Remove the cover, put cloth on the The cover is attached to the bumper
edge of the cover and carefully pry with a tether.
with a small flat-tip screwdriver or

a metal fingernail file.
447
2008 MDX


If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WHEEL NUT WRENCH WHEEL NUT WRENCH
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use

the towing hook f or straight, f lat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
Front TOWING HOOK Rear TOWING HOOK
2. Remove the towing hook and

wheel nut wrench placed behind a
cover under the cargo area.
3. Screw the towing hook into the

hole, and tighten it with the wheel
nut wrench.
448
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 450

you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................. 452
your vehicle and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading
identification numbers. It also (U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 454
includes information you should Tire Labeling .................................. 456
know about your vehicles tires and Tire Pressure Monitoring System
emissions control systems. (TPMS) Required Federal
Explanation............................. 458
Emissions Controls........................ 460
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 462
Emissions Testing ......................... 463
449
2008 MDX


Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers located in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the drivers side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the drivers doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
450
2008 MDX


Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into

ENGINE NUMBER
the engine block. It is on the front.
The transmission number is on a

label on top of the transmission.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
451
2008 MDX


Specifications
Dimensions Capacities
Length 190.7 in (4,844 mm) Fuel tank Approx.
Width 77.0 in (1,955 mm) 21.00 US gal (79.5 )
1
Height 68.2 in (1,733 mm) Engine Change 1.93 US gal (7.3 )
Wheelbase 108.3 in (2,750 mm) coolant Total 2.43 US gal (9.2 )
Track Front 67.7 in (1,720 mm) Engine oil Change2
Rear 67.5 in (1,715 mm) Including 4.5 US qt (4.3 )
filter
Weights Without 4.2 US qt (4.0 )
Gross vehicle weight rating See the tire information label atta- filter
ched to the drivers doorjamb. Total 5.3 US qt (5.0 )
Gross combined weight1 10,053 lbs (4,560 kg) Automatic Change 3.0 US qt (2.8 )
rating (GCWR) transmission Total 8.3 US qt (7.9 )
fluid
1 : The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305 Rear Change 2.6 US qt (2.5 )
meters) of elevation. differential Total 2.9 US qt (2.7 )
fluid
Air Conditioning Transfer Change 0.4 US qt (0.4 )
Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) assembly Total 0.4 US qt (0.4 )
Charge quantity 21.222.9 oz (600650 g) fluid
Lubricant type ND-OIL8 Windshield U.S. vehicles 4.2 US qt (4.0 )
washer Canadian 6.1 US qt (5.8 )
Seating Capacities reservoir vehicles
Total 7
Front 2 1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
Second 3 engine
Third 2 Reserve tank capacity:
0.18 US gal (0.7 )
2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
452
2008 MDX


Specifications
Lights Fuses
Headlights High 12 V 60 W (HB3) Interior See page 445 or the fuse label
Low 12 V 35 W (D2S) attached to the inside of the fuse
Daytime running light 12 V 60 W (HB3) box lid.
Front side marker lights 12 V 3 CP Rear See page 444 or the fuse label
Front turn signal lights 12 V 21 W attached to the inside of the fuse
Parking lights 12 V 3 CP box lid.
Fog light 12 V 55 W (H11) Under-hood See page 443 and 444 or the fuse
Front foot lights 12 V 3.4 W box cover.
Rear turn signal lights 12 V 21 W
Rear side marker light 12 V 3 CP Engine
Backup lights 12 V 18 W Type Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC
License plate lights 12 V 3 CP VTEC V6 gasoline engine
Individual map lights Front 12 V 5W Bore x Stroke 3.54 x 3.78 in (90.0 x 96.0 mm)
Rear 12 V 5W Displacement 223.5 cu-in (3,664 cm )
Cargo area light 12 V 8W Compression ratio 11.0 : 1
Tailgate light 12 V 5W Spark plugs DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11
Vanity mirror light 12 V 2W NGK: IZFR6K11
Door light 12 V 3.4 W
Alignment
: The low beam headlights are high voltage discharged type. Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Replacement of a low beam headlight bulb should be performed by Rear 0.08 in (2.0 mm)
your dealer. Camber Front 030
Rear 030
Battery Caster Front 412
Capacity 12 V 65 AH/5 HR
12 V 76 AH/20 HR Tires
Size Front/Rear P255/55R18 104H
Spare T165/80D17 104M
Pressure Front/Rear 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
453
2008 MDX


DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction

U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tires ability to
performance according to conditions on a specified government stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on
(DOT) standards. The following graded 150 would wear one and one- specified government test surfaces
explains these gradings. half (1 1/2) times as well on the of asphalt and concrete. A tire
government course as a tire graded marked C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 100. The relative performance of performance.
Quality grades can be found where tires depends upon the actual condi-
applicable on the tire sidewall tions of their use, however, and may Warning: The traction grade
between tread shoulder and depart significantly from the norm assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For due to variations in driving habits, straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: service practices and differences in and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 road characteristics and climate. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA traction characteristics.
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform

to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
454
2008 MDX


DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature Warning: The temperature grade for

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not
tires resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed,
heat and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading,
when tested under controlled either separately or in combination,
conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
455
2008 MDX


Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle Tire Size 104 Load index (a numerical code
have a number of markings. Those Whenever tires are replaced, they associated with the maximum
you should be aware of are described should be replaced with tires of the load the tire can carry).
below. same size. The following is an
example of tire size with an H Speed symbol (an
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE explanation of what each component alphabetical code indicating
(1) means. the maximum speed rating).
P255/55R18 104H Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The tire identification number (TIN)
P Vehicle type (P indicates is a group of numbers and letters
passenger vehicle). that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
255 Tire width in millimeters. tire.
55 Aspect ratio (the tires section DOT B97R FW6X 2202

height as a percentage of its
width). DOT This indicates that the tire
(1) meets all requirements of
R Tire construction code (R the U.S. Department of
(4) (3) (2) indicates radial). Transportation.
(1) Tire Size 18 Rim diameter in inches. B97R Manufacturers
(2)
(3)
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Pressure identification mark.
(4) Maximum Tire Load
456
2008 MDX


Tire Labeling
FW6X Tire type code.
2202 Date of manufacture.

Year
Week
Maximum Tire Pressure

Max Press The maximum air
pressure the tire can
hold.
Maximum Tire Load

Max Load The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.
457
2008 MDX


Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if As an added safety feature, your Driving on a significantly under-
provided), should be checked vehicle has been equipped with a tire inflated tire causes the tire to
monthly when cold and inflated to pressure monitoring system (TPMS) overheat and can lead to tire failure.
the inflation pressure recommended that illuminates a low tire pressure Under-inflation also reduces fuel
by the vehicle manufacturer on the telltale efficiency and tire tread life, and may
vehicle placard or tire inflation affect the vehicles handling and
pressure label. stopping ability.
(If your vehicle has tires of a when one or more of your tires is Please note that the TPMS is not a
different size than the size indicated significantly under-inflated. substitute for proper tire
on the vehicle placard or tire maintenance, and it is the drivers
inflation pressure label, you should Accordingly, when the low tire responsibility to maintain correct tire
determine the proper tire inflation pressure telltale illuminates, you pressure, even if under-inflation has
pressure for those tires.) should stop and check your tires as not reached the level to trigger
soon as possible, and inflate them to illumination of the TPMS low tire
the proper pressure. pressure telltale.
458
2008 MDX


Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
Your vehicle has also been equipped Always check the TPMS malfunction
with a TPMS malfunction indicator telltale after replacing one or more
to indicate when the system is not tires or wheels on your vehicle to
operating properly. The TPMS ensure that the replacement or
malfunction indicator is combined alternate tires and wheels allow the
with the low tire pressure telltale. TPMS to continue to function
When the system detects a properly.
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
459
2008 MDX


Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act crankcase ventilation valve routes
vehicles engine produces several by- The United States Clean Air Act them from the crankcase back to the
products. Some of these are carbon sets standards for automobile intake manifold. They are then
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen emissions. It also requires that drawn into the engine and burned.
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). automobile manufacturers explain to
Gasoline evaporating from the tank owners how their emissions controls Evaporative Emissions Control
also produces hydrocarbons. Con- work and what to do to maintain System
trolling the production of NOx, CO, them. This section summarizes how As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
and HC is important to the environ- the emissions controls work. tank, an evaporative emissions
ment. Under certain conditions of Scheduled maintenance is on page control canister filled with charcoal
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC 390 . adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
react to form photochemical smog. canister while the engine is off. After
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
In Canada, Acura vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up,
bute to smog creation, but it is a with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine
poisonous gas. requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving.
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor
manufactured. Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
Crankcase Emissions Control recovery (ORVR) system captures
System the fuel vapors during refueling. The
Your vehicle has a positive vapors are adsorbed in a canister
crankcase ventilation system. This filled with activated carbon. While
keeps gasses that build up in the driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
engines crankcase from going into into the engine and burned off.
the atmosphere. The positive
460
2008 MDX


Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls Ignition Timing Control System Replacement Parts

The exhaust emissions controls This system constantly adjusts the The emissions control systems are
include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing, reducing the amount designed and certified to work
ignition timing control, exhaust gas of HC, CO, and NOx produced. together in reducing emissions to
recirculation, and three way catalytic levels that comply with the Clean Air
converter. These four systems work Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Act. To make sure the emissions
together to control the engines System remain low, you should use only new
combustion and minimize the The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) Acura replacement parts or their
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that system takes some of the exhaust equivalent for repairs. Using lower
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust gas and routes it back into the intake quality parts may increase the
emissions control systems are manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the emissions from your vehicle.
separate from the crankcase and air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
evaporative emissions control of NOx produced when the fuel is The emissions control systems are
systems. burned. covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter warranty manual for more informa-
The PGM-FI system uses sequential The three way catalytic converter is tion.
multiport fuel injection. in the exhaust system. Through
It has three subsystems: air intake, chemical reactions, it converts HC,
engine control, and fuel control. The CO, and NOx in the engines exhaust
powertrain control module (PCM) to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
uses various sensors to determine (N2), and water vapor.
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
461
2008 MDX


Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter

contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Acura part
or its equivalent.
WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC
The three way catalytic converter THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER CONVERTERS
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take A defective three way catalytic Keep the engine well maintained.
place. It can set on fire any converter contributes to air pollution,
combustible materials that come and can impair your engines per- Have your vehicle diagnosed and
near it. Park your vehicle away from formance. Follow these guidelines to repaired if it is misfiring, back-
high grass, dry leaves, or other protect your vehicles three way firing, stalling, or otherwise not
flammables. catalytic converter. running properly.
Always use unleaded gasoline.

Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
462
2008 MDX


Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes If the testing facility determines that 4. Without touching the accelerator
If you take your vehicle for an the readiness codes are not set, you pedal, start the engine, and let it
emissions test shortly after the will be requested to return at a later idle for 20 seconds.
battery has been disconnected or date to complete the test. If you must
gone dead, it may not pass the test. get the vehicle retested within the 5. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
This is because of certain readiness next two or three days, you can the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
codes that must be set in the on- condition the vehicle for retesting by hold it there until the temperature
board diagnostics for the emissions doing the following. gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
systems. These codes are erased scale (about 3 minutes).
when the battery is disconnected, 1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
and set again only after several days but not completely, full (around 6. Without touching the accelerator
of driving under a variety of 3/4). pedal, let the engine idle for 20
conditions. seconds.
2. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40 and
95F.
CONTINUED
463
2008 MDX


Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled 8. Then drive in city/suburban 9. Make sure the vehicle has been
major highway where you can traffic for at least 10 minutes. parked with the engine off for 30
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph When traffic conditions allow, let minutes.
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 the vehicle coast for several
minutes. Drive on the highway in seconds without using the If the testing facility determines the
D. Do not use cruise control. accelerator pedal or the brake readiness codes are still not set, see
When traffic allows, drive for 90 pedal. your dealer.
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
464
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Warranty and Client Relations
Client Service Information ........... 466

Warranty Coverages ..................... 467
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 468
Authorized Manuals ...................... 469

465
2008 MDX


Client Service Information
Acura dealership personnel are Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
trained professionals. They should Acura Client Services us this information:
be able to answer all your questions. Honda Canada Inc.
If you encounter a problem that your 715 Milner Avenue Vehicle Identification Number
dealership does not solve to your Toronto, ON (see page 450 )
satisfaction, please discuss it with M1B 2K8 Name and address of the dealer
the dealerships management. The who services your vehicle
service manager or general manager Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9 Date of purchase
can help. Almost all problems are Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909 Mileage on your vehicle
solved in this way. Toronto (416) 287-4776 Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
If you are dissatisfied with the In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin A detailed description of the
decision made by the dealerships Islands: problem
management, contact the Acura Vortex Motor Corp. Name of the dealer who sold the
Client Services Office. Bella International vehicle to you
P.O. Box 190816
U.S. Owners: San Juan, PR 00919-0816
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Acura Client Services Tel: (787) 620-7546
Mail Stop 500-2N-7E
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 382-2238
466
2008 MDX


Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty provides prorated
warranties: covered by a limited warranty. coverage for a replacement battery
Please read your warranty booklet purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty for details.
covers your new vehicle, except for Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the battery, emissions control Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Limited Warranty provides

systems, and accessories, against all exterior body panels are coverage for as long as the pur-
defects in materials and covered for rust-through from the chaser of the muffler owns the
workmanship. inside for the specified time period vehicle.
with no mileage limit.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Restrictions and exclusions apply to
Warranty and Emissions Accessory Limited Warranty all these warranties. Please read the
Performance Warranty these two Acura accessories are covered under 2008 Acura warranty information
warranties cover your vehicles this warranty. Time and mileage booklet that came with your vehicle
emissions control systems. Time, limits depend on the type of for precise information on warranty
mileage, and coverage are accessory and other factors. Please coverages. Your vehicles original
conditional. Please read your read your warranty manual for tires are covered by their
warranty booklet for exact details. manufacturer. Tire warranty
information. information is in a separate booklet.
Replacement Parts Limited
Original Equipment Battery Limited Warranty covers all Acura Canadian Owners
Warranty this warranty gives up replacement parts against defects in Please refer to the 2008 warranty
to 100 % credit toward a replacement materials and workmanship. manual that came with your vehicle.
battery.
467
2008 MDX


Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar To contact NHTSA, you may call the
defect which could cause a crash or complaints, it may open an Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
could cause injury or death, you investigation, and if it finds that a 1-888-327-4236
should immediately inform the safety defect exists in a group of (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
National Highway Traffic Safety vehicles, it may order a recall and http://www.saf ercar.gov; or write to:
Administration (NHTSA), in addition remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
to notifying American Honda Motor cannot become involved in individual Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
Co., Inc. problems between you, your dealer, 20590.
or Acura Automobile Division, You can also obtain other
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.
468
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S.only) Service Manual:

The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online: repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
Go online at www. helminc. com for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356. Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
Publication Form Description troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
Form Number in your vehicle.
61STX01 2007-2008 Acura MDX Service Manual
61STX01EL 2008 Acura MDX Body Repair Manual:
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
Authorized Manuals
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
61STX30 2008 Acura MDX Body Repair Manual of damaged body parts.
31STX610 2008 Acura MDX Owners Manual
31STX810 2008 Acura MDX
Navigation System Owners Manual
31STXM10 2008 Acura MDX Maintenance Journal
31STXQ10 2008 Acura MDX Quick Start Guide
ACU-R Order Form for Previous Years
Indicate Year and Model Desired
469
2008 MDX

Main Menu
470
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Index
A Automatic Lighting........................ 119 Break-in, New Linings .............. 322

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 22 Fluid ............................................ 401
Accessories and Modifications .... 330 Automatic Speed Control.............. 270 Parking ........................................ 153
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Automatic Transmission............... 341 System Indicator .................. 65, 438
Position) ...................................... 129 Capacity, Fluid ........................... 452 Wear Indicators ......................... 357
Accessory Power Sockets............. 166 Checking Fluid Level ................ 399 Braking System.............................. 356
AC Power Outlet ............................ 167 Shifting ........................................ 341 Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 322
Active Damper System ................. 361 Shift Lever Position Brightness Control,
Acura Link ...................................... 308 Indicators ................................ 341 Instruments ................................ 123
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 394 Shift Lever Positions ................. 342 Brights, Headlights ....................... 118
Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 24 Shift Lock Release ..................... 346 Bulb Replacement
Air Conditioning System ............... 170 Back-up Lights ........................... 407
Rear A/C Control ...................... 175 B Front Parking Lights ................. 404
Air Outlets (Vents) ........................ 177 Front Side Marker Lights......... 404
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 415 Battery Headlights .................................. 403
Antifreeze ....................................... 396 Charging System Rear Bulbs .................................. 406
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Indicator............................ 65, 436 Specifications ............................. 453
Indicator Light ..................... 66, 357 Jump Starting ............................. 432 Turn Signal Lights ..................... 404
Operation .................................... 357 Maintenance ............................... 421 Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 403
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 235 Specifications ............................. 453
Anti-theft Steering Column Before Driving ............................... 321 C
Lock ............................................. 129 Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 20
Audio System ................. 180, 181, 200 Beverage Holders .......................... 163 Cancel Button................................. 272
INDEX
Auto Control Mode, Starting Booster Seats ................................... 55 Capacities Chart............................. 452
Engine ......................................... 339 Brakes
Automatic Climate Control........... 170 Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 357 CONTINUED
I
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Index
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 58 Child Seats ........................................ 45 Meter Setup .................................. 89
Cargo Area Light ........................... 161 LATCH Anchorage Points ......... 47 Position Setup............................... 97
Cargo Hook .................................... 336 Tether Anchorage Points ..... 52, 53 Setting to Default ......................... 86
Cargo, How to Carry ..................... 332 Cleaning Seat Belts........................ 409 Wiper Setup ................................ 113
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii Client Service Office ..................... 466
Certification Label ......................... 450 Climate Control System ................ 170 D
Chains, Tires .................................. 420 Clock ............................................... 236
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 425 Code, Audio System ...................... 235 DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Changing Oil CO in the Exhaust ......................... 460 Dashboard .................................... 3, 62
How to ......................................... 394 Compact Spare Tire....................... 424 Daytime Running Lights............... 120
When to....................................... 383 Console Compartment .................. 164 Dead Battery .................................. 432
Charging System Indicator .... 65, 436 Consumer Information................ 466 Defects, Reporting Safety............. 468
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 338 Controls, Instruments and .............. 61 Defogger, Rear Window ............... 122
Childproof Door Locks ................. 131 Coolant Defrosting the Windows ............... 174
Child Safety ...................................... 37 Adding ......................................... 396 Differential Fluid ........................... 452
Booster Seats ............................... 55 Checking ..................................... 326 Dimensions ..................................... 452
Child Seats .............................. 42, 45 Proper Solution .......................... 396 Dimming the Headlights .............. 118
Important Safety Reminders ...... 41 Temperature Gauge .................... 72 Dipstick
Infants ........................................... 42 Crankcase Emissions Control Automatic Transmission........... 399
Larger Children ........................... 54 System......................................... 460 Engine Oil ................................... 326
LATCH.......................................... 47 Cruise Control Indicator ................. 70 Directional Signals ........................... 67
Risks with Airbags....................... 38 Cruise Control Operation ............. 270 Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 357
Small Children.............................. 43 Cup Holders.................................... 163 Disc Care ........................................ 229
Tether ........................................... 51 Customize Settings .......................... 83 Disc Changer ......................... 190, 218
Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 38 Door/Window Setup ................. 105 Disc Changer Error
Lighting Setup............................ 100 Messages ............................ 199, 228
II
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Index
Disc Player ............................. 190, 218 Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 122 Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 460
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 395 Jump Starting ............................. 432 Exhaust Fumes ................................ 58
Doors Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 436 Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Locking and Unlocking ............. 130 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 437 System......................................... 461
Lockout Prevention ................... 131 Overheated Engine ................... 434 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Monitor ......................................... 11 Opening the Fuel Fill Door Belts by ......................................... 18
Power Door Locks ..................... 130 Manually ................................. 446
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 454 Towing ........................................ 446 F
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5 Emergency Brake .......................... 153
Driving ............................................ 337 Emergency Flashers ..................... 122 Fan, Interior.................................... 173
Economy ..................................... 327 Emergency Towing ....................... 446 Features, Comfort and
Driving Position Memory Emissions Controls........................ 460 Convenience ............................... 169
System......................................... 157 Emissions Testing ......................... 463 Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 323
DVD Player Error Messages ....... 265 Engine Filters
DVD Player .................................... 240 Check Starting System ............. 340 Oil ................................................ 394
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 72 Flashers, Hazard Warning............ 122
E If it Wont Start .......................... 431 Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 425
Malfunction Indicator Floor Mats ...................................... 410
Economy, Fuel ............................... 327 Lamp ................................. 65, 437 Fluids
Emergencies................................... 423 Oil Life ........................................ 383 Automatic Transmission........... 399
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 432 Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 65, 436 Brake ........................................... 401
Brake System Indicator ............ 438 Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 393 Power Steering........................... 402
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 425 Overheating................................ 434 Windshield Washer ................... 398
INDEX
Charging System Indicator ...... 436 Specifications ............................. 453
Checking the Fuses................... 440 Speed Limiter ............................. 346
Driving with a Flat Tire ............ 424 Starting........................................ 339 CONTINUED
III
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Index
FM Stereo Radio Gasoline .......................................... 322 Headlights ...................................... 118

Reception .................................... 205 Gauge ............................................ 72 Aiming ......................................... 403
Fog Lights ...................................... 120 Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 71 Automatic Lighting ................... 119
Folding the Second Seat ............... 144 Octane Requirement ................. 322 Daytime Running Lights .......... 120
Folding the Third Seat .................. 145 Tank, Refueling ......................... 323 High Beam Indicator ................... 70
Four-way Flashers ......................... 122 Gas Station Procedures................. 323 High Beams, Turning on .......... 118
Front Airbags ............................... 9, 27 Gauges Lights On Indicator ..................... 70
Front Seat ....................................... 140 Engine Coolant Temperature .... 72 Low Beams, Turning on ........... 118
Adjusting..................................... 140 Fuel ................................................ 72 Reminder Chime........................ 118
Airbags ...................................... 9, 27 Speedometer ................................ 72 Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 403
Heaters........................................ 148 Tachometer .................................. 72 Turning on .................................. 118
Fuel .................................................. 322 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Washers ...................................... 117
Fill Door and Cap....................... 323 Rating) ........................................ 364 Headphones.................................... 266
Gauge ............................................ 72 GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Head Restraints ............................. 141
Octane Requirement ................. 322 Rating) ........................................ 364 Heated Mirror ................................ 156
Opening the Fuel Fill Door Gearshift Lever Positions ............. 342 Heaters, Seats ................................ 148
Manually ................................. 446 Glove Box ....................................... 164 Heating and Cooling ...................... 170
Oxygenated ................................ 322 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight High-Low Beam Switch ................ 118
Reserve Indicator......................... 71 Rating) ........................................ 364 HomeLink Universal
Tank, Filling the......................... 323 Transceiver................................. 276
Tighten Fuel Cap ....................... 324 H Hood, Opening the ........................ 325
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 440 Horn................................................. 115
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 403
G HandsFreeLinkTM ........................... 280 I
HFL Buttons............................... 281
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 327 Hazard Warning Flashers............. 122 Identification Number, Vehicle.... 450
IV
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Index
Ignition SH-AWD ............................. 69, 348 K

Keys............................................. 126 SRS ................................................ 66
Switch .......................................... 129 System Message .................... 69, 80 Keys ................................................. 126
Timing Control System ............. 461 Tire Pressure Monitor ................ 68 Keyless Memory Settings ............ 139
Immobilizer System....................... 128 Turn Signal and Hazard
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6 Warning .................................... 67 L
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 63 VSA Activation ............................. 67
Active Damper System ....... 71, 361 VSA System .................................. 67 Label, Certification ........................ 450
ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ................ 66 Individual Map Lights ................... 160 Lane Change, Signaling ................ 118
A/T Temp..................................... 68 Infant Restraint ................................ 42 Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 15, 21
Brake (Parking and Brake Infant Seats ....................................... 42 Light Control Switch ..................... 159
System) ............................. 65, 438 Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 415 Lights
Charging System ................. 65, 436 Inside Mirror .................................. 154 Bulb Replacement ..................... 403
Cruise Control .............................. 70 Inspection, Tire .............................. 417 Indicator ........................................ 63
Cruise Main .................................. 70 Instrument Panel ......................... 4, 63 Interior ........................................ 159
Fog Lights .................................... 70 Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 123 Parking ........................................ 118
High Beam .................................... 70 Interface Dial ......................... 200, 308 Load Limit .............................. 333, 364
Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 70 Interior Lights ................................ 159 LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ..... 129
Lights On ...................................... 70 Introduction ......................................... i
Low Fuel ....................................... 71
Low Oil Pressure ................. 65, 436 J
Low Tire Pressure ....................... 68
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 437 Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 428
INDEX
Security System ........................... 71 Jack, Tire ........................................ 425
Side Airbag Off ............................ 66 Jump Starting ................................. 432
Seat Belt ........................................ 64 CONTINUED
V
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Index
Locks Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 155 Selecting Proper Viscosity

Anti-theft Steering Column ...... 129 Modifications.................................. 331 Chart ....................................... 393
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 323 Modifying Your Vehicle................ 331 ON (Ignition Key Position) .......... 129
Glove Box ................................... 164 Moonroof ........................................ 152 Outside Mirrors ............................. 154
Lockout Prevention ................... 131 Multi-Information Display .............. 73 Outside Temperature ...................... 76
Power Door ................................ 130 Overheating, Engine ..................... 434
Tailgate ............................... 131, 132 N Owners Maintenance Checks ..... 389
Low Coolant Level ......................... 326 Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 322
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 71 Neutral Gear Position.................... 342
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 65, 436 New Vehicle Break-in ................... 322 P
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 452 NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Luggage, Storing (cargo) ............. 332 Numbers, Identification ................ 450 Panel Brightness Control ............. 123
Park Gear Position......................... 342
M O Parking ............................................ 350
Parking Brake ................................ 153
Maintenance ................................... 381 Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 322 Parking Brake and Brake
Owners Maintenance Odometer .......................................... 75 System Indicator .................. 65, 438
Checks .................................... 389 Odometer, Trip ................................ 75 Parking Lights................................ 118
Minder......................................... 383 Off-Highway Driving ..................... 377 Parking Over Things that Burn ... 350
Safety........................................... 382 Off-Road Precautions .................... 377 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ..... 34
Schedule ..................................... 390 Oil PGM-FI System.............................. 461
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 437 Change, How to ......................... 394 Power Seat Adjustments ............... 140
Memory, Driving Position ............ 157 Change, When to ....................... 383 Power Socket Locations................ 162
Message Display .............................. 80 Checking Engine ....................... 326 Power Windows ............................. 149
Message Indicator ........................... 69 Life, Engine ................................ 383 Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 18
Meters, Gauges ................................ 72 Pressure Indicator ............... 65, 436
VI
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Index
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11 Reclining the Seat Backs .............. 140 Safety Features .................................. 7
Additional Safety Precautions .... 19 Reclining the Second Seats .......... 144 Airbags ............................................ 9
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18 Reminder Indicators ........................ 64 Door Locks ................................... 11
Protecting Children ......................... 37 Remote Audio Controls................. 233 Head Restraints ........................... 14
General Guidelines ...................... 37 Remote Control (RES) .................. 242 Seat Belts .................................. 8, 15
Protecting Infants ........................ 42 Remote Transmitter ...................... 135 Seats & Seat-Backs ................ 12, 13
Protecting Larger Children ........ 54 Replacement Information Safety Labels, Location of .............. 59
Protecting Small Children .......... 43 Engine Oil and Filter ................. 394 Safety Messages ............................... iii
Using Child Seats with Fuses ........................................... 440 Satellite Radio, XM ................ 185, 210
Tethers...................................... 51 Light Bulbs ................................. 403 Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 15
Using LATCH .............................. 47 Schedule ..................................... 383 Additional Information ................ 20
Timing Belt ................................. 402 Automatic Seat Belt
R Tires ............................................ 418 Tensioners ................................ 22
Wiper Blades .............................. 411 Cleaning ...................................... 409
Radiator Overheating .................... 434 Replacing Seat Belts After a Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 21
Radio/Disc Sound System.... 181, 201 Crash ............................................. 23 Maintenance ................................. 23
Readiness Codes ............................ 462 Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant .... 326 Reminder Light and
Rear A/C Unit ................................ 175 Restraint, Child ................................ 37 Beeper ................................. 20, 64
Rear Audio Control Panel ............. 241 Reverse Gear Position................... 342 System Components.................... 20
Rear Entertainment System ......... 237 Rotation, Tire ................................. 418 Use During Pregnancy................ 18
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 406 Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 15
Rear View Camera and Monitor .. 320 S
Rear View Mirror........................... 154
INDEX
Rear Window Defogger ................ 174 Safety Belts................................... 8, 20
Rear Window Wiper and Safety Defects, Reporting .......... 468
Washer ........................................ 117 CONTINUED
VII
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Index
Seats ................................................ 140 Side Airbags ..................................... 30 START (Ignition Key Position) ... 129
Adjusting the Second Seat ........ 144 Off Indicator ................................. 33 Starting the Engine........................ 339
Folding the Second Seat ........... 144 Side Curtain Airbags ....................... 32 Auto Control Mode.................... 339
Folding the Third Seat .............. 145 Side Marker Lights, Bulb In Cold Weather at High
Head Restraints ......................... 141 Replacement in .......................... 404 Altitude ................................... 340
Heaters........................................ 148 Signaling Turns ................................ 67 With a Dead Battery ................. 432
Position Memory ....................... 157 Snow Tires ...................................... 419 State Emissions Testing ............... 460
Third Row Access ..................... 145 Sound System......................... 180, 200 Steam Coming from Engine ......... 434
Security System ............................. 269 Spare Tire Steering Wheel
Sensors Inflating............................... 416, 424 Adjustment ................................. 124
Drivers Seat Position Sensor ..... 29 Specifications ............................. 453 Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 129
Front Passengers Weight Specifications Charts..................... 452 Buttons ....................... 233, 270, 281
Sensors...................................... 29 Speed Limiter ................................. 346 Position Memory ....................... 157
Impact Sensors....................... 25, 26 Speed Control ................................. 270 Stereo Sound System .... 180, 181, 200
Sequential SportShift Mode ......... 343 Speedometer .................................... 72 Storage Compartment ................... 164
Serial Number ................................ 450 SRS, Additional Information........... 24 Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 422
Service Intervals ............................ 383 Additional Safety Precautions .... 35 Sun Visor......................................... 166
Service Manual ............................ 469 Airbag System Components ....... 24 Supplemental Restraint System
Service Station Procedures .......... 323 Airbag Service .............................. 35 Servicing ....................................... 35
SH-AWD ....................................... 348 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 33 SRS Indicator.......................... 33, 66
Indicator ........................................ 69 How Your Front Airbags System Components.................... 24
Torque Distribution Monitor ... 348 Work.......................................... 27 Synthetic Oil ................................... 394
Shifting the Automatic How Your Side Airbags Work.... 30
Transmission .............................. 341 How Your Side Curtain Airbags T
Shift Lever Position Indicator ...... 341 Work.......................................... 32
Shift Lock Release ......................... 346 SRS Indicator.............................. 33, 66 Tachometer ...................................... 72
VIII
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Index
Tailgate ........................................... 131 Tire Pressure Monitoring Trailer Loading .......................... 364
Opening the ................................ 131 System (TPMS) ............. 351, 458 Trailer Stability Assist ............... 376
Open Monitor ............................... 11 Low Tire Pressure Trailer Towing Tips .................. 372
Power .......................................... 132 Indicator............................ 68, 351 Trailer Stability Assist ................... 375
Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ....... 406 Tire Pressure Monitor ........ 77, 352 Transmission
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 423 Tires ................................................ 415 Checking Fluid Level ................ 399
Technical Descriptions Air Pressure ............................... 415 Fluid Selection............................ 400
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 454 Checking Wear .......................... 417 Identification Number............... 450
Emissions Control Systems ...... 460 Compact Spare ........................... 424 Shifting the Automatic .............. 341
Three Way Catalytic DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 454 Treadwear ...................................... 417
Converter ................................ 461 Inflation ....................................... 415 Trip Computer ................................. 78
Temperature Gauge ........................ 72 Inspection ................................... 417 Trip Meter ........................................ 75
Temperature, Inside Sensor ......... 179 Maintenance ............................... 418 Turn Signals ..................................... 67
Temperature, Outside ..................... 76 Replacing .................................... 418 Tools, Tire Changing .................... 425
Tensioners, Seat Belts .................... 22 Rotating....................................... 418
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 51 Snow ............................................ 419 U
Theft Protection, Radio................. 235 Specifications ............................. 453
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 462 Tire Chains ................................. 420 Unexpected, Taking Care
Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel .. 124 Tools, Tire Changing .................... 425 of the ........................................... 423
Timing Belt ..................................... 402 Torque Distribution Monitor Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 454
Tire Chains ..................................... 420 (SH-AWD) ................................ 348 Unleaded Gasoline......................... 322
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 425 Towing Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 395
Tire Labeling .................................. 456 A Trailer ...................................... 363
INDEX
Emergency Wrecker ................. 446
Equipment and Accessories ..... 368
Weight Limit .............................. 364 CONTINUED
IX
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Index
V Wheels
: U.S. only
Adjusting the Steering .............. 124
Vanity Mirror ................................. 166 Alignment and Balance ............. 418
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 333 Aluminum Alloy Wheels ........... 421
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 452 Cleaning ...................................... 421
Vehicle Identification Number..... 450 Compact Spare ........................... 424
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) Wrench, Nut ............................... 427
System..................................... 359 Windows
VSA System Indicator ... 67, 81, 359 Auto Reverse .............................. 150
VSA Activation Operating the Power ................. 149
Indicator ..................... 67, 81, 359 Rear, Defogger .......................... 122
VSA Off Switch .......................... 360 Windshield
Vehicle Storage .............................. 422 Cleaning ...................................... 116
Ventilation ...................................... 177 Defroster .................................... 174
VIN .................................................. 450 Washers ...................................... 116
Viscosity, Oil................................... 393 Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 411
W Operation .................................... 116
Rear Windshield Wiper and
WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii Washer .................................... 117
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 59 Worn Tires ..................................... 417
Warranty Coverages ................... 467 Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 446
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 398 X
Level Indicator ............................. 82
Operation .................................... 116 XM Satellite Radio ................. 185, 210
X
2008 MDX

Main Menu
2008 MDX

Main Menu
2008 MDX

Main Menu
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Rear Differential Fluid: Brake Fluid:

Premium unleaded gasoline, Use Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
pump octane number of 91 or Transmission Fluid) only. DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
higher. DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
Capacity: replacement (see page 401 ).
Fuel Tank Capacity: SH-AWD differential case
21.00 US gal (79.5 ) 2.6 US qt (2.5 ) Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Front/Rear:
Recommended Engine Oil: Transfer Assembly Fluid: 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
API Premium grade 5W-20 SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity Compact Spare Tire:
detergent oil (see page 393 ). hypoid gear oil, API service 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
classified GL4 or GL5 only.
Oil change capacity (including
filter): Power Steering Fluid:
4.5 US qt (4.3 ) Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
Automatic Transmission Fluid: power steering fluid as a
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic temporary replacement. Do not
Transmission Fluid) (see page use ATF (see page 402 ).
400 ).
2008 MDX

Main Menu
Owner s Identification
OWNER This owners manual should be considered

a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This Owners Manual covers all models of

ADDRESS the MDX. You may find descriptions of
STREET equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
The information and specifications included

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ in this publication were in effect at the time
POSTAL CODE of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
V. I. N. Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
DELIVERY DATE without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME DEALER NO. POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN

AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d un Manuel du Conducteur
ADDRESS en fran ais, veuillez demander
STREET votre concessionnaire de
commander le numro de pice
33STXC10
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
OWNERS SIGNATURE
DEALERS SIGNATURE
2008 MDX

Acura MDX Owners Manual 2008 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Acura MDX Owners Manual 2008 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Main Menu

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the

California Proposition 65 Warning

Event Data Recorders

Service Diagnostic Recorders

Of course, it is not practical or You CAN be HURT if you dont follow

Owner's Identification Form

Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)

Contents Before Driving Technical Information

Your Vehicle at a Glance

HOOD RELEASE PARKING BRAKE AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS HEADPHONE CONNECTORS

HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/ STEERING WHEEL WINDSHIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Driver and Passenger Safety

(6) (8) (2) However, you and your passengers

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Introduction Your vehicle has a door and tailgate

Driver and Passenger Safety

See pages 37 41 for important

When one or more doors are not

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Locking the doors reduces the 2.Adjust the Front Seats

Locking the doors also helps prevent

Your vehicle has the auto door

Main Menu Table Of Contents

If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head

Reclining a seat-back so that the

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Driver and Passenger Safety

The second row center seat, and

Main Menu Table Of Contents

No one should sit in a seat with an

Main Menu Table Of Contents

6.Maintain a Proper Sitting In addition, an occupant who is out of

Driver and Passenger Safety

Sitting improperly can increase the

Main Menu Table Of Contents

If you are pregnant, the best way to

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Driver and Passenger Safety

To deactivate the lockable retractor,

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners are designed to

If a side airbag or side curtain airbag

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

Driver and Passenger Safety